Technica 9400 AWY PDF

9400AWY REL.2.
0 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
HANDBOOK STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
SAFETY–EMC–EMF–ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
QUICK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . 19

1–1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1–1.1 Equipment architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1–1.1.1 Split–mount architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1–1.1.2 IDU (Indoor Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1–1.1.3 ODU (Outdoor Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1–1.1.4 IDU–ODU cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1–1.2 System configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1–1.2.1 1+0 Unprotected configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1–1.2.2 1+1 Protected configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1–2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

1–2.1 General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
1–2.1.1 Reference system standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
1–2.1.2 RF channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
1–2.1.3 Transmitted power at antenna port (ETSI and ANSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
1–2.1.4 99% power channel bandwidth and Emission Designator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
1–2.1.5 ETSI System Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
1–2.1.6 ANSI System Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
1–2.1.7 Protection switching system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
1–2.2 Tributary interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
1–2.3 Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
1–2.4 Maximum capacity and Modulation type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
02 051027 0000023750 P.CREMONESI ITAVE E.CORRADINI ITAVE

V.FOSSATI
01 050503 P.CREMONESI ITAVE E.CORRADINI ITAVE
ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ORIGINATOR

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
9400AWY Rel.2.0
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 1 / 332
332
1–2.5 IDU–ODU cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
1–2.6 Man–machine interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
1–2.7 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
1–2.8 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

1–2.9 Mechanical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

1–2.10 Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
1–2.10.1 Operating environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
1–2.10.2 Electro–magnetic compatibility/safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
1–2.10.3 Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
1–2.11 Dismantling & Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
1–2.11.1 WEEE general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
1–2.11.2 Reference documentation for dismantling and recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

2–1 STATION LAYOUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2–1.1 Constraints for 9400AWY–IDU multiple equipping in a rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2–1.2 Hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2–1.3 Hardware installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2–1.4 Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2–1.5 Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2–1.5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2–1.5.2 Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+1) IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
2–1.5.3 Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+1) ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2–2 IDU PART LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2–3 IDU PROVISIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

2–3.1 1+0 & 8 E1/DS1 IDU composition and equipment provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2–3.2 1+0 & 16 E1/DS1 IDU composition and equipment provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
2–3.3 1+0 & E3/DS3 IDU composition and equipment provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
2–3.4 1+0 & Ethernet + 8 E1/DS1 IDU composition and equipment provisioning . . . . . . . . 91
2–3.5 1+1 & 8 E1/DS1 IDU composition and equipment provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
2–3.6 1+1 & 16 E1/DS1 IDU composition and equipment provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
2–3.7 1+1 & E3/DS3 IDU composition and equipment provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
2–3.8 1+1 & Ethernet + 8 E1/DS1 IDU composition and equipment provisioning . . . . . . . . 98
2–4 IDU OPERATIVE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

2–4.1 Cautions to avoid equipment damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
2–4.2 IDU Main Unit front and rear views and access points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
2–4.3 IDU Extension Unit front and rear views and access points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
2–4.4 Description of User interfaces and connectors pin–out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
2–4.4.1 Power Supply connector pin–out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
2–4.4.2 Connector for IDU–ODU cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
2–4.4.3 E1/DS1 tributaries (1 to 8) connector pin–out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
2–4.4.4 E1/DS1 tributaries (9 to 16) connector pin–out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
2–4.4.5 E3/DS3 tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
2–4.4.6 Ethernet tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
2–4.4.7 User service channels (pin–out and description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
2–4.4.8 Alarms Housekeeping (pin–out and description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
2–4.4.9 NMS V.11 – Audio 1 (pin–out and description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
2–4.4.10 NMS G.703 – Audio 2 (pin–out and description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

2–4.4.11 ECT RS232 connector pin–out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
2–4.4.12 OS (or ECT) 10/100BaseT connector pin–out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
2–4.4.13 IDU Main Unit LEDs summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 2 / 332
332
2–4.4.14 IDU Extension Unit LEDs summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
2–4.5 Flash Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
2–4.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
2–4.5.2 Flash Card identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
2–4.5.3 Flash Card upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

2–4.6 Installation of tributary plug–ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

2–4.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
2–4.6.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
2–4.7 IDU Main unit dip–switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
2–5 DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
2–6 ODU AND ANTENNA CONFIGURATIONS, PART LISTS AND PROVISIONING . . . . . . . . . 137
2–6.1 ODU mechanical design and identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
2–6.2 ODU configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
2–6.3 ODU part lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
2–6.3.1 7–8 GHz ODU part lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
2–6.3.2 11–38 GHz ODU part lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
2–6.4 Antenna configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
2–6.4.1 1+0 configuration with integrated antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
2–6.4.2 1+1 HSB configuration with coupler and integrated antenna (11–38 GHz) . . . . . . . . 151
2–6.4.3 1+1 HSB configuration with hybrid coupler and not integrated antenna (7–8 GHz) . 152
2–6.4.4 Configuration with separated antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
2–6.5 Integrated antenna part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
2–6.6 Part list of ODU accessories and installation materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
2–7 ODU AND RELATED OPTIONAL TOOLS OPERATIVE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

2–7.1 ODU operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
2–7.1.1 General, views and access points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
2–7.1.2 ODU hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
2–7.1.3 ODU identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
2–7.2 7–8 GHz ODU additional operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
2–7.2.1 7–8 GHz ODU composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
2–7.2.2 7–8 GHz ODU’s TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
2–7.2.3 Label affixed inside the 7–8 GHz ODU BRANCHING box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
2–7.3 Light service kit cable operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
SECTION 3: MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

3–1 MAINTENANCE POLICY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
3–1.1 Classification of maintenance levels and operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
3–1.2 First Level Maintenance Personnel skill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
3–1.3 Second Level Maintenance Personnel skill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
3–2 USE OF EOW FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

3–2.1 Setting information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
3–2.2 Call Set–up/End by Telephone handset connected to the IDU Main unit . . . . . . . . . . 172
3–3 MAINTENANCE TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

3–3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
3–3.2 Instruments and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
3–3.2.1 Software tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3–3.2.2 Maintenance, Installation and Station Kit Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

3–3.3 Set of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
3–3.3.1 Types of Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 3 / 332
332
3–3.3.2 Number of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
3–3.3.3 General rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
3–3.3.4 Spare Flash Card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

3–4 FIRST LEVEL MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

3–4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3–4.2 System state display by visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3–4.2.1 LED test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3–4.2.2 Alarm LEDs on the IDU MAIN unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3–4.2.3 Alarm LEDs on the Extension unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3–4.3 Craft Terminal interface commonly used commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
3–5 SECOND LEVEL MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

3–5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
3–5.2 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
3–5.2.1 EMC norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
3–5.2.2 Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
3–5.2.3 Cautions to avoid equipment damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
3–5.3 Routine (preventive) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
3–5.3.1 Routine (preventive) Maintenance every year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
3–5.4 Consequences of unit extraction in the IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
3–5.5 Corrective Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
3–5.5.1 General flow–chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
3–5.5.2 Alarm acknowledgment and attending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
3–5.5.3 Troubleshooting starting with visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
3–5.5.4 Troubleshooting via Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
3–5.5.5 IDU unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
3–5.5.6 ODU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
3–5.6 Faulty unit repair and Repair Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
3–5.6.1 Faulty unit sending back to repair center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
3–5.6.2 Repair Form filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
SECTION 4: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

4–1 RADIO TRANSMISSION FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
4–1.1 Frequency Agility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
4–1.2 Frequency shifter management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
4–1.3 Transmitted power control: ATPC function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
4–1.4 Transmitted power control: RTPC function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
4–1.5 Internal service channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
4–1.6 User service channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
4–2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

4–2.1 Functional description and components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
4–2.1.1 Functions and configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
4–2.1.2 IDU and ODU Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
4–2.2 Control subsystem hardware architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
4–2.2.1 Function partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
4–2.2.2 Control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
4–2.3 IDU functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
4–2.3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
4–2.3.2 IDU Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

4–2.3.3 IDU Extension unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
4–2.3.4 IDU Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
4–2.4 Protection schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 4 / 332
332
4–2.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
4–2.4.2 Tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
4–2.4.3 TMN–RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
4–2.4.4 TMN line: V11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
4–2.4.5 TMN line: G.703 and “in–frame” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

4–2.4.6 User Service channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

4–2.4.7 EOW – party line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
4–2.4.8 Alarms – Housekeeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
4–2.4.9 EPS logic management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
4–2.4.10 RF TX Squelch management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
4–2.4.11 RPS–RX logic management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
4–2.4.12 Hitless Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
4–2.5 ODU functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
4–2.6 Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
4–2.6.1 IDU loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
4–2.6.2 ODU loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
4–3 IDU DATA INTERFACE PLUG–IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

4–3.1 Data plug–in block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
4–3.2 Ethernet overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
4–3.3 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
4–3.4 Integration with the PDH mux/demux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
4–3.5 Bandwidth compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
4–3.6 Ethernet Data management supported by ULS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
4–3.7 Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
4–4 NETWORK MANAGEMENT AND INTERWORKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

4–4.1 Local monitoring: ECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
4–4.1.1 Security management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
4–4.2 Small/medium sized networks: RECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
4–4.3 Large mixed network: TMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
4–4.4 1353NM operation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
4–4.5 Use of NMS channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
4–4.5.1 NMS–V11 and NMS–G703 channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
4–4.5.2 NMS–RF channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
4–5 ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

4–5.1 Alarms Provided by Item HW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
4–5.1.1 IDU Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
4–5.1.2 ODU Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
4–5.2 Alarm severity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
4–5.2.1 Equipment Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
4–5.2.2 Communication Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
SECTION 5: APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

APPENDIX A : INTRODUCTION TO THE 9400AWY RADIO SYSTEM FAMILY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
A.1 : General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
A.2 : Products of the 9400AWY family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
A.3 : 9400AWY system usage in MW links and networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
A.3.1 : Radio Hop length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
A.3.2 : Most common applications of 9400AWY family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

A.4 : 9400AWY versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
A.5 : Equipment structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
A.6 : Capacities and modulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 5 / 332
332
A.7 : Radio compatibility versus 9400UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
APPENDIX B : SAFETY–EMC–EMF–ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . 297

B.1 : Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

B.2 : Compliance with International Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

B.3 : Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
B.3.1 : General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
B.3.2 : Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
B.3.3 : Dangerous Electrical Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
B.3.4 : Risks of Explosions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
B.3.5 : Moving Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
B.3.6 : Equipment connection to earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
B.3.7 : Heat–radiating Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
B.3.8 : Microwave radiations (EMF norms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
B.3.9 : Specific safety rules in this handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
B.4 : Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
B.4.1 : EMC General Norms – Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
B.4.2 : EMC General Norms – Turn–on, Tests & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
B.4.3 : EMC General Norms – Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
B.5 : Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
B.6 : Suggestions, notes and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
B.7 : Labels affixed to the 9400AWY equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
B.7.1 : Labels affixed on the IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
B.7.2 : Labels affixed on the ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
APPENDIX C : DOCUMENTATION GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

C.1 : Handbook guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
C.1.1 : Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
C.1.2 : Purpose of the handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
C.1.3 : Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
C.2 : Documentation set description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
C.2.1 : 9400AWY Rel.2.0 product–release–version handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
C.2.2 : Additional documentation for 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
C.3 : General on Alcatel Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
C.3.1 : Customer–Independent Standard Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
C.3.2 : Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
C.3.3 : Handbook and CD–ROM supply to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
APPENDIX D : LIST OF SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
SECTION 6: ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 6 / 332
332
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
FIGURES
Fig. 1. 9400AWY R.2.0 split–mount system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Fig. 2. IDU Main Unit: external interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Fig. 3. IDU Extension Unit: external interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Fig. 4. ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Fig. 5. 9400AWY (1+0) IDU + ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Fig. 6. 9400AWY (1+0) IDU block diagram (with no tributary plug–in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Fig. 7. 9400AWY (1+0) IDU block diagram (with additional tributary plug–in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Fig. 8. IDU (1+1) system (base or with Ethernet plug–in) composition and inter–shelf cabling . . . . 38
Fig. 9. E1 / DS1 and User Service Channel split–cable structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fig. 10. 9400AWY (1+1) IDU block diagram (with no tributary plug–in and with Ethernet plug–in) 39
Fig. 11. Additional items and inter–shelf cabling of IDU (1+1) system with 9–16 E1 / DS1 plug–in 40
Fig. 12. 9400AWY (1+1) IDU block diagram (with 9–16 E1 / DS1 plug–in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Fig. 13. Additional items and inter–shelf cabling of IDU (1+1) system with E3 / DS3 plug–in . . . . . 42
Fig. 14. E3 / DS3 coaxial–split–cable structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Fig. 15. 9400AWY (1+1) IDU block diagram (with E3 / DS3 plug–in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Fig. 16. 9400AWY (1+1 HSB SD) IDU + ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Fig. 17. 9400AWY (1+1 HSB one antenna) IDU + ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Fig. 18. 9400AWY (1+1 FD Double Antenna CP or AP) IDU + ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Fig. 19. 9400AWY (1+1 FD one antenna CP) IDU + ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Fig. 20. 9400AWY (1+1 FD one antenna AP) IDU + ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Fig. 21. Station layout of 9400AWY (1+0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Fig. 22. IDU and ODU configurations in 9400AWY 1+1 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Fig. 23. Station layout of IDU “1+1 & 8E1/DS1” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fig. 24. Station layout of IDU “1+1 & 16E1/DS1” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fig. 25. Station layout of IDU “1+1 & E3/DS3” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fig. 26. Station layout of IDU “1+1 & Ethernet + 8E1/DS1” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fig. 27. Station layout of ODU (1+1) HSB–SD or FD–DA AP/CP with two antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Fig. 28. Station layout of ODU (1+1) HSB or FD–CP with one antenna (11–38 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Fig. 29. Station layout of ODU (1+1) HSB or FD–CP with not integrated antenna (7–8 GHz) . . . . 79
Fig. 30. Station layout of ODU (1+1) FD–AP with one double polar external antenna . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Fig. 31. 1+0 & 8 E1/DS1 IDU: composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Fig. 32. 1+0 & 16 E1/DS1 IDU: composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Fig. 33. 1+0 & E3/DS3 IDU: composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Fig. 34. 1+0 & Ethernet + 8 E1/DS1 IDU: composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Fig. 35. 1+1 & 8 E1/DS1 IDU: composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Fig. 36. 1+1 & 16 E1/DS1 IDU: composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Fig. 37. 1+1 & E3/DS3 IDU: composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Fig. 38. 1+1 & Ethernet + 8 E1/DS1 IDU: composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Fig. 39. IDU Main Unit front and rear views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Fig. 40. IDU Extension Unit front and rear views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Fig. 41. User service channel: V11 co–directional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Fig. 42. User service channel: V11 contra–dirdirectional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Fig. 43. User service channel: G.703 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Fig. 44. User service channel: V24/V28 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Fig. 45. Equipment outputs (summarizing and housekeeping) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Fig. 46. Equipment inputs – relay scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Fig. 47. Equipment inputs – open collector scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 48. LEDs on the IDU Main Unit front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Fig. 49. LEDs on the IDU Extension Unit front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Fig. 50. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 7 / 332
332
Fig. 51. Tributary plug–in views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Fig. 52. Dismounting the fixing brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Fig. 53. Cover unfix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Fig. 54. Release and sliding out the cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Fig. 55. Removing the cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Fig. 56. Dismounting the metal plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fig. 57. 9–16 E1/DS1 Tributary plug–in preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Fig. 58. Tributary plug–in insertion and fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Fig. 59. Dip–switch–banks on IDU MAIN unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Fig. 60. Assembly view of DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 1.0/2.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Fig. 61. Assembly view of DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 120 OHM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Fig. 62. Front view of DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 1.6/5.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Fig. 63. Front view of 1U DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 120 OHM non EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Fig. 64. Front view of 3U DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 120 OHM EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Fig. 65. Front view of DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR BNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Fig. 66. ODU types, identification, dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Fig. 67. View of ODU with integrated antenna (V polarization) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Fig. 68. View of ODU with integrated antenna (H polarization) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Fig. 69. Coupler (11–38 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Fig. 70. Coupler and related items (7–8 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Fig. 71. Nose adapters for ODU with separated antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Fig. 72. ODU LEMO connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Fig. 73. ODU views (11–38 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Fig. 74. ODU views (7–8 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Fig. 75. 7–8 GHz ODU composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Fig. 76. 7–8 GHz ODU’s TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces . . . . . . . . . . 163
Fig. 77. Label affixed inside the 7–8 GHz ODU BRANCHING box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Fig. 78. Light service kit cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Fig. 79. Lever for ODU mounting/dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Fig. 80. Cord for use with SIBDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Fig. 81. Special extractor to remove the coaxial cables 1.0/2.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Fig. 82. LEDs and pushbutton on IDU Extension unit for maintenance purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Fig. 83. LEDs and pushbutton on IDU MAIN unit for maintenance purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Fig. 84. Corrective Maintenance general flow–chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Fig. 85. Troubleshooting starting with visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Fig. 86. Details for IDU MAIN unit or FLASH CARD replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Fig. 87. Details for IDU EXTENSION unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Fig. 88. Repair form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Fig. 89. ATPC functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Fig. 90. ATPC in HSB configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Fig. 91. EOW analog party line block diagram in 1+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Fig. 92. Control subsystem block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Fig. 93. Components of the IDU Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Fig. 94. Mux/Demux block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Fig. 95. Microprocessor platform supported interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Fig. 96. Flash Card content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Fig. 97. Components of the IDU Extension unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Fig. 98. Power distribution in 1+1 systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Fig. 99. EPS and RPS system overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Fig. 100. TMN–RF: signals exchanged between Main and Extension Units at TX side . . . . . . . . . . 236
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 101. TMN–RF: signals exchanged between Main Extension Units in RX direction . . . . . . . . . . 236
Fig. 102. TMN–G.703: signals exchanged between Main and Extension Units in TX direction . . . 238
Fig. 103. TMN–G.703: signals exchanged between Main and Extension Units in RX direction . . . 238
Fig. 104. User Service Channel (TX–RX direction) in G703 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 8 / 332
332
Fig. 105. EOW–party line architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Fig. 106. EPS alarms and commands overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Fig. 107. Hot Stand By configuration: TPS alarms and commands overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Fig. 108. RPS alarms and commands overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Fig. 109. ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Fig. 110. Near end IDU cable loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Fig. 111. Far end IDU tributary loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Fig. 112. Near end tributary loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Fig. 113. Near end ODU cable loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Fig. 114. Near end RF loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Fig. 115. RF loopback scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Fig. 116. Data plug–in block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Fig. 117. Ethernet MAC frame fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Fig. 118. Ethernet data – 8E1 example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Fig. 119. Bandwidth compression examples for the 100BASE–T case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Fig. 120. Bandwidth compression examples in the 10BASE–T case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Fig. 121. Ethernet Quality of Service counters location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Fig. 122. TMN with SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Fig. 123. Possible NMS connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Fig. 124. Station connected by the NMS–RF channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Fig. 125. Hop length VS availability due to rain (4QAM – 8xE1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Fig. 126. Hop length VS availability due to rain (16QAM – 8xE1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Fig. 127. Hop length VS availability due to rain (4QAM – 16xE1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Fig. 128. Hop length VS availability due to rain (16QAM – 16xE1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Fig. 129. Cellular GSM applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Fig. 130. Cellular UMTS applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Fig. 131. Alcatel 9400 AWY integration in Wireless IP and LMDS network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Fig. 132. Lan–to–Lan Single Hop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Fig. 133. Lan–to–Lan Single Hop with SDH Transport (2 sites) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Fig. 134. Lan–to–Lan Single Hop with SDH Transport (N=3 sites) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Fig. 135. Antistatic protection device kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Fig. 136. Label affixed on the IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Fig. 137. Label affixed on the ODU and ODU’s TRANSCEIVER box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Fig. 138. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Fig. 139. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
TABLES
Tab. 1. Additional feature and SWP–version relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Tab. 2. Quick guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Tab. 3. Available Flash cards for 9400AWY R.2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Tab. 4. IDU Main Unit: external interfaces list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Tab. 5. IDU Extension Unit: external interfaces list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Tab. 6. Capacity and modulation for 9400AWY R.2.0 flash cards (IDU basic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Tab. 7. Capacity and modulation for 9400AWY R.2.0 flash cards (with 9–16 E1/DS1 plug–in) . . . 28
Tab. 8. Capacity and modulation for 9400AWY R.2.0 flash cards (with E3/DS3 plug–in) . . . . . . . . 29
Tab. 9. Capacity and modulation for 9400AWY R.2.0 flash cards (with Ethernet plug–in) . . . . . . . . 30
Tab. 10. 11 to 38 GHz 4/16 QAM configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Tab. 11. Bit rate of the IDU–ODU signal on the cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Tab. 12. 9400 AWY family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Tab. 13. ETSI System Characteristics 16E1–E3 8E1 with BER 10–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Tab. 14. ETSI System Characteristics 16E1–E3 8E1 BER 10–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Tab. 15. ETSI System Characteristics 4E1 2E1 BER 10–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Tab. 16. ETSI System Characteristics 4E1 2E1 BER 10–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Tab. 17. ANSI System Characteristics 16DS1 DS3 8DS1 BER 10–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 9 / 332
332
Tab. 18. ANSI System Characteristics 16DS1 DS3 8DS1 BER 10–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Tab. 19. ANSI System Characteristics 4DS1 BER 10–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Tab. 20. ANSI System Characteristics 4DS1 BER 10–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Tab. 21. Reference documentation for dismantling and recycling detail for 9400AWY R.2.0

equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Tab. 22. IDU part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Tab. 23. Notes to Tab. 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Tab. 24. “1+0 & 8E1” IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Tab. 25. “1+0 & 8DS1” IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Tab. 26. “1+0 & 16E1“ IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Tab. 27. “1+0 & 16DS1“ IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Tab. 28. 1+0 IDU & E3 equipment provisioning (ETSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Tab. 29. 1+0 IDU & DS3 equipment provisioning (ANSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Tab. 30. “1+0 & Ethernet + 8E1“ IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Tab. 31. “1+0 & Ethernet + 8DS1“ IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Tab. 32. 1+1 & 8E1 IDU IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Tab. 33. 1+1 & 8DS1 IDU IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Tab. 34. 1+1 & 16E1 IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Tab. 35. 1+1 & 16DS1 IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Tab. 36. 1+1 & E3 IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Tab. 37. 1+1 & DS3 IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Tab. 38. 1+1 & Ethernet + 8E1 IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Tab. 39. 1+1 & Ethernet + 8DS1 IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Tab. 40. IDU Main Unit external interfaces and access points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Tab. 41. IDU Extension Unit external interfaces and access points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Tab. 42. Power supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Tab. 43. E1/DS1 tributaries (1 to 8) connector pin–out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Tab. 44. E1/DS1 tributaries (9 to 16) connector pin–out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Tab. 45. RJ45 connectors leds for Ethernet user data interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Tab. 46. User service channel connector pin–out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Tab. 47. Alarms Housekeeping connector pin–out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Tab. 48. NMS–V.11 + Audio 1 connector pin–out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Tab. 49. NMS–G.703 + Audio 2 connector pin–out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Tab. 50. ECT connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Tab. 51. OS (or ECT) connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Tab. 52. LEDs for Ethernet user data interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Tab. 53. Upgrade Kits and IDU units compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Tab. 54. Setting of dip–switch–banks on IDU MAIN unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Tab. 55. ODU dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Tab. 56. ODU configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Tab. 57. 7 GHz Transceiver assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Tab. 58. Branching assemblies for 7 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Tab. 59. 8 GHz Transceiver assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Tab. 60. Branching assemblies for 8 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Tab. 61. 11 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Tab. 62. 13 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Tab. 63. 15 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Tab. 64. 18 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Tab. 65. 23 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Tab. 66. 25 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Tab. 67. 28 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Tab. 68. 32 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Tab. 69. 38 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Tab. 70. Pole Mounting versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 10 / 332
332
Tab. 71. Available couplers (11–38 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Tab. 72. Available couplers and related items (7–8 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Tab. 73. Nose adapters for ODU with separated antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Tab. 74. ODU Output flanges with external antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Tab. 75. Part list of available integrated antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Tab. 76. Part list of ODU accessories and installation materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Tab. 77. ODU external interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Tab. 78. RF interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Tab. 79. Special items of the Kit Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Tab. 80. Spare parts for IDU Main and Extension units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Tab. 81. IDU unit replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Tab. 82. Markets, tributaries and modulations forecasted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Tab. 83. Shelves Equipment Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Tab. 84. Allowed board/plug–in types in IDU Main shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Tab. 85. Allowed board/plug–in types in IDU Extension shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Tab. 86. Protections for Tributaries/services in 9400AWY (1+1) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Tab. 87. Characteristics of the protection scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Tab. 88. EPS switch priority table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Tab. 89. RPS–RX – Automatic switch criteria priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Tab. 90. RPS–RX priority table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Tab. 91. 10BASE–T and 100BASE–T main parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Tab. 92. Data/voice mix (ETSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Tab. 93. Channel spacing [MHz] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Tab. 94. Compatibility vs 9400UX at link level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Tab. 95. Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Tab. 96. 9400AWY Rel.2.0 product release handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Tab. 97. 9400AWY Rel. 2.0 Technical Handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Tab. 98. 9400AWY Rel. 2.0 Installation and Line–Up Handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Tab. 99. Operator’s Handbooks related to the specific Software Package SWP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Tab. 101. 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Documentation on CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Tab. 102. Documentation common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . 315
Tab. 103. List of symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Tab. 104. List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 11 / 332
332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
332
3DB 06687 BA AA
12 / 332
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
a) Warranty
Any warranty must be referred exclusively to the terms of the contract of sale of the equipment to
which this handbook refers to.
ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable
for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or
special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
b) Information
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the
part of ALCATEL.
c) Copyright Notification
The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied,
reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
d) Safety recommendations
The safety recommendations here below must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or
damage to the equipment:
1) Service Personnel
Installation and service must be carried out by authorized persons having appropriate technical
training and experience necessary to be aware of hazardous operations during installation and
service, so as to prevent any personal injury or danger to other persons, as well as prevent
damaging the equipment.
2) Access to the Equipment
Access to the Equipment in use must be restricted to Service Personnel only.
3) Safety Rules
Recommended safety rules are indicated in para.B.3 on pages 298.
Local safety regulations must be used if mandatory. Safety instructions in this handbook should
be used in addition to the local safety regulations. In case of conflict between safety instructions
stated in this manual and those indicated in local regulations, mandatory local norms will prevail.
Should not local regulations be mandatory, then safety rules stated in this manual will prevail.
e) Service Personnel skill

Service Personnel must have an adequate technical background on telecommunications and in
particular on the equipment subject of this handbook.
An adequate background is required to properly install, operate and maintain equipment. The fact of
merely reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in para. C.2.1 on page 313 is
considered as not enough.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 13 / 332
332
HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY
Please refer to para.C.1 on page 309.

Tab. 1. Additional feature and SWP–version relationship
This handbook describes 9400AWY Rel.2 equipment from system point of view, taking into account all
system features that are made available by first SWP version V2.0.0, as well as by successive SWP
releases–versions. Following Tab. 1. sums–up the major additional features (mainly related to new HW
items and relevant performance) that are available starting from a certain SWP–version successive to
first SWP version V2.0.0.
Available from
Additional feature
SWP–version
New ETSI IDU Main and Extension units, with different ’3DB xxxxx AB––’ P/N
V2.0.1
(see N.B.a in Tab. 23. on page 86)
7–8 GHz ODUs (new 9470AWY product)
V2.0.2
Frequency shifter management (see para.4–1.2 on page 210)
to be confirmed
Security management (see para.4–4.1.1 on page 268)
ANSI version (DS1/DS3) interfaces and relevant ANSI IDU Main and Extension
units and Plug–Ins V2.0.3
to be confirmed
ANSI version ODUs
Ed.02 of this handbook is validated in conjunction with SWP versions V2.0.0 to V2.0.1
only. Information relevant to SWP versions > V2.0.1 must be considered preliminary,
subject to change and without any obligation on the part of ALCATEL.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 14 / 332
332
HANDBOOK STRUCTURE
This handbook is composed by a ’main handbook’ and ’enclosed documents’.
MAIN HANDBOOK
Information in this handbook is divided into the following parts:
a) FRONT MATTER
• TABLE OF CONTENTS
• LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
• PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
• HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY
• HANDBOOK STRUCTURE
• SAFETY–EMC–EMF–ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING
• QUICK GUIDE
It allows to access immediately the most frequently needed operative pieces of information
contained in this handbook and in other related handbooks.
b) SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS on page 19

This section provides the 1st level description of the equipment and sums–up its technical
characteristics.
c) SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATIONS on page 67

This section contains the whole logical and operative information for the equipment provisioning and
system configuration, including the setting up of logical/physical connections.
d) SECTION 3: MAINTENANCE on page 167

This section contains the whole logical and operative information for the equipment maintenance.
e) SECTION 4: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION on page 207

This section provides the 2nd level description of the equipment.
f) SECTION 5: APPENDICES on page 283

In this section some additional information and instructions are given:
• Appendix A – Introduction to the 9400AWY radio system family
• Appendix B – Safety–EMC–ESD norms and equipment labelling
• Appendix C – Documentation guide
• Appendix D – List of symbols and abbreviations
g) SECTION 6: ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS on page 331

This section lists and contains the documents enclosed to this handbook. Each of them has its own
P/N, different from that of this main handbook and different from one another.
ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 15 / 332
332
SAFETY–EMC–EMF–ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING
a) Please refer to Appendix B on page 297 to obtain details regarding following information:

• Safety rules:

TOPIC WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT
General rules
Dangerous Electrical Voltages
Equipment connection to earth
Risk of explosion
Moving mechanical parts
Heat–radiating mechanical parts
Equipment emitting RF power
• Other labels:
TOPIC WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT
Device sensitive to electrostatic discharges
2002/96/EC WEEE (Waste Electrical and

Electronic Equipment) Logo
• Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)
• Other Labels affixed to the Equipment
b) Identical or similar information on Personal Computer, Work–Station etc., other than ALCATEL’s,
loaded with software applications described in this or other Handbooks, is supplied in the
Constructor’s technical documentation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 16 / 332
332
QUICK GUIDE
9400AWY Rel.2.0 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
Tab. 2. Quick guide

If you need immediate operative information on how to:

GENERAL TOPICS
get information on system

read Appendix C on page 309
documentation
have a short description of the

read para.1–1.1 on pages 21 thru’ 35
system
configure a station, provision

equipment boards and logically read chapter 2–1 on page 69
set–up connections
for:
– IDU, read chapter 2–2 on page 81

get item P/Ns
– ODU and antennas, read chapter 2–6 on page 137
GENERAL TOPICS FOR INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE

get information on safety, EMC,
EMF, ESD norms and equipment read Appendix B on page 297
labelling
acknowledge cautions to avoid
read para.2–4.1 on page 102
equipment damage
for:
– unit read para.2–4.2 on page 103

IDU Main unit:
get operative information regarding
– IDU Extension unit: read para.2–4.3 on page 105
the units in IDU (connectors, leds,
buttons) – Flash Card: read para.2–4.5 on page 124
– Distributor subracks: read chapter 2–5 on page 135
get operative information regarding

read chapter 2–7 on page 159
ODU and Light service kit cable
know the consequences of unit

extraction in IDU/REG shelf
set and use the EOW functions of

the equipment
Tab. 2. continues ..
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 17 / 332
332
.. continues Tab. 2.
If you need immediate operative information on how to:
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING

physically install and cable the get Installation Handbook (Ref.[B] on page 314) and
equipment hardware proceed as specified by it
install or update Craft Terminal’s get CT Operator’s Handbook (Ref.[D] on page 314) and
and/or equipment’s software read its QUICK GUIDE (same topics)
get Line–up Guide (Ref.[C] on page 314) and proceed as

commission equipment
specified by it
SYSTEM UPGRADE
install a tributary plug–in on IDU

Main and/or Extension unit
replace Flash Card to upgrade get CT Operator’s Handbook (Ref.[D] on page 314) and
system functionalities read its QUICK GUIDE (same topics)
MAINTENANCE
provision and manage spare parts read para.3–3.3 on page 177
carry out First Level maintenance

(system state display)
carry out preventive maintenance read para.3–5.3 on page 187
carry out corrective maintenance read para.3–5.5 on page 189
To find any other kind of information not listed in the above table, please refer to the TABLE OF
CONTENTS of this handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 18 / 332
332
SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
This section provides the 1st level description of the equipment and sums–up its technical characteristics.
SECTION CONTENT PAGE
Chapter 1–1 – System description

21
It describes the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 equipment architecture and system configurations.
Chapter 1–2 – Technical specifications

47
It sums–up the technical characteristics of the 9400AWY Rel.2.0.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 19 / 332
332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
332
3DB 06687 BA AA
20 / 332
1–1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This chapter describes the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 equipment architecture and system configurations; it
includes the following main sub–paragraphs:
– para.1–1.1 – Equipment architecture, on page 21
– para.1–1.2 – System configurations, on page 36.
If you need general information on 9400AWY equipment family, please refer to Appendix A –
Introduction to the 9400AWY radio system family on page 285.
Please refer to Tab. 1. on page 14 for system features and SWP–version relationship
1–1.1 Equipment architecture
1–1.1.1 Split–mount architecture
The 9400AWY system has been designed in a split mount architecture. As shown in Fig. 1. on page 22, it
consists of three main parts.
– Indoor Unit (IDU) details in paragraph 1–1.1.2 on page 23
– Outdoor Unit (ODU) details in paragraph 1–1.1.3 on page 35
– IDU–ODU cable(s) details in paragraph 1–1.1.4 on page 32
IDU and ODU are connected with a single standard coaxial cable carrying the main traffic, the remote
power supply voltage for the ODU and auxiliary information.
Rack or wall or desk mounting are available for the IDU.
The ODU can be installed on standard poles, wall or pedestal mount, with an appropriate fastening
system, which guarantees the coarse and fine pointing, even when a faulty ODU has to be replaced.
The ODU (one or two depending on the configuration 1+0 or 1+1) incorporates the complete RF
transceiver and can be associated with an integrated antenna (30 cm or 60 cm diameter) or separate
antenna, if a larger diameter is needed. The ODU is capacity–independent and consists of a single cabinet
(size and weight independent on frequency) with a solar shield.
The cabinet is a very compact and robust weatherproof (IP 67) container, designed to be compatible with
hot and very sunny climatic zones.
The ODU can be rapidly installed on standard poles with an appropriate fastening system. The pole
mounting is the same for 1+0 or 1+1 configurations from 13 to 38 GHz.
The ODU is fixed by means of quick latches. This system allows to change the ODU without altering
antenna pointing
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 21 / 332
332
9400AWY R.2.0 1+0 SPLIT–MOUNT SYSTEM

ODU Ch#1
Antenna
ODU
IDU–ODU cable
NE
ULS
IDU
MAIN SHELF
IDU Ch#1
9400AWY R.2.0 1+1 SPLIT–MOUNT SYSTEM

ODU Ch#0 ODU Ch#1
Antenna Antenna
ODU
IDU–ODU cables
EXTENSION SHELF NE
IDU Ch#0 ULS
IDU
MAIN SHELF
IDU Ch#1
Fig. 1. 9400AWY R.2.0 split–mount system

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 22 / 332
332
1–1.1.2 IDU (Indoor Unit)
The IDU incorporates the base–band processing and offers tributaries interfaces as well as service
channel and supervision.
The IDU is frequency–independent.

As shown in Fig. 1. on page 22, up to 2 sub–racks (each of them being 1U high) are used as basic
elements to build the following configurations:
– 1+0 this configuration includes one main IDU unit (height 1U)
– 1+1 this configuration includes one main IDU unit (height 1U) and one Extension IDU unit (height
1U).
In 1+1 configuration the two sub–racks are inter–connected by means of an auxiliary flat cable (100–wires
SCSI front panel connector)
Both the main and the extension IDU units if not equipped with plugs–in, are able to support 8xE1 or 8xDS1
interfaces.
It is possible to accommodate three different plugs–in alternatives among them, exploiting the same
mechanical space on the front panel:
– 9–16xE1 or 9–16xDS1 plug–in allowing to support the extension to 16xE1 or 16xDS1 interfaces
– E3 or DS3 plug–in
– DATA plug–in implementing Ethernet functionalities. This plug–in is plugged onto the Main IDU unit
only.
[1] Main IDU unit
It includes the Mux/Demux and the cable interface functions for the main channel. This is a common
item for 1+0 and 1+1 systems.
Onto the main unit is plugged the microprocessor unit implementing EC and RC functionalities.
A Software Key (FLASH CARD) is also plugged onto the Main board allowing flexibility in choosing
user interfaces as in the following Tab. 3. (6 possible types of Flash card):
Tab. 3. Available Flash cards for 9400AWY R.2.0

NAME
4E1DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD
4E1DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD
8E1/DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD
8E1/DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD
4 QAM FLASH CARD
FULL FLEXIBLE FLASH CARD
Detailed information on flash cards is given in point [5] on page 26.
[2] Extension IDU unit
It includes the Mux/Demux and the cable interface functions for the spare channel. This is an item
specific for 1+1 systems.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The Hitless Switch functionality (RPS RX) is embedded.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 23 / 332
332
[3] Power supply
One PSU is integrated in each of the Main and Extension units and can be of three types:

• Floating (48–60) VDC nom. ± 20%

• Floating 24 VDC nom. ± 20%
• Floating full range (24–60) VDC nom. ± 20% (NOT AVAILABLE IN CURRENT RELEASE)
N.B. No Fans Unit are foreseen inside the 9400AWY R.2.0 IDU units.
[4] IDU External interfaces
IDU Main and Extension sub–rack external interfaces are shown and listed in following Fig. 2. ,
Fig. 3. , Tab. 4. and Tab. 5. respectively.
(1+1)
interconnection Alarms Housekeeping
Battery ON/OFF Connector NMS_V11 – AUDIO 1
input switch of optional plug–in
Pushbuttons OS User service

ECT LEDS
channel
Telephone Debug
8 E1/DS1 NMS_G703 – IDU–ODU
AUDIO 2 interconnection
Fig. 2. IDU Main Unit: external interfaces
Battery ON/OFF Connector IDU–ODU

input switch of optional plug–in interconnection
Pushbutton (1+1) 8 E1/DS1 User service LEDS

interconnection channel
Fig. 3. IDU Extension Unit: external interfaces

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 24 / 332
332
Tab. 4. IDU Main Unit: external interfaces list
Interface Connector Notes

(1+1) inter–connection SCSI 100 pin Female

8E1 / DS1 – 32 wires SubD 37 Female
(NMS_V11 + Audio1) SubD 15 Female
(NMS_G703 + Audio2) SubD 15 Female
User Service Channel SubD 15 Female

in)
ugs–in)
Alarms – Housekeeping SubD 15 Female

plugs
Debug RJ45
tri utariess p
OS (or ECT) 10/100BaseT RJ45

tionall tributar
asicc
ECT – RS232 SubD 9

Bas
Telephone RJ11
option
Reset Push–button
( ithoutt o
Test lamp Push–button

(witho
Acknowledgement Push–button
Battery input SubD 3 Male on PSU board
Two position
ON–OFF switch on PSU board
switch
IDU–ODU cable N
LEDs 8
on Eth Data plug–in;

s plugs–in)
alternative to:
Ethernet user data 2 x RJ45
9–16 E1 / DS1 plug–in
aces
or E3 / DS3 plug–in
ptional Interface
onal tributaries p
on E3 / DS3 plug–in;
alternative to:
E3 / DS3 2 x (1.0/2.3)
or Eth Data plug–in
Optio
(on optiona
9–16 E1 / DS1 plug–in;

9–16 E1 / DS1 alternative to:
SubD 37 Female
32 wires E3 / DS3 plug–in
or Eth DATA plug–in
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 25 / 332
332
Tab. 5. IDU Extension Unit: external interfaces list
Interface Connector Notes

(1+1) inter–connection SCSI 100 pin Female

–in)
lugs–in
8E1 / DS1 – 32 wires SubD 37 Female

ries plug
User Service Channel SubD 15 Female

butaries
Battery input SubD 3 Male on PSU board

op ional tributa
Basic ic
Two position
ON–OFF switch on PSU board
switch
ithoutt optiona
IDU–ODU cable N
test lamp Push–button

(witho
2
LEDs
(ON, ODUW)
ibutaries plugs–in)
on E3 / DS3 plug–in;
E3 / DS3 2 x (1.0/2.3) alternative to
Optionall Interfaces

(on optional tribut
In
on 9–16 E1 / DS1
9–16 E1 / DS1
SubD 37 Female plug–in; alternative to
32 wires
E3 / DS3 plug–in
[5] Software Keys (FLASH CARDS)
The following tables show the possible combinations of interface types and numbers that can be
supported by each of the six types of flash cards defined in previous Tab. 3. on page 23:
• Tab. 6. on page 27, to be used when no tributary plug–in is equipped
• Tab. 7. on page 28, to be used when tributary 9–16 E1 / DS1 plug–in is equipped
• Tab. 8. on page 29, to be used when tributary E3 / DS3 plug–in is equipped
• Tab. 9. on page 30, to be used when Ethernet plug–in is equipped

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 26 / 332
332
Tab. 6. Capacity and modulation for 9400AWY R.2.0 flash cards (IDU basic)
Int.N# without plug–in (IDU basic)

Flash Card Name
& type Supported configuration Supported modulation

2E1 1E1…2E1 4 QAM

4E1DS1 4QAM 4E1 1E1…4E1 4 QAM
4DS1 1DS1…4DS1 4 QAM
2E1 1E1…2E1 4 QAM
4E1DS1 4/16QAM 4E1 1E1…4E1 4 and 16 QAM
2E1 1E1…2E1 4 QAM
4E1 1E1…4E1 4 QAM
2E1 1E1…2E1 4 QAM
4E1 1E1…4E1 4 and 16 QAM
8DS1 1DS1…8DS1 4 and 16 QAM
2E1 1E1…2E1 4 QAM
4E1 1E1…4E1 4 QAM
8E1 1E1…8E1 4 QAM
4QAM
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
8DS1
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
1DS1…8DS1
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
4 QAM
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
16E1 na na
16DS1 na na
E3 na na
DS3
2E1
na
1E1…2E1
na
4 QAM
4E1 1E1…4E1 4 and 16 QAM
8E1 1E1…8E1 4 and 16 QAM
FULL FLEXIBLE 8DS1 1DS1…8DS1 4 and 16 QAM
16E1 na na
16DS1 na na
E3 na na
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
DS3 na na
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 27 / 332
332
Tab. 7. Capacity and modulation for 9400AWY R.2.0 flash cards (with 9–16 E1/DS1 plug–in)
Int.N# with 9–16 E1/DS1 plug–in

Flash Card Name
& type Supported configuration Supported Modulation

2E1 1E1…2E1 4 QAM
2E1 1E1…2E1 4 QAM
2E1 1E1…2E1 4 QAM
4E1 1E1…4E1 4 QAM
2E1 1E1…2E1 4 QAM
4E1 1E1…4E1 4 and 16 QAM
2E1 1E1…2E1 4 QAM
4E1 1E1…4E1 4 QAM
8E1 1E1…8E1 4 QAM
4QAM 8DS1 1DS1…8DS1 4 QAM
16E1 1E1…16E1 4 QAM
E3 na na
DS3 na na
2E1 1E1…2E1 4 QAM
4E1 1E1…4E1 4 and 16 QAM
8E1 1E1…8E1 4 and 16 QAM
FULL FLEXIBLE 8DS1 1DS1…8DS1 4 and 16 QAM
16E1 1E1…16E1 4 and 16 QAM
E3 na na
DS3 na na
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 28 / 332
332
Tab. 8. Capacity and modulation for 9400AWY R.2.0 flash cards (with E3/DS3 plug–in)
Int.N# with E3/DS3 plug–in

Flash Card Name
& type Supported configuration Supported Modulation
2E1 1E1…2E1 4 QAM

2E1 1E1…2E1 4 QAM
2E1 1E1…2E1 4 QAM
4E1 1E1…4E1 4 QAM
2E1 1E1…2E1 4 QAM
4E1 1E1…4E1 4 and 16 QAM
2E1 1E1…2E1 4 QAM
4E1 1E1…4E1 4 QAM
8E1 1E1…8E1 4 QAM
4QAM
ÉÉÉÉ
16E1
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
na na
ÉÉÉÉ
E3
16DS1 na
E3
na
4 QAM
DS3 DS3 4 QAM
2E1 1E1…2E1 4 QAM
4E1 1E1…4E1 4 and 16 QAM
8E1 1E1…8E1 4 and 16 QAM
FULL FLEXIBLE
16E1 na na
16DS1
E3
na
E3
na
4 and 16 QAM
DS3 DS3 4 and 16 QAM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 29 / 332
332
Tab. 9. Capacity and modulation for 9400AWY R.2.0 flash cards (with Ethernet plug–in)
with Ethernet plug–in

Int.N#

Flash Card Name

ETHERNET Supported

& type TDM BW (a) (a)+ (b)
BW (b) Modulation
2E1 0E1…2E1 2E1…0E1 2E1 4 QAM
4E1DS1 4QAM 4E1 0E1…4E1 4E1…0E1 4E1 4 QAM
4DS1 0DS1…4DS1 4DS1…0DS1 4DS1 4 QAM
2E1 0E1…2E1 2E1…0E1 2E1 4 QAM
4E1DS1 4/16QAM 4E1 0E1…4E1 4E1…0E1 4E1 4 and 16 QAM
2E1 0E1…2E1 2E1…0E1 2E1 4 QAM
4E1 0E1…4E1 4E1…0E1 4E1 4 QAM
8E1DS1 4QAM 8E1 0E1…8E1 8E1…0E1 8E1 4 QAM
2E1 0E1…2E1 2E1…0E1 2E1 4 QAM
4E1 0E1…4E1 4E1…0E1 4E1 4 and 16 QAM
8E1DS1 4/16QAM 8E1 0E1…8E1 8E1…0E1 8E1 4 and 16 QAM
8DS1 0DS1…8DS1 8DS1…0DS1 8DS1 4 and 16 QAM
2E1 0E1…2E1 2E1…0E1 2E1 4 QAM
4E1 0E1…4E1 4E1…0E1 4E1 4 QAM
8E1 0E1…8E1 8E1…0E1 8E1 4 QAM
4QAM 8DS1 0DS1…8DS1 8DS1…0DS1 8DS1 4 QAM
16E1 0E1…8E1 16E1…0E1 16E1 4 QAM
16DS1
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
0DS1…8DS1 16DS1…0DS1 16DS1 4 QAM
E3
ÉÉÉÉÉÉna E3 E3 4 QAM
DS3
2E1
ÉÉÉÉÉÉna
0E1…2E1
DS3
2E1…0E1
DS3
2E1
4 QAM
4 QAM
4E1 0E1…4E1 4E1…0E1 4E1 4 and 16 QAM
8E1 0E1…8E1 8E1…0E1 8E1 4 and 16 QAM
FULL FLEXIBLE 8DS1 0DS1…8DS1 8DS1…0DS1 8DS1 4 and 16 QAM
16E1 0E1…8E1 16E1…0E1 16E1 4 and 16 QAM
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
16DS1 0DS1…8DS1 16DS1…0DS1 16DS1 4 and 16 QAM
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
E3 na E3 E3 4 and 16 QAM
DS3
ÉÉÉÉÉÉna 51,184Mbps 51,184Mbps 4 and 16 QAM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 30 / 332
332
[6] IDU configurations from factory
Different IDU configurations are available from factory:

• an 8 E1 / DS1 hardware maximum configuration which could be upgraded later by the means
of the dedicated board to 16 E1 / DS1 or E3 / DS3 Or Ethernet 2x 10/100 BaseT configuration

(with also the appropriate software key).
• an 16 E1 / DS1 hardware configuration
• an E3 / DS3 hardware configuration
• an Ethernet 2x10/100 BaseT allowing to mix with up to 8 E1 / DS1 physical input.
N.B. ANSI version (DS1 and E3 interfaces) not supported by SWP version V2.0.0
Refer to para.1–1.2 on page 36 for details.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 31 / 332
332
1–1.1.3 ODU (Outdoor Unit)
a) ODU unit

The ODU consists of a cabinet including the modem + transceiver of a channel. The mechanical

structure utilizes an outdoor IP67 cabinet.
Two mechanical solutions are adopted:
• one for all frequency bands from 11 to 38 GHz, where the branching (diplexer) is internal to the
ODU cabinet; the only differences among the frequency bands are related to the diplexer and
the RF section;
• another for all frequency bands from 7 to 8 GHz, where ODU is composed by two independent
units: the branching (diplexer) and the RF section (transceiver).
See chapter 2–6 on page 137 for drawings.
All configurations are available for each frequency band.
The ODU presents one output port at which a single polarization integrated antenna (30 cm or 60
cm diameter) or a waveguide for not integrated antenna connection can be connected.
The ODU is capacity–independent.
The ODU consists of subunits which carry out the following main functions (see Fig. 4. on page 33):
[1] Modem: It consists of a base–band part and an IF part. The main functions are:
– Cable interface: DC splitting, echo cancellation, clock recovery

– HDB3 coding/decoding
– Modulation and demodulation
– Digital to analog conversion
– Analogue filtering
– Up–conversion in Tx side in the frequency range of 1 GHz to 2.1 GHz
– Down–conversion in Rx side from 675 MHz to base band
– Control function for hardware configuration and dialog with the IDU.
[2] Front–End. The main functions are:
– AGC IF amplification
– Up–conversion to the RF Tx channel frequency
– Transmit power control range of 30 dB
– RF loop–back
– Double mixers at Rx side (the frequency of the signal sent to the modem board is 675 MHz
whatever the frequency band and shifter).
[3] Synthesizer unit
– The RF LO in the overall frequency range of 3.8 GHz to 5.7 GHz

– The IF LO in the frequency range of 1.0 GHz to 2.1 GHz
[4] Power Supply Unit: it is screwed on the Front End box
[5] Microwave Diplexer: it is inserted between the front end and the antenna. Its scope is to filter
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
all interfering signals and harmonics. It consists of two band–pass filters: one for the Rx and one
for the Tx. The rejection between these two parts is more than 70 dB. The insertion losses are
less than 2 dB.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 32 / 332
332
Fig. 4. ODU block diagram
b) Solar shield
Even if the ODU has been designed to work without solar shield, this one is always delivered with
each ODU.
N.B. Note : the ODU is qualified for a room temperature of +55 0C maximum. In case of solar
radiation (1120 W/m2), the maximum room temperature is reduced to +40 0C (ETS 300
019–2–4.1). It assumes that the protection of the solar shield is 15 0C.
c) ODU configurations
The ODU configurations available are:
• for the employment in 1+0 unprotected systems:

– 1+0
• for the employment in 1+1 protected systems:

– 1+1 HSB
– 1+1 HSB SD
– 1+1 FD CP
– 1+1 FD AP
– 1+1 FD DA
Tab. 10. on page 34 depicts the corresponding radio configurations.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 33 / 332
332
Tab. 10. 11 to 38 GHz 4/16 QAM configurations
Configuration ODU cabinet RF channeling Coupler Antenna

1+0 1 NO 1
3 dB Symmetric or
1+1 HSB 2 1
1/10 dB asymmetric
1+1 HSB SD 2 NO 2
1+1 FD CP 2 3 dB Symmetric 1
1
1+1 FD AP 2 NO (non–integrated
only
1+1 FD DA 2 OR NO 2
Legend:
CP = Co–polar
AP = Alternate polar
DA = Dual antenna
d) ODU Coupler
The ODU coupler [shown in Fig. 69. on page 151 (11–38 GHz) and in Fig. 70. on page 152 (7–8
GHz)] is used in the following equipment configuration:
• 1+1 HSB
• 1+1 FD CP
The 1+0 configuration is comprised of a simple diplexer inside the cabinet while the protected
configurations (1+1) are always comprised of two cabinets and:
• one 3 dB symmetric or 1/10 dB asymmetric coupler for HSB configuration

• one 3 dB symmetric coupler for FD with single polar antenna
The couplers are connected between the cabinets and the antenna.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 34 / 332
332
1–1.1.4 IDU–ODU cable
The connection between the IDU and the ODU is realized with a single coaxial cable and N–50 ohm
connectors (2 cables in 1+1 configurations).
On this cable the following signals are present:

– DC voltage to the remote power supply of the ODU;

– HDB3 Tx signal;
– HDB3 Rx signal.
The HDB3 signal is an aggregate signal including the main signal, auxiliary signal and the IDU–ODU
service channels.
The bit rate of the aggregate signal is listed in the following table.
Tab. 11. Bit rate of the IDU–ODU signal on the cable
ETSI (2 to 16xE1, E3) AWY configuration 39.168 Mbit/s
ETSI (2 to 16xE1, E3) UX configuration 39.437 Mbit/s
ANSI (4 to 16xDS1, DS3) 57.120 Mbit/s
The IDU–ODU cable is a standard coaxial cable (Filotex 390998) and allows a guaranteed maximum
distance between IDU and ODU of 300 m (985 feet).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 35 / 332
332
1–1.2 System configurations
The configurations available are:

– Unprotected configurations (1+0)

described in para.1–1.2.1 herebelow
– Protected configurations (1+1)

described in para.1–1.2.2 on page 38.
1–1.2.1 1+0 Unprotected configurations
The 1+0 unprotected terminal is made up of the following elements:
– One Outdoor Unit (ODU) incorporating the complete RF transceiver (modem, RF units, branching
filter) and an integrated or separated antenna.
The ODU is capacity–independent.
– One Indoor Unit (MAIN IDU unit) incorporating the base–band processing and offering tributaries
interfacing as well as service channel and supervision.
The IDU is frequency–independent.
– A max 300 m long single coaxial cable.
Fig. 5. on page 37 shows the IDU+ODU block diagram.
Fig. 6. on page 37 shows the IDU block diagram, when no tributary plug–in is equipped.
In this case the possible capacities and modulations are depicted in Tab. 6. on page 27, according to the
equipped flash card.
Fig. 7. on page 37 shows the IDU block diagram, when a tributary plug–in is equipped.
In this case the possible capacities and modulations are depicted, according to the equipped flash card,
in:
• Tab. 7. on page 28, to be used when tributary 9–16 E1 / DS1 plug–in is equipped
• Tab. 8. on page 29, to be used when tributary E3 / DS3 plug–in is equipped
• Tab. 9. on page 30, to be used when Ethernet plug–in is equipped

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 36 / 332
332
1 x ODU
IDU 1+0
RT
IDU MAIN UNIT
Fig. 5. 9400AWY (1+0) IDU + ODU block diagram
NMS V11
NMS G.703
10/100 BaseT (OS or ECT) EC / RC
RS232 (ECT)
64Kb/s TMN
MAIN 8 x E1/DS1
TRIBUT
64 Kb/s MUX
Service channel HDB3
DEMUX ODU CH#1
EOW
IDU MAIN UNIT
Fig. 6. 9400AWY (1+0) IDU block diagram (with no tributary plug–in)
NMS V11
NMS G.703
10/100 BaseT (OS or ECT) EC / RC
RS232 (ECT)
64Kb/s TMN
8 x E1/DS1
MAIN
TRIBUT additional
64 Kb/s plug–in
MUX HDB3
Service channel DEMUX ODU CH#1
EOW
IDU MAIN UNIT
Fig. 7. 9400AWY (1+0) IDU block diagram (with additional tributary plug–in)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 37 / 332
332
1–1.2.2 1+1 Protected configurations
The protected configurations allow to protect the most critical transmission paths.
The 1+1 configurations include an EPS protection (in Tx and Rx side) and an Hitless Switch (at Rx side)

as standard features.

In the protected configuration the main traffic and service channels are automatically protected.
In the following, IDU and ODU protected configurations are described in:
– para.1–1.2.2.1 below: IDU (1+1) configurations
– para.1–1.2.2.2 on page 44 : ODU (1+1) configurations
1–1.2.2.1 IDU (1+1) configurations
[1] IDU (1+1) base system and IDU (1+1) system with Ethernet plug–in
The IDU (1+1) base system (without any tributary plug–in) and the IDU (1+1) system with Ethernet
plug–in is implemented with (see Fig. 8. below):
a) one MAIN IDU unit ;
b) one EXTENSION IDU unit ;
c) one auxiliary front panel flat cable (100 wires connecting SCSI front panel connectors)
inter–connecting the Main and Extension units
d) one front panel 37–wires–split–cable for 1–8 E1 / DS1 line connection;
e) one front panel 15–wires–split–cable for User Service Channels line connection;
f) optionally, one Ethernet plug–in equipped on the MAIN IDU unit only.
b)
ËËËË
c) ËËËË
ËËËË f) e)
a) ËËËË
d)
Fig. 8. IDU (1+1) system (base or with Ethernet plug–in) composition and inter–shelf cabling
Fig. 9. on page 39 shows the structure of the split cables d ) and e ) cited above.
Fig. 10. on page 39 shows the IDU block diagram.
The possible capacities and modulations are depicted:
• if the Ethernet plug–in is not equipped , in Tab. 6. on page 27, according to the employed flash
card;
• if the Ethernet plug–in is equipped , inTab. 9. on page 30, according to the employed flash
card.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 38 / 332
332
Main Unit Extension Unit
SUB D 37 / 15 male
SUB D 37 / 15 male
SUB D 37 / 15 female
Special Split Cable

for E1/DS1 Tributaries (37 pins) and
for User Service Channels (15 pins)
User
Fig. 9. E1 / DS1 and User Service Channel split–cable structure
IDU EXTENSION UNIT

37–pin split cable 8 x E1/DS1
MUX HDB3
ODU CH#0
DEMUX
EPS Hitless
User Service Switch
Channel
15–pin split cable flat cable
NMS V11
NMS G.703
EC / RC 10/100 BaseT (OS or ECT)
RS232 (ECT)
64Kb/s TMN
EOW
8 x E1/DS1
Tributaries Eth.plug–in MUX

DEMUX
HDB3
User Service EPS ODU CH#1
Channel
IDU MAIN UNIT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 10. 9400AWY (1+1) IDU block diagram (with no tributary plug–in and with Ethernet plug–in)
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 39 / 332
332
[2] IDU (1+1) system with 9–16 E1 / DS1 plug–in
The IDU (1+1) system with 9–16 E1 / DS1 plug–in is implemented starting from the base
configuration already described in point [1] on page 38, composed by:

adding the following items, depicted in Fig. 11. below:
f) one 9–16 E1 / DS1 plug–in equipped inside the MAIN IDU unit;
g) another 9–16 E1 / DS1 plug–in equipped inside the EXTENSION IDU unit;
h) one front panel 37–wires–split–cable for 9–16 E1 / DS1 line connection, equal to that used for
1–8 E1 / DS1 line connection.
g)
EXTENSION
f) h)
MAIN
Fig. 11. Additional items and inter–shelf cabling of IDU (1+1) system with 9–16 E1 / DS1 plug–in
The possible capacities and modulations are depicted in Tab. 7. on page 28, according to the
employed flash card.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 40 / 332
332
IDU EXTENSION UNIT

2 x 37–pin split cables

8 x E1/DS1
HDB3
9–16 E1/DS1 plug–in ODU CH#0
MUX Hitless
DEMUX Switch
User Service EPS
Channel
15–pin split cable
flat cable
NMS V11
NMS G.703
RS232 (ECT)
64Kb/s TMN
EOW
8 x E1/DS1
Tributaries 9–16 E1/DS1 plug–in

MUX HDB3
User Service ODU CH#1
DEMUX
Channel EPS
IDU MAIN UNIT
Fig. 12. 9400AWY (1+1) IDU block diagram (with 9–16 E1 / DS1 plug–in)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 41 / 332
332
[3] IDU (1+1) system with E3 / DS3 plug–in
The IDU (1+1) system with E3 / DS3 plug–in is implemented starting from the base configuration
already described in point [1] on page 38, composed by:


if E3 / DS3 transmission is used, this cable has no use, so that it could not be
equipped.
adding the following items, depicted in Fig. 11. below:
f) one E3 / DS3 plug–in equipped inside the MAIN IDU unit;
g) another E3 / DS3 plug–in equipped inside the EXTENSION IDU unit;
h) one pair of front panel coaxial–split–cable for E3 / DS3 line connection, one for line input, the
other for line output.
g)
EXTENSION
f) h)
MAIN
Fig. 13. Additional items and inter–shelf cabling of IDU (1+1) system with E3 / DS3 plug–in
Fig. 14. on page 43 shows the structure of one of the coaxial split cables h ) cited above.
The possible capacities and modulations are depicted in Tab. 8. on page 29, according to the
employed flash card.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 42 / 332
332
Extension Unit
Main Unit
User
Fig. 14. E3 / DS3 coaxial–split–cable structure
37–pin split cable IDU EXTENSION UNIT

(if necessary, see text)
8 x E1/DS1
HDB3
E3/DS3 plug–in ODU CH#0
2 x coaxial MUX Hitless

split cable DEMUX Switch
User Service EPS
Channel
15–pin split cable
flat cable
NMS V11
NMS G.703
RS232 (ECT)
64Kb/s TMN
EOW
8 x E1/DS1
Tributaries E3/DS3 plug–in

MUX
HDB3
User Service DEMUX ODU CH#1
Channel EPS
IDU MAIN UNIT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 15. 9400AWY (1+1) IDU block diagram (with E3 / DS3 plug–in)
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 43 / 332
332
1–1.2.2.2 ODU (1+1) configurations
According to the ODU configurations introduced in Tab. 10. on page 34, at radio level the following system
implementations are available:

– 1+1 Hot Stand By (HSB):
• with Space Diversity (SD) see Fig. 16. herebelow
• or without space diversity see Fig. 17. herebelow
– 1+1 with Frequency Diversity (FD):

• FD double antenna CP or AP see Fig. 18. on page 45
• FD one antenna CP see Fig. 19. on page 45
• FD one antenna AP see Fig. 20. on page 45
N.B. The radio configurations are independent from the IDU (1+1) configurations described in
previous para.1–1.2.2.1 on page 38.
ODU CH 0
HDB3
MODEM IF RF
IDU 1+1
IDU EXTENSION UNIT only one RT

front interconnections transmits
IDU MAIN UNIT ODU CH 1
HDB3
MODEM IF RF
N.B. the detailed station layout of this configuration is given in para.2–1.5.3.1 on page 77
Fig. 16. 9400AWY (1+1 HSB SD) IDU + ODU block diagram
ODU CH 0 Coupler
HDB3
MODEM IF RF
IDU 1+1
IDU EXTENSION UNIT 3dB

only one RT or
front interconnections transmits 1:10

HDB3
MODEM IF RF
N.B. the detailed station layout of this configuration is given in:

– para.2–1.5.3.2 on page 78 (11–38 GHz)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– para.2–1.5.3.3 on page 79 (7–8 GHz)
Fig. 17. 9400AWY (1+1 HSB one antenna) IDU + ODU block diagram
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 44 / 332
332
ODU CH 0
HDB3
MODEM IF RF
IDU 1+1
CP
IDU EXTENSION UNIT both RTs or

front interconnections transmit AP
HDB3
MODEM IF RF
Fig. 18. 9400AWY (1+1 FD Double Antenna CP or AP) IDU + ODU block diagram
ODU CH 0 Coupler
HDB3
MODEM IF RF
IDU 1+1
IDU EXTENSION UNIT both RTs 3dB

front interconnections transmit
HDB3
MODEM IF RF
N.B. the detailed station layout of this configuration is given in:

– para.2–1.5.3.2 on page 78 (11–38 GHz)
– para.2–1.5.3.3 on page 79 (7–8 GHz)
Fig. 19. 9400AWY (1+1 FD one antenna CP) IDU + ODU block diagram
ODU CH 0
HDB3
MODEM IF RF
IDU 1+1
IDU EXTENSION UNIT both RTs

front interconnections transmit
HDB3
MODEM IF RF
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 20. 9400AWY (1+1 FD one antenna AP) IDU + ODU block diagram
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 45 / 332
332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
332
3DB 06687 BA AA
46 / 332
1–2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Data indicated in the handbook must be considered as typical values

Data indicated in the contract must be considered as guaranteed values
This chapter describes the technical characteristics of the 9400AWY Rel.2 in the following RF band
configurations:
Tab. 12. 9400 AWY family

SYSTEM BAND (GHz)
9470AWY 7–8
9411AWY 11
9413AWY 13
9415AWY 15
9418AWY 18
9423AWY 23
9425AWY 25
9428AWY 28
9432AWY 32
9438AWY 38
This chapter is organized as follows:

– General Characteristics on page 48, including:
• Reference system standards on page 49
• RF channeling on page 50
• Transmitted Power at antenna port (ETSI & ANSI) on page 51
• 99% power channel bandwidth and Emission Designator on page 53
• ETSI System Characteristics on page 54
• ANSI System Characteristics on page 58
• Switching system on page 62

– Tributary interfaces on page 63
– Modem on page 63
– Maximum capacity and Modulation type on page 63
– IDU–ODU cable on page 63
– Man–machine interface on page 64
– Alarms on page 64
– Power supply on page 64
– Mechanical characteristics on page 64
– Environmental conditions on page 65
– Electro–magnetic compatibility / safety on page 65
– Dismantling & Recycling on page 66
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 47 / 332
332
1–2.1 General Characteristics
Version SPLIT MOUNT (IDU+ODU)
Station type Terminal

Configuration 1+0 / 1+1 HSB / 1+1 FD

Reference
Refer to para. 1–2.1.1 page 49
standard (system)
Transmission ETSI: 2xE1, 4xE1, 8xE1, 16xE1, E3
capacity ANSI: 4xDS1, 8xDS1, 16xDS1, DS3
RF channel
spacing
Tunability Refer to para. 1–2.1.3 page 51
Transmitted power Refer to para. 1–2.1.3 page 51
99% power
channel bandwidth
and Emission
Designator
ATPC range 20 dB (Pmax / Pmax–20 dB)
RTPC range 30 dB (Pmax / Pmax–30 dB) (ETSI mask compliance till Pmax–20 dB)
Tx level with Tx
< –30 dBm
mute ON
RF frequency
10 ppm
stability
Synthesizer step 250 kHz
RF spectrum
Compliant with the relevant ETSI / ANSI standards
masks
Spurious Compliant with the relevant ETSI / ANSI standards
emissions Compliant with ERC Rec. 74–01
BER receiver
threshold Refer to para. 1–2.1.5 page 54 (ETSI) or 1–2.1.6 page 58 (ANSI)
System gain
Rx max input level –20 dBm (for a BER of 10–3)

Switching system Refer to para. 1–2.1.7 page 62
SC #1 – DATA CHANNEL
– 1x64 Kb/s data channel configurable alternatively as one of the following modes:
• G.703 asynchronous co–directional
• V11 co–directional
User service
• V11 contra–directional
channels
• 4.8/9.6 Kbps V11
• 4.8/9.6 Kbps V24/V28 asynchronous
– 1x64 Kbps V11 co–directional or G703 (DTE or codirectional)
[also embedded in E1/DS1 slot for TMN ( first tributary, first slot) ]
SC #2 – EOW
Omnibus voice channel 64 kbit/s DTMF (Q.23) + 4–wire party line (2 ways)
– NMS–V.11: 1x64 kbit/s V.11 co–directional for TMN (port 1)
NMS channels – NMS–G.703: 1x64 kbit/s G.703 co–directional for TMN (port 2)
– NMS–RF: 1x64 kbit/s radio channel for TMN (internal to the radio frame)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 48 / 332
332
1–2.1.1 Reference system standards
ETSI standard
Standard
Frequency Frequency
ETSI reference Tx/Rx

Equipment band range Channeling
standard separation
(GHz) (GHz)
(MHz)
150,154,160,
7 7.11–7.9 161,168,182,
196,245
9470 AWY ITU–R F.385 119, 126,
EN 301 216
4&16 QAM ITU–R F.386 151.614, 266,
8 7.725–9.5 294.44,
305.56,
311.32
9411 AWY 4QAM ITU–R Rec F 387
EN 301 216 11 GHz 10.7–11.7 530
9411 AWY16QAM (Thailand)
EN 301 128
9413 AWY 4QAM
Class 1 ERC 12–02
13 GHz 12.75–13.25 266
9413 AWY16QAM EN 301 128 ITU–R Rec 497
Class 2
MEXICO 315
EN 301 128
9415 AWY 4QAM 14.4–15.35 ERC 12–07 728
Class 1
ITU–R Rec 636 420,490,644
15 GHz
EN 301 128
9415 AWY 16QAM 14.5–15.35 SRSP 314.5 475
Class 2
CANADA
9418 AWY 4QAM ERC 12–03 1008,1010
EN 301 128
18 GHz 17.7–19.7 ITU–R Rec 595 340,1560
9418 AWY 16QAM Class 1
CHINA 1092.5
EN 300 198
9423 AWY 4QAM ERC 13–02 annex A 1008, 1050,
Class 2
23 GHz 21.2–23.6 ITU–R Rec 637 1200,1232
EN 300 198
9423 AWY 16QAM SRSP 321.8 1200
Class 4
EN 300 431
9425 AWY 4QAM
Class 2 24.5–26.5 ERC 13–02
25 GHz 1008
EN 300 431 ITU–R Rec. 748
9425 AWY 16QAM
Class 4
EN 300 431
9428 AWY 4QAM
Class 2 ERC 13–02
28 GHz 27.5–29.5 1008
EN 300 431 ITU–R Rec. 748
9428 AWY 16QAM
Class 4
EN 300 431
9432 AWY 4QAM
Class 2 ERC 13–02
32 GHz 31.8–33.4 812
EN 300 431 ITU–R Rec. 748
9432 AWY 16QAM
Class 4
EN 300 197
9438 AWY 4QAM 37–39.5 ERC 12–01 1260
Class 2
38 GHz ITU–R Rec 749
EN 300 197
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
9438 AWY16QAM 38.6–40.0 SRSP 338.6 700

Class 4
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 49 / 332
332
ANSI standards
Band Frequency Standard (N.B.)

Designation Frequency plans
(GHz) (GHz) Tx/Rx separation (MHz)

9470 AWY 7–8
9411 AWY 11 NOT SUPPORTED
9413 AWY 13
NTIA–US 640
9415 AWY 15 14.4–15.35
SRSP–314.5–CDN 475
9418 AWY 18 17.7–19.7 FCC 101/SRSP317.7 1560
9423 AWY 23 21.2–23.6 FCC 101 1560
9425 AWY 25
9428 AWY 28 NOT SUPPORTED
9432 AWY 32
9438 AWY 38 38.6–40.0 FCC 101/SRSP317.7 700
N.B. Other separations are available on request.
1–2.1.2 RF channelling
ETSI RF CHANNELING
Capacity (Mbit/s) 2x2 4x2 8x2 16x2 /34
RF Channeling with 4 QAM (MHz) 3.5 7 14 28
RF Channeling with 16 QAM (MHz) 3.5 7 14
ANSI RF CHANNELING
Capacity (Mbit/s) 4x1.5 8x1.5 16x1.5 45
RF Channeling with 4 QAM (MHz) 5 10 20 40
RF Channeling with 16 QAM (MHz) 5 10 20

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 50 / 332
332
1–2.1.3 Transmitted power at antenna port (ETSI and ANSI)
Tolerance:
– ±0.5 dB at ambient temperature
– ±1.5 dB in temperature range –33°C to +55°C

IN–FIELD TUNABILITY RANGE
Output Output power setting (dBm)

Tx/Rx
Tunability power
Equipment separation
(MHz) (dBm) N.B. ATPC range = 20 dBm
(MHz) RTPC range = 30 dBm
(Note 1)
7GHz:
54–112
7GHz: 150, 154, (see ATPC : +25 to +5 dBm
9470 AWY 4QAM 25
160, 161, 168, Tab. 58. RTPC : +25 to –5 dBm with 1 dB step
182, 196, 245 page 141)
8GHz: 119, 126, 8GHz:

151.614, 266, 45–119
294.44, 305.56, (see ATPC : +21 to +1 dBm
9470 AWY 16QAM 311.32 Tab. 60. 21
RTPC : +21 to –9 dBm with 1 dB step
page 142)
ATPC : +23 to +3 dBm

9411 AWY 4QAM 23
530 t.b.d.
9411 AWY 16QAM 20
9413 AWY 4QAM 24
266 116
9413 AWY 16QAM 20
728, 315, 420, ATPC : +24 to +4 dBm

24
490, 475 (*) , RTPC : +24 to –6 dBm with 1 dB step
9415 AWY 4QAM
644 ATPC : +21 to +1 dBm
21
(*) values for 475 220
referred to the ATPC : +21 to +1 dBm
21
standard version RTPC : +21 to –9 dBm with 1 dB step
9415 AWY16QAM
(see Tab. 63. on ATPC : +20 to +0 dBm
20
page 144) RTPC : +20 to –10 dBm with 1 dB step
9418 AWY 4QAM 22
1008,1010,340, RTPC : +22 to –8 dBm with 1 dB step
480
1560, 1092.5 ATPC : +19 to –1 dBm
9418 AWY 16 QAM 19
ATPC : +19 to –1 dBm
9423 AWY 4QAM 19
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1008,1200, RTPC : +19 to –11 dBm with 1 dB step

500
1232 ATPC : +16 to –4 dBm
9423 AWY 16QAM 16
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 51 / 332
332
Output Output power setting (dBm)
Tx/Rx
Tunability power
Equipment separation
(MHz) (dBm) N.B. ATPC range = 20 dBm
(MHz) RTPC range = 30 dBm

(Note 1)

9425 AWY 4QAM 17
1008 450
9425 AWY 16QAM 14
9428 AWY 4QAM 16
1008 450
9428 AWY 16QAM 13
9432 AWY 4QAM 16
1008 450
9432 AWY 16QAM 13
9438 AWY 4QAM 1260 560 16
9438 AWY 16QAM 1260 560 13
Note 1: Output power at antenna port.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 52 / 332
332
1–2.1.4 99% power channel bandwidth and Emission Designator
FCC ITU–R/CEPT
99% Power
Channel Rec.
Channel Emission Emission
Radio Type Bandwidth Channel

Bandwidth Designator Designator
Rule part Bandwidth
[MHz]
101 [MHz] [MHz]
9400 AWY 4QAM 2E1 2,8 3,5 3M5D7W
9400 AWY 4QAM 4E1 5,5 7 7M0D7W
9400 AWY 4QAM 4DS1 4,1 5 5M00D7W
9400 AWY 4QAM 8E1 10,9 14 14M0D7W
9400 AWY 4QAM 8DS1 8,1 10 10M0D7W
9400 AWY 4QAM 16E1 21,7 28 28M0D7W
9400 AWY 4QAM 16DS1 16,1 20 20M0D7W
9400 AWY 4QAM E3 21,7 28 28M0D7W
9400 AWY 4QAM DS3 32 40 40M0D7W
9400 AWY 16QAM 4E1 2,8 3,5 3M5D7W
9400 AWY 16QAM 8E1 5,5 7 7M0D7W
9400 AWY 16QAM 8DS1 4,1 5 5M0D7W
9400 AWY 16QAM 16E1 10,9 14 14M0D7W
9400 AWY 16QAM 16DS1 8,1 10 10M0D7W
9400 AWY 16QAM E3 10,9 14 14M0D7W
9400 AWY 16QAM DS3 16,1 20 20M0D7W

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 53 / 332
332
1–2.1.5 ETSI System Characteristics
Data is split into following Tab. 13. to Tab. 16. according to capacity and BER value.

Tab. 13. ETSI System Characteristics 16E1–E3 8E1 with BER 10–3
GHz 7/8 11 13 15 18 23 24/25 28/29 31/32 38
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
QAM
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
Guaranteed
Characteristic
TRANSMITTER 4 25 24 24 24 22 19 17 16 16 16
OUTPUT POWER
at antenna port (dBm) 16 21 21 20 20 19 16 14 13 13 13
10–3 BER THR 16xE1–E3 4 –83 –85 –84 –84 –82 –82 –81 –81 –80 –80
(Received power)dBm
At Antenna Port 16 –79 –81 –80 –80 –78 –78 –77 –77 –76 –76
10–3 BER THR 8xE1 4 –86 –88 –87 –87 –85 –85 –84 –84 –83 –83
(Received power) dBm
At Antenna Port 16 –82 –84 –83 –81 –81 –81 –80 –79 –78 –78
Net System Gain dB 4 108 109 108 108 104 101 98 97 96 96

10–3TH 16xE1–E3
–1+0
At Antenna Port 16 100 102 100 100 97 94 91 90 89 89
10–3TH 8xE1 –1+0
At Antenna Port 16 103 105 103 101 100 97 94 92 91 91
Typical Characteristic
MAX INPUT POWER 10–3 4 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15
BER
(Received dBm) at antenna
Port 16 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20
BACKGROUND BER
at PRx nom. Level=–35dBm E–12 E–12 E–12 E–12 E–12 E–12 E–12 E–12 E–12 E–12
Referred to Antenna Port
Transmitted Value Tolerance:

– 0,5 dB Ambient Temperature
– 2 dB Temperature Range ––> – 33°C ÷ + 55°C /ODU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 54 / 332
332
Tab. 14. ETSI System Characteristics 16E1–E3 8E1 BER 10–6
GHz 7/8 11 13 15 18 23 24/25 28/29 31/32 38

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
QAM
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
Guaranteed
Characteristic
TRANSMITTER 4 25 24 24 24 22 19 17 16 16 16
OUTPUT POWER
10–6 BER THR 16xE1–E3 4 –81 –83 –82 –82 –80 –80 –79 –79 –78 –78
(Received power)dBm
At Antenna Port 16 –77 –79 –78 –78 –76 –76 –75 –75 –74 –74
10–6 BER THR 8xE1 4 –84 –86 –85 –85 –83 –83 –82 –82 –81 –81
At Antenna Port 16 –80 –82 –81 –79 –79 –79 –78 –77 –76 –76

10–6TH 16xE1–E3
–1+0
At Antenna Port 16 98 100 98 98 95 92 89 88 87 87

10–6TH 8xE1 –1+0
At Antenna Port 16 101 103 101 99 98 95 92 90 89 89
MAX INPUT POWER 10–6 4 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15
BER
Port 16 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20
BACKGROUND BER

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 55 / 332
332
Tab. 15. ETSI System Characteristics 4E1 2E1 BER 10–3
GHz 7/8 11 13 15 18 23 24/25 28/29 31/32 38

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
QAM
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
Guaranteed
Characteristic
TRANSMITTER 4 25 24 24 24 22 19 17 16 16 16
OUTPUT POWER
10–3 BER THR 4xE1 4 –89 –91 –90 –90 –88 –88 –87 –87 –86 –86
(Received power)dBm
At Antenna Port 16 –85 –87 –86 –86 –84 –83 –82 –81 –79 –79
10–3 BER THR 2xE1

(Received power) dBm 4 –92 –94 –93 –93 –91 –91 –90 –90 –89 –89
At Antenna Port
10–3TH 4xE1
–1+0
At Antenna Port 16 106 108 106 106 103 99 96 94 92 92
Net System Gain dB

10–3TH 2xE1 4 117 118 117 117 113 110 107 106 105 105
At Antenna Port
MAX INPUT POWER 10–3 4 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15
BER
Port 16 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20
BACKGROUND BER

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 56 / 332
332
Tab. 16. ETSI System Characteristics 4E1 2E1 BER 10–6
GHz 7/8 11 13 15 18 23 24/25 28/29 31/32 38

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
QAM
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
Guaranteed
Characteristic
TRANSMITTER 4 25 24 24 24 22 19 17 16 16 16
OUTPUT POWER
10–6 BER THR 4xE1 4 –87 –89 –88 –88 –86 –86 –85 –85 –84 –84
At Antenna Port 16 –83 –85 –84 –84 –82 –82 –81 –81 –80 –80
10–6 BER THR 2xE1

(Received power) dBm 4 –90 –92 –91 –91 –89 –89 –88 –88 –87 –87
At Antenna Port
10–6TH 4xE1
–1+0
At Antenna Port 16 104 106 104 104 101 98 95 94 93 93
Net System Gain dB

10–6TH 2xE1 4 115 116 115 115 111 108 105 104 103 103
At Antenna Port
MAX INPUT POWER 10–6 4 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15 –15
BER
Port 16 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20 –20
BACKGROUND BER

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 57 / 332
332
1–2.1.6 ANSI System Characteristics
Data is split into following Tab. 17. to Tab. 20. according to capacity and BER value.

N.B. 7, 8, 11, 13, 25, 28 & 32 GHz ANSI systems are presently not supported.

Tab. 17. ANSI System Characteristics 16DS1 DS3 8DS1 BER 10–3
GHz 15 18 23 38
4 4 4 4
QAM
16 16 16 16
Guaranteed Characteristic
TRANSMITTER 4 24 22 19 16
OUTPUT POWER
at antenna port (dBm) 16 20 19 16 13
10–3 BER THR 16xDS1 4 –85 –83 –83 –79

(Received power)dBm
At Antenna Port 16 –81 –79 –79 –75
10–3 BER THR DS3 4 –82 –80 –80 –76

At Antenna Port 16 –78 –76 –76 –72
10–3 BER THR 8xDS1 4 –88 –86 –86 –82

At Antenna Port 16 –84 –81 –81 –78
Net System Gain dB 4 109 105 102 95

10–3TH 16xDS1
–1+0
At Antenna Port 16 101 98 95 88

10–3TH DS3
–1+0

10–3TH 8xDS1 –1+0
4 –15 –15 –15 –15

MAX INPUT POWER 10–3 BER
(Received dBm) at antenna Port
16 –20 –20 –20 –20
BACKGROUND BER
at PRx nom. Level=–35dBm E–12 E–12 E–12 E–12

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 58 / 332
332
Tab. 18. ANSI System Characteristics 16DS1 DS3 8DS1 BER 10–6
GHz 15 18 23 38
4 4 4 4
QAM
16 16 16 16
OUTPUT POWER
10–6 BER THR 16xDS1 4 –83 –81 –81 –77

At Antenna Port 16 –79 –77 –77 –73
10–6 BER THR DS3 4 –80 –78 –78 –74

(Received power)dBm
At Antenna Port 16 –76 –74 –74 –70
10–6 BER THR 8xDS1 4 –86 –84 –84 –80

At Antenna Port 16 –82 –80 –80 –76

10–6TH 16xDS1
–1+0

10–6TH DS3
–1+0

10–6TH 8xDS1 –1+0
4 –15 –15 –15 –15

16 –20 –20 –20 –20
BACKGROUND BER

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 59 / 332
332
Tab. 19. ANSI System Characteristics 4DS1 BER 10–3
GHz 15 18 23 38

4 4 4 4
QAM
16 16 16 16
OUTPUT POWER
10–3 BER THR 4xDS1

(Received power) dBm 4 –91 –89 –89 –85
At Antenna Port
Net System Gain dB

10–3TH 4xDS1
4 115 111 108 101
–1+0
At Antenna Port
4 –15 –15 –15 –15

16 –20 –20 –20 –20
BACKGROUND BER

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 60 / 332
332
Tab. 20. ANSI System Characteristics 4DS1 BER 10–6
GHz 15 18 23 38
4 4 4 4
QAM
16 16 16 16
OUTPUT POWER
10–6 BER THR 4xDS1

(Received power)dBm 4 –89 –87 –87 –83
At Antenna Port
Net System Gain dB

10–6TH 4xDS1
4 113 109 106 99
–1+0
At Antenna Port
4 –15 –15 –15 –15

16 –20 –20 –20 –20
BACKGROUND BER

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 61 / 332
332
1–2.1.7 Protection switching system
[1] EPS (Equipment Protection System)

In 1+1 configurations, the system can support 3 levels of protection against hardware problems.

All the switches are independent and have its own switching criteria.
Available switches
ODU switch
Tx EPS Rx EPS
(HSB)
Select the IDU unit in Tx Select the IDU unit in Rx Select the ODU on line
Not hitless Not hitless Not hitless
Non revertive/Revertive Non revertive/Revertive Non revertive/Revertive
Switch vs. Configuration
Configuration Tx EPS Rx EPS ODU switch
1+1 FD YES YES NO
1+1HSB YES YES YES
Details on EPS are given in:

• para.4–2.4.9 on page 242 (IDU switches)
• para.4–2.4.10 on page 244 (ODU switches)
[2] RPS (Radio Protection System)
RPS, hitless–switch type, is equipped to provide protection against radio propagation problems.
Details on RPS are given in:
• para.4–2.4.11 on page 246 (RPS–RX logic management)
• para.4–2.4.12 on page 249 (Hitless Switch)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 62 / 332
332
1–2.2 Tributary interfaces
E1 E3 DS1 DS3
Input / output
ITU–T G.703 BELLCORE GR–499
electrical interface
Code HDB3 AMI/B8ZS or LBO B3ZS
75Ω unbal
Impedance 75Ω unbal 100Ω bal 75Ω unbal
120Ω bal
Jitter Generation ITU–T G.823 BELLCORE GR–499
Jitter Tolerance ITU–T G.823 BELLCORE GR–499 / ITU–T G.824
ITU–T G.736
Jitter Transfer ITU–T G.751 BELLCORE GR–253
ITU–T G.742
1–2.3 Modem
Modulation 4/16 QAM

Demodulation Coherent
Equalizer type 19–tap FSE
Channel coding Reed Solomon (255,239)
Spectrum shaping Raised cosine
1–2.4 Maximum capacity and Modulation type
A FLASH CARD is plugged into the IDU Main unit giving the maximum capacity for the tributaries and the
Modulation Type. For details please refer to point [5] on page 26.
1–2.5 IDU–ODU cable
Coax. cable type (single) Filotex ET 390998 or equivalent

Coax. connector N (50 ohm)
Max. length 300 m – 984 ft
Lightening protection ITU–T K17 (current 333 A)
Signals on the cable DC Voltage/HDB3 Tx/HDB3 Rx (Note 1)
Gross bit rate on the cable:
– ETSI (2 to 16xE1/E3) 39.168 Mbit/s
– ANSI (4 to 16xDS1/DS3) 57.120 Mbit/s
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Note 1: The HDB3 signal contains the main signal, auxiliary signal and IDU–ODU service channel.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 63 / 332
332
1–2.6 Man–machine interface
Visual 8+2 LEDs

– F interface for Personal Computer (WindowsTM) RS232C

– TMN interface Ethernet 10/100 Base–T
Other
– TMN Data channel 64kbit/s interface RS422/G703
– Interface for Telephone Service Channel
1–2.7 Alarms
3 outputs (IDU HW Failure alarm, ODU Main Failure alarm, ODU Spare
Equipment alarms
Failure alarm)
Housekeeping alarms 7 inputs / 4 outputs
1–2.8 Power supply
48 to 60 Vdc 20%
or
DC nominal voltage (primary) 24 Vdc 20%
according to the IDU MAIN UNIT and IDU EXTENSION UNIT
used.
Polarity + or – floating (isolated ground)
1+0 : 40W
Max Power Consumption
1+1 : 80W
1–2.9 Mechanical characteristics
Dimensions (H x W x D) H Weight
43 x 210 x 443 mm < 2.5 kg
1+0 IDU 1U
1.7 x 8.3 x 17.4 in < 5.5 lb
86 x 420 x 886 mm < 5 kg
1+1 IDU 2U
3.4 x 16.6 x 34.8 in < 11 lb
ODU see Tab. 55. on page 138
– Integrated with 30, 60, 90, 120 cm (1FT, 2FT, 3FT, 4FT) diameter;
availability according to frequency (refer to Tab. 75. on page 155 for
Antenna details)
– Separated with larger diameters

Interconnecting cable 50 ohm, coaxial cable, max length: 300 m (984 ft)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 64 / 332
332
1–2.10 Environmental conditions
Main environmental aspects of Alcatel products are:

– Energy consumption during manufacturing and use

– Materials harmfulness and recyclability

– Emission to air, water or soil related to the manufacturing and the use of the product
– Electromagnetic (EM) emissions
– Value recovery at the product end of life
1–2.10.1 Operating environmental conditions
Storage ETS 300 019 class 1.3

Transport ETS 300 019 class 2.3
ETS 300 019 class 3.2
IDU
Temperature range: –5°C to +55°C (23°F to 131°F)
Operation
ETS 300 019 class 4.1, IP 67
ODU
Temperature range: –33°C to +55°C (–27.4°F to 131°F)
1–2.10.2 Electro–magnetic compatibility/safety
EMC ETS 300 385 class B grade B/FCC Part 15 subpart B–class A
Safety EN 60 950
Power supply ETS 300 132
Electro–Static
EN 55022 class B
discharge
Symmetric protection implemented in ODU & IDU
Lightning protection 5kV on cable ground according to IEC 1000–4–5 with 2 wave types:
1.2/50 μs and 10/700 μs
1–2.10.3 Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)
WEEE management for Alcatel products is in compliance with the Directive 2002/96/EC On Waste of
Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
The starting date coming into force for the European directive is 13th August 2005
In the different countries the European directive is effective once transposed in the specific country
legislation
All Alcatel products fall under in Category 3 of Annex 1A of the WEEE directive (Directive 2002/96/EC)
i.e. “ IT and Telecommunication equipment “ under item “ other products transmitting sound, images or
other information by telecommunications. “
Alcatel products fall under WEEE directive name: “ Other product or equipment of transmitting sound,
images or other information by telecommunications “ in Annex 1B.
The marking printed on the product denotes compliancy with the above Directive
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
(see para.B.7 on page 306).

This mark will not cause any responsibility as all responsibilities will be defined by contract.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 65 / 332
332
1–2.11 Dismantling & Recycling
1–2.11.1 WEEE general information

A new European directive was published on the 13th of February 2003 on Wastes of Electrical and

Electronic Equipment ( WEEE ) identified as EU Directive 2002/96/EC.
EU Directive 2002/96/EC sets rules for the collection and treatment of electrical and electronic equipment
in Europe coming into force from August 13th 2005.
Two regimes have been defined :

– Waste of household equipment
– Waste of professional equipment
As a consequence this paragraph of this handbook focuses on professional equipment regime.
There are two e–waste stream to be considered :

– Historical e–waste or waste of equipment put on the market before August 13th 2005
– Future waste or waste of equipment put on the market after 13th August 2005
The European directive introduce possible different responsibilities in the two cases, responsibilities that
are anyway specified in the contract between customer and supplier in agreement with the transposition
of the Directive in the Local Legislation.
1–2.11.2 Reference documentation for dismantling and recycling
ALCATEL Reference documentation for dismantling and recycling detail are the documents:
– Environmental guide
– Ecodeclaration
As far as 9400AWY Rel.2 equipment is concerned, reference documentation for dismantling and recycling
detail are the documents:
Tab. 21. Reference documentation for dismantling and recycling detail for 9400AWY R.2.0 equipment
DOC.
Product Code TYPE Denomination
(N.B.)
AWY/S 8BW036860000 BFZZA 9400 AWY/S ENVIRONMENTAL GUIDE
AWY/S 8BW036840000 EUZZA 9400AWY SCALABLE RADIO SYSTEM ECODECLARATION
N.B. DOC. TYPE for Alcatel internal use only
Such documents are available on specific request to your Alcatel local dealer.
NOTE FOR ALCATEL INTERNAL USE
cited documents, in Adobe Acrobat pdf format, can be retrieved from ePDM archive. Get highest
available edition.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 66 / 332
332
SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATIONS
For the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 equipment version this handbook issue is relevant to, this section gives detailed
operative information on:
– equipment items (P/Ns, equipping rules, labels for remote inventory)

– physical and logical position in the system
– unit assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, with the description on the access point usage
(connectors, visual indicators, buttons)
– pinout description of connectors for Customer implementation
– summary and operative information on characteristics of external interfaces
SUMMARY INFORMATION FOR IDU & ODU
Chapter 2–1 – Station layouts

It describes synthetically all available system configurations, layouts and user
interfaces. For each configuration, a quick reference to the other parts of this or 69
other sections is given, in order to retrieve detailed description of user interfaces,
equipment provisioning and explanatory block diagrams.
DETAILED INFORMATION FOR IDU
Chapter 2–2 – IDU part lists

It gives reference information regarding the IDU equipment’s items, that are 81
referenced to by the other parts of the handbook.
Chapter 2–3 – IDU provisioning

87
It describes the IDU provisioning according to the system configurations.
Chapter 2–4 – IDU operative information

It gives detailed operative information regarding the IDU shelf’s units available with
the equipment version this handbook issue is relevant to, for installation,
101
commissioning and maintenance purposes. Information given is relevant to
assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, as well as the usage description
of the access points (connectors, visual indicators, buttons).
Chapter 2–5 – Distributor subracks

135
It presents the available and optionally equippeable subracks for system wiring.
DETAILED INFORMATION FOR ODU
Chapter 2–6 – ODU and antenna configurations, part lists and provisioning
137
It describes the ODU configurations and relevant provisioning.
Chapter 2–7 – ODU and related optional tools operative information

It gives operative information, for installation, commissioning and maintenance 159
purposes regarding the ODU equipment and the Light service kit cable.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 67 / 332
332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
332
3DB 06687 BA AA
68 / 332
2–1 STATION LAYOUTS
This chapter describes synthetically all available system configurations, layouts and user interfaces
envisaged for the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 equipment version this handbook issue is relevant to. For each
configuration, a quick reference to the other parts of this or other sections is given, in order to have detailed
description of user interfaces, equipment provisioning and explanatory block diagrams.
Information given in the following is:

– Constraints for 9400AWY–IDU multiple equipping in a rack on page 70
– Hardware setting on page 70
– Hardware installation on page 70
– Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+0) on page 71
– Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+1) on page 73
• Introduction on page 73
• Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+1) IDU on page 74
• Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+1) ODU on page 77
– ODU (1+1) HSB–SD or FD–DA AP/CP with two antennas on page 77
– ODU (1+1) HSB or FD–CP with one antenna (11–38 GHz) on page 78
– ODU (1+1) HSB or FD–CP with one antenna (7–8 GHz) on page 79
– ODU (1+1) FD–AP with one double polar external antenna on page 80
Warning about interconnection cables drawn in Station Layout figures

They are drawn just to show the end–to–end points of each connection and must not be
used for physically setting–up the connections, that must be done taking into account the
need of extracting any board without removing cables not strictly relevant to it. Refer to
Installation Handbook (Ref.[B] on page 314) for detailed installation information like cable
P/Ns, connectors, cabling rules, etc.
Warning about equipment provisioning information

The items listed are the ’main’ items. For complete installation purposes, other
accessories, like mechanical components, adapters, etc. are necessary. Refer to
Installation Handbook (Ref.[B] on page 314) for exhaustive information on such items and
their use.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 69 / 332
332
2–1.1 Constraints for 9400AWY–IDU multiple equipping in a rack
Please refer to the Installation Handbook (Ref.[B] on page 314).

2–1.2 Hardware settings
[1] Hardware settings on IDU
For standard operations, there is no hardware setting need by Customer.

Notes:
• The IDU MAIN unit is fit with dip–switch banks that are set in–factory at a default configuration
(details are given in para.2–4.7 on page 133).
• Dip–switch banks are present neither on IDU EXTENSION unit nor on tributary plug–ins.
[2] Hardware settings on ODU
No hardware settings are envisaged on 11–38 GHz ODUs, while on 7–8 GHz ODUs a setting allows
to choose the half–band (LOW or HIGH) for TX (see para.2–7.2 on page 162 for details).
2–1.3 Hardware installation
Please refer to the Installation Handbook (Ref.[B] on page 314) for detailed installation information like
cable P/Ns, connectors, cabling rules, etc.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 70 / 332
332
2–1.4 Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+0)
Antenna
ODU
to IDU
INTERFACES OF 8E1/DS1 IDU 1+0
optional distributor subrack
to ODU
Power supply OS 1–8 E1/DS1

User service channels NMS G.703 + Audio 2
Alarms – Housekeeping NMS V.11 + Audio 1

to ODU

1–8 E1/DS1 NMS G.703 + Audio 2
User service channels
INTERFACES OF E3/DS3 IDU 1+0
to ODU
Power supply OS E3/DS3


INTERFACES OF ETHERNET + 8E1/DS1 IDU 1+0
to ODU
Ethernet

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 21. Station layout of 9400AWY (1+0)
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 71 / 332
332
N.B. Fig. 21. shows the solution with integrated antenna; antenna can be also external (see point
e ) herebelow)
– Power supply: see para.2–4.4.1 on page 107

– OS: see para.2–4.4.12 on page 120

– ECT: (not shown in Fig. 21. ) see para.2–4.4.11 on page 119
– Access:
• 1–8 E1/DS1 : see para.2–4.4.3 on page 108
• E3/DS3 : see para.2–4.4.5 on page 110
• Ethernet : see para.2–4.4.6 on page 110
• User service channels : see para.2–4.4.7 on page 111
• Alarms – Housekeeping : see para.2–4.4.8 on page 114
• NMS V.11 + Audio 1 : see para.2–4.4.9 on page 117
• NMS G.703 + Audio 2 : see para.2–4.4.10 on page 118

– Equipment provisioning:
a) 1+0 IDU:
– 8 E1/DS1 : see para.2–3.1 on page 88
– E3/DS3 : see para.2–3.3 on page 90
– Ethernet + 8E1/DS1 : see para.2–3.4 on page 91

b) Optional distributor subrack: see chapter 2–5 on page 135
c) IDU accessories and installation materials: refer to the Installation Handbook
d) ODU: see para.2–6.3 on page 140
e) Antenna: see paragraphs:
– 2–6.4.1 on page 149 (1+0 configuration with integrated antenna)
– 2–6.5 on page 155 (Integrated antenna part list)
or
– 2–6.4.4 on page 153 (Configuration with separated antenna)
f) Part list of ODU accessories and installation materials: see para.2–6.6 on page 157
– Equipment block diagram: see para. 1–1.2.1 on page 36.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 72 / 332
332
2–1.5 Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+1)
2–1.5.1 Introduction
In 9400AWY 1+1 system, IDU configurations and ODU configurations are independent from each other,
and can be combined in any way.
IDU 1+1
IDU EXTENSION UNIT ODU CH 0

front interconnections
access IDU MAIN UNIT ODU CH 1
IDU CONFIGURATIONS: ODU CONFIGURATIONS:

– 1+1 & 8E1/DS1 – 1+1 HSB SD
– 1+1 & 16E1/DS1 – 1+1 HSB one antenna
– 1+1 & E3/DS3 – 1+1 FD Double Antenna CP or AP
– 1+1 & Ethernet + 8E1/DS1 – 1+1 FD one antenna CP
– 1+1 FD one antenna AP
Fig. 22. IDU and ODU configurations in 9400AWY 1+1 system
For this reason:
– IDU 1+1 station layouts are described in para.2–1.5.2 on page 74
– ODU 1+1 station layouts are described in para.2–1.5.3 on page 77

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 73 / 332
332
2–1.5.2 Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+1) IDU
Following Fig. 23. thru’ Fig. 26. show layouts and connections of IDU configurations previously defined.
– Power supply (2 connections): see para.2–4.4.1 on page 107

– OS: see para.2–4.4.12 on page 120
– ECT: (not shown in figures) see para.2–4.4.11 on page 119
– Access:
• E3/DS3 : see para.2–4.4.5 on page 110
• Ethernet : see para.2–4.4.6 on page 110
• User service channels : see para.2–4.4.7 on page 111
• Alarms – Housekeeping : see para.2–4.4.8 on page 114
• NMS V.11 + Audio 1 : see para.2–4.4.9 on page 117
• NMS G.703 + Audio 2 : see para.2–4.4.10 on page 118

a) 1+1 IDU:
– E3/DS3 : see para.2–3.7 on page 96
– Ethernet + 8E1/DS1 : see para.2–3.8 on page 98

b) Optional distributor subrack: see chapter 2–5 on page 135
c) IDU accessories and installation materials: refer to the Installation Handbook
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 74 / 332
332

ËËËËË to ODU
ËËËËË
CH 0
ËËËËË
ËËËËË to ODU
CH 1

IDU equipment block diagram: see Fig. 10. on page 39.
Fig. 23. Station layout of IDU “1+1 & 8E1/DS1”
ËËËËË to ODU
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
CH 0
ËËËËË
ËËËËË to ODU
CH 1
Power supply 9–16 E1/DS1

OS 1–8 E1/DS1 NMS G.703 + Audio 2
Fig. 24. Station layout of IDU “1+1 & 16E1/DS1”

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 75 / 332
332
INTERFACES OF E3/DS3 IDU 1+1


ËËËËË to ODU
ËËËËË CH 0
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË to ODU
CH 1
Power supply OS E3/DS3

NMS G.703 + Audio 2
Fig. 25. Station layout of IDU “1+1 & E3/DS3”
INTERFACES OF Ethernet + 8E1/DS1 IDU 1+1
ËËËËË to ODU
ËËËËË CH 0
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË to ODU
CH 1

Ethernet NMS G.703 + Audio 2
Fig. 26. Station layout of IDU “1+1 & Ethernet + 8E1/DS1”

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 76 / 332
332
2–1.5.3 Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+1) ODU
2–1.5.3.1 ODU (1+1) HSB–SD or FD–DA AP/CP with two antennas

Antenna (2) Antenna (1)
ODU CH 0 ODU CH 1
to IDU EXTENSION UNIT to IDU MAIN UNIT
N.B. Figure shows the solution with integrated antennas; antennas can be also external (see point
b ) herebelow)
Fig. 27. Station layout of ODU (1+1) HSB–SD or FD–DA AP/CP with two antennas
a) ODU (x2): see para.2–6.3 on page 140
b) Antenna (x2): see paragraphs:
– 2–6.4.1 on page 149 (1+0 configuration with integrated antenna)

or
– 2–6.4.4 on page 153 (Configuration with separated antenna)
c) Part list of ODU accessories and installation materials (x2): see para.2–6.6 on page 157
– ODU Equipment block diagram: see:
• Fig. 16. on page 44 (1+1 HSB–SD)
• Fig. 18. on page 45 (1+1 FD–DA AP/CP)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 77 / 332
332
2–1.5.3.2 ODU (1+1) HSB or FD–CP with one antenna (11–38 GHz)
COUPLER
ANTENNA

ODU CH 0
ODU CH 1
Fig. 28. Station layout of ODU (1+1) HSB or FD–CP with one antenna (11–38 GHz)
a) ODU (x2): see para.2–6.3.2 on page 143
b) Antenna and coupler: see paragraphs:
– 2–6.4.2 on page 151

[1+1 HSB configuration with coupler and integrated antenna (11–38 GHz)]
c) Part list of ODU accessories and installation materials: see para.2–6.6 on page 157
• Fig. 17. on page 44 (1+1 HSB)
• Fig. 19. on page 45 (1+1 FD–CP)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 78 / 332
332
2–1.5.3.3 ODU (1+1) HSB or FD–CP with not integrated antenna (7–8 GHz)
ODU CH 1
COUPLER
ANTENNA
ODU CH 0
to IDU MAIN UNIT

to IDU EXTENSION UNIT
Fig. 29. Station layout of ODU (1+1) HSB or FD–CP with not integrated antenna (7–8 GHz)
a) ODU (x2): see para.2–6.3.1 on page 140
b) Antenna and Coupler:
– antenna: at Customer choice
– Tab. 72. on page 152 (Coupler and related items part list)
• Fig. 17. on page 44 (1+1 HSB)
• Fig. 19. on page 45 (1+1 FD–CP)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 79 / 332
332
2–1.5.3.4 ODU (1+1) FD–AP with one double polar external antenna
Double Polar Antenna

ODU CH 0 ODU CH 1
Fig. 30. Station layout of ODU (1+1) FD–AP with one double polar external antenna
a) ODU (x2): see para.2–6.3 on page 140
b) Connection of Double Polar External Antenna: see para.2–6.4.4 on page 153 (Configuration
with separated antenna)
– ODU Equipment block diagram: see Fig. 20. on page 45

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 80 / 332
332
2–2 IDU PART LIST
This chapter gives reference information regarding the IDU equipment’s items, that are referenced to by
the other parts of the handbook.
For each item this information is given in following Tab. 22. :
Ref.[x] is used in other parts of this handbook to refer to the item
P/N part number
N.B. The last two ANV-P/N letters stand for a ”feasible alternative”, they might
differentiate two items even though still functionally compatible. For this
reason the indicated ANV P/N does not include the last two letters.
NAME item commercial name
Remote inventory label
Max Q.ty note: the effective types and quantities of the listed items are given in chapter 2–3
on page 87 – IDU provisioning, according to the envisaged system configurations
Spare part item item that should be additionally included in the set of IDU spare parts (see
para.3–3.3.1.2 on page 177 for details)
N.B. explanatory note in Tab. 23. on page 86

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 81 / 332
332
Tab. 22. IDU part list
Remote Spare
Max
Ref. ANV P/N Name inventory part N.B.
Q.ty

label item

ETSI IDU MAIN AND EXTENSION UNITS (48/60V POWER SUPPLY)
[1] 3DB 06602 AB–– 1+0 IDU 8E1 48/60V PSU M4860S
M4860S +
[2] 3DB 06603 AB–– 1+0 IDU 16E1 48/60V PSU
P8E1
M4860S + 1 Y
[3] 3DB 06604 AB–– 1+0 IDU E3 48/60V PSU
P1E3
M4860S +
[4] 3DB 06605 AB–– 1+0 IDU 8E1 DATA 48/60V PSU
P2DATAS
a
[5] 3DB 06613 AB–– EXT IDU 8E1 48/60V PSU E4860S
E4860S+
[6] 3DB 06614 AB–– EXT IDU 16E1 48/60V PSU
P8E1 1 Y
E4860S+
[7] 3DB 06615 AB–– EXT IDU E3 48/60V PSU
P1E3
ETSI IDU MAIN AND EXTENSION UNITS (24V POWER SUPPLY)
[8] 3DB 06616 AB–– 1+0 IDU 8E1 24V PSU M24S
M24S+
[9] 3DB 06617 AB–– 1+0 IDU 16E1 24V PSU
P8E1
M24S + 1 Y
[10] 3DB 06618 AB–– 1+0 IDU E3 24V PSU
P1E3
M24S +
[11] 3DB 06619 AB–– 1+0 IDU 8E1 DATA 24V PSU
P2DATAS
a
[12] 3DB 06623 AB–– EXT IDU 8E1 24V PSU E24S
E24S+
[13] 3DB 06624 AB–– EXT IDU 16E1 24V PSU
P8E1 1 Y
E24S+
[14] 3DB 06620 AB–– EXT IDU E3 24V PSU
P1E3
table continues
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 82 / 332
332
Remote Spare
Max
Q.ty
label item
ANSI IDU MAIN AND EXTENSION UNITS (48/60V POWER SUPPLY)

[15] 3DB 06790 AA–– 1+0 IDU 8DS1 48/60V PSU M4860S
M4860S +
[16] 3DB 06791 AA–– 1+0 IDU 16DS1 48/60V PSU
P8DS1
M4860S + 1 Y
[17] 3DB 06792 AA–– 1+0 IDU DS3 48/60V PSU
P1DS3
M4860S +
[18] 3DB 06793 AA–– 1+0 IDU 8DS1 DATA 48/60V PSU
P2DATAS
b
[19] 3DB 06794 AA–– EXT IDU 8DS1 48/60V PSU E4860S
E4860S+
[20] 3DB 06795 AA–– EXT IDU 16DS1 48/60V PSU
P8DS1 1 Y
E4860S+
[21] 3DB 06796 AA–– EXT IDU DS3 48/60V PSU
P1DS3
ANSI IDU MAIN AND EXTENSION UNITS (24V POWER SUPPLY)
[22] 3DB 06797 AA–– 1+0 IDU 8DS1 24V PSU M24S
M24S+
[23] 3DB 06798 AA–– 1+0 IDU 16DS1 24V PSU
P8DS1
M24S + 1 Y
[24] 3DB 06799 AA–– 1+0 IDU DS3 24V PSU
P1DS3
M24S +
[25] 3DB 06800 AA–– 1+0 IDU 8DS1 DATA 24V PSU
P2DATAS
b
[26] 3DB 06802 AA–– EXT IDU 8DS1 24V PSU E24S
E24S+
[27] 3DB 06803 AA–– EXT IDU 16DS1 24V PSU
P8DS1 1 Y
E24S+
[28] 3DB 06801 AA–– EXT IDU DS3 24V PSU
P1DS3
FLASH CARD
[29] 3DB 06571 AA–– 4E1DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD ––
[30] 3DB 06572 AA–– 4E1DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD ––
[31] 3DB 06606 AA–– 8E1/DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD ––
1 Y c
[32] 3DB 06607 AA–– 8E1/DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD ––
[33] 3DB 06573 AA–– 4 QAM FLASH CARD ––
[34] 3DB 06574 AA–– FULL FLEXIBLE FLASH CARD ––
table continues
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 83 / 332
332
Remote Spare
Max
Q.ty
label item

CABLES FOR 1+1 FRONT INTERCONNECTIONS

3DB 06592 AA––
[35] OR ( t.b.c. ) 100 wire SCSI cable for 1+1 –– 1
3DB 06592 AB––
[36] 3DB 06632 AA–– HP 37 wires 8E1/DS1 cable for 1+1 –– 2
d
[37] 3CC13659 AA–– 37 wires 8E1/DS1 cable for 1+1 –– 2
[38] 3DB 06593 AA–– E3/DS3 cable for 1+1 –– 2
[39] 3DB 06594 AA–– User Service Channel cable for 1+1 –– 1
DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACKS
DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR
[40] 3DB 05583 AA–– ––
1.0/2.3
DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 120
[41] 3DB 05585 AA–– ––
OHM
DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR
[42] 3CC 08061 AA–– ––
1.6/5.6 1 e
1U DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR
[43] 3CC 08062 AA–– ––
120 OHM non EMC
3U DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR
[44] 3CC 07810 AA–– ––
120 OHM EMC
[45] 3CC 08061 AB–– DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR BNC ––
UPGRADE KITS
[46] 3DB 06608 AA–– 16E1 UPGRADE KIT P8E1 2
[47] 3DB 06609 AA–– E3 UPGRADE KIT P1E3 2 f
[48] 3DB 06610 AA–– 10/100BT UPGRADE KIT P2DATAS 1
[49] 3DB 10042 AA–– 16DS1 UPGRADE KIT P8DS1 2 b,
[50] 3DB 10043 AA–– DS3 UPGRADE KIT P1DS3 2 f
EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES
[51] 3CC 07946 AA–– Telephone Handset –– 1 g
[52] 3DB 01398 AA–– Maintenance Tool Kit –– 1
[53] 3DB 01397 AA–– Installation Kit Tool –– 1 h
[54] 3DB 01399 AA–– Station Kit Tool –– 1
table continues
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 84 / 332
332
Remote Spare
Max
Q.ty
label item
SOFTWARE PACKAGES
[55] 3DB 06690 AA–– SWP REG. 9400AWY R2.0 CDROM –– i

1
[56] t.b.d. SWP REG. 9400AWY R2.0.2 CDROM –– j
SWP OPTICS–IM WTD SNMP V218
3DB 04799 AC–– –– k
CD–ROM
3DB 04799 AE–– –– 1 l
CD–ROM
3DB 04799 AF–– –– m
CD–ROM
OEM SOFTWARE LICENCES
3DB 06819 AA–– SWL ULS R2 FEE ––
3DB 06820 AA–– SWL–LCT 9400AWY R2.0 FEE –– n
3DB 06821 AA–– SWL–RCT 9400AWY R2.0 FEE ––
RACKS
3DB 04656 AA–– ETSI rack H 2200 ––
3DB 04657 AA–– ETSI rack H 2000 –– 1

1AD 03905 0001 RACK ASSEMBLY 19 INCHES ––
INSTALLATION MATERIALS: refer to Installation Handbook
DOCUMENTATION: see para. C.2.1 on page 313
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 85 / 332
332
Tab. 23. Notes to Tab. 22.

N.B. Explanation

With respect to ED.01 of this handbook, all P/Ns of ETSI IDU MAIN AND EXTENSION
UNITS:
– for 48/60V POWER SUPPLY (REF.[1] to [7] in Tab. 22. on page 82)
– and for 24V POWER SUPPLY (REF.[8] to [14] in Tab. 22. on page 82)
have been changed:
– from 3DB xxxxx AA––
– to 3DB xxxxx AB––
E.g. the P/N of 1+0 IDU 8E1 48/60V PSU (REF.[1] in Tab. 22. on page 82) has been
a changed:
– from 3DB 06602 AA––
– to 3DB 06602 AB––
WARNING:
– The use of the units with the new P/N (3DB xxxxx AB––) is mandatory when the
used SWP version is 2.0.1
– The use of the units with the old P/N (3DB xxxxx AA––) is possible only when the
used SWP version is = 2.0.0
b Please refer to Tab. 1. on page 14 for system features and SWP–version relationship
The possible combinations of interface types and numbers that can be supported by each
c
flash card type is described in tables following point [5] on page 26
d Cables Ref.[36] and [37] in alternative (HP= High Performance)
e See chapter 2–5 on page 135
f See para.2–4.6 on page 125
g See chapter 3–2 on page 171
h See para.3–3.2.2 on page 174
i For versions 2.0.0 and 2.0.1
j For version 2.0.2 (and later, to be confirmed )
k For version 2.0.0
l For version 2.0.1
m For version 2.0.2
n Refer to CT Operator’s Handbook for details

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 86 / 332
332
2–3 IDU PROVISIONING
This chapter describes the IDU provisioning according to the system configurations:
Configuration Tributaries paragraph page
8 E1 / DS1 2–3.1 88
16 E1 / DS1 2–3.2 89
1+0
E3 / DS3 2–3.3 90
Ethernet + 8E1 / DS1 2–3.4 91
8 E1 / DS1 2–3.5 92
16 E1 / DS1 2–3.6 94
1+1
E3 / DS3 2–3.7 96
Ethernet + 8 E1 / DS1 2–3.8 98
NOTE ON ANV P/N The last two ANV-P/N letters stand for a ”feasible alternative”, they might
differentiate two items even though still functionally compatible. For this reason
the indicated ANV P/N does not include the last two letters.
The mechanical structure adopted comply with ETSI/19” standard practice.
This IDU can be also inserted in a standard ETSI rack, or placed on a desk, or mounted on a wall.
Please refer to the Installation Handbook for the provisioning of items that depend on the installation
choices.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 87 / 332
332
2–3.1 1+0 & 8 E1/DS1 IDU composition and equipment provisioning
a b

Fig. 31. 1+0 & 8 E1/DS1 IDU: composition
a) “1+0 & 8E1 IDU” equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 24. below is done according to the voltage
of primary power supply:
Tab. 24. “1+0 & 8E1” IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI)

Item (pos = position in Fig. 31. )
Power ETSI
Ref.
Supply tributaries pos Name ANV P/N Q.ty
(N.B.)
48/60 V 8E1 (nb1) 1+0 IDU 8E1 48/60V PSU 3DB 06602 AB–– [1] 1
a
24 V 8E1 (nb1) 1+0 IDU 8E1 24V PSU 3DB 06616 AB–– [8] (choice)
4E1DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD 3DB 06571 AA–– [29]

4E1DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH
3DB 06572 AA–– [30]
CARD
8E1/DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD 3DB 06606 AA–– [31] 1
any nb1 b
8E1/DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH (choice)
3DB 06607 AA–– [32]
CARD
4 QAM FLASH CARD 3DB 06573 AA–– [33]
FULL FLEXIBLE FLASH CARD 3DB 06574 AA–– [34]
b) “1+0 & 8DS1 IDU” equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 25. below is done according to the voltage
Tab. 25. “1+0 & 8DS1” IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI)

Power ANSI
Ref.
(N.B.)
48/60 V 8DS1 (nb1) 1+0 IDU 8DS1 48/60V PSU 3DB 06790 AA–– [15] 1
a
24 V 8DS1 (nb1) 1+0 IDU 8DS1 24V PSU 3DB 06797 AA–– [22] (choice)

3DB 06572 AA–– [30]
CARD
any nb1 b
3DB 06607 AA–– [32]
CARD
– (N.B.) reference to column Ref. in Tab. 22. on page 82.
– For Capacity and modulation supported according to IDU type and Flash Card, refer:
• nb1 (IDU basic), to Tab. 6. on page 27
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 88 / 332
332
a b
Tab. 26. “1+0 & 16E1“ IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI)

Power ETSI
Ref.
(N.B.)
a

3DB 06572 AA–– [30]
CARD
any nb2 b
3DB 06607 AA–– [32]
CARD
Tab. 27. “1+0 & 16DS1“ IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI)

Power ANSI
Ref.
(N.B.)
a

3DB 06572 AA–– [30]
CARD
any nb2 b
3DB 06607 AA–– [32]
CARD
• nb2 (IDU with tributary 9–16 E1/DS1), to Tab. 7. on page 28
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 89 / 332
332
2–3.3 1+0 & E3/DS3 IDU composition and equipment provisioning
a b

Fig. 33. 1+0 & E3/DS3 IDU: composition
a) “1+0 & E3 IDU” equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 28. below is done according to the voltage of
primary power supply:
Tab. 28. 1+0 IDU & E3 equipment provisioning (ETSI)

Power ETSI
Ref.
(N.B.)
48/60 V E3 (nb3) 1+0 IDU E3 48/60V PSU 3DB 06604 AB–– [3] 1
a
24 V E3 (nb3) 1+0 IDU E3 24V PSU 3DB 06618 AB–– [10] (choice)
4 QAM FLASH CARD 3DB 06573 AA–– [33] 1

any nb3 b
FULL FLEXIBLE FLASH CARD 3DB 06574 AA–– [34] (choice)
b) “1+0 & DS3 IDU” equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 29. below is done according to the voltage
Tab. 29. 1+0 IDU & DS3 equipment provisioning (ANSI)

Power ANSI
Ref.
(N.B.)
48/60 V DS3 (nb3) 1+0 IDU DS3 48/60V PSU 3DB 06792 AA–– [17] 1
a
24 V DS3 (nb3) 1+0 IDU DS3 24V PSU 3DB 06799 AA–– [24] (choice)
4 QAM FLASH CARD 3DB 06573 AA–– [33] 1

any nb3 b
FULL FLEXIBLE FLASH CARD 3DB 06574 AA–– [34] (choice)
• nb3 (IDU with tributary E3/DS3), to Tab. 8. on page 29
WARNING: E3/DS3 tributaries can be supported only by:
• 4 QAM FLASH CARD
• FULL FLEXIBLE FLASH CARD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 90 / 332
332
2–3.4 1+0 & Ethernet + 8 E1/DS1 IDU composition and equipment provisioning
a b
Fig. 34. 1+0 & Ethernet + 8 E1/DS1 IDU: composition
a) “1+0 & Ethernet + 8E1 IDU” equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 30. below is done according to
the voltage of primary power supply:
Tab. 30. “1+0 & Ethernet + 8E1“ IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI)
Power ETSI
Ref.
(N.B.)
1+0 IDU 8E1 DATA 48/60V
48/60 V Ethernet (nb4) 3DB 06605 AB–– [4] 1
a PSU
(choice)
24 V Ethernet (nb4) 1+0 IDU 8E1 DATA 24V PSU 3DB 06619 AB–– [11]
3DB 06572 AA–– [30]
CARD
any nb4 b
3DB 06607 AA–– [32]
CARD
b) “1+0 & Ethernet + 8DS1 IDU” equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 31. below is done according to
Tab. 31. “1+0 & Ethernet + 8DS1“ IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI)
Power ANSI
Ref.
(N.B.)
1+0 IDU 8DS1 DATA 48/60V
48/60 V Ethernet (nb4) 3DB 06793 AA–– [18]
PSU 1
a
1+0 IDU 8DS1 DATA 24V (choice)
24 V Ethernet (nb4) 3DB 06800 AA–– [25]
PSU
3DB 06572 AA–– [30]
CARD
any nb4 b
3DB 06607 AA–– [32]
CARD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• nb4 (IDU with tributary Ethernet), to Tab. 9. on page 30
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 91 / 332
332
ËËË c
ËËË

ËËË

d

e f
a b
Tab. 32. 1+1 & 8E1 IDU IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI)
Power ETSI
Ref.
(N.B.)
a
48/60 V 8E1 (nb1) EXT IDU 8E1 48/60V PSU 3DB 06613 AB–– [5] 1
c
24 V 8E1 (nb1) EXT IDU 8E1 24V PSU 3DB 06623 AB–– [12] (choice)
4E1DS1 4 QAM FLASH

3DB 06571 AA–– [29]
CARD
3DB 06572 AA–– [30]
CARD
8E1/DS1 4 QAM FLASH
3DB 06606 AA–– [31] 1
any nb1 b CARD
(choice)
8E1/DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH
3DB 06607 AA–– [32]
CARD
FULL FLEXIBLE FLASH
3DB 06574 AA–– [34]
CARD
–– d 100 wire SCSI cable for 1+1 3DB 06592 A––– [35] 1
HP 37 wires 8E1/DS1 cable for
–– 3DB 06632 AA–– [36]
1+1 1
e
any 37 wires 8E1/DS1 cable for (choice)
–– 3CC13659 AA–– [37]
1+1
User Service Channel cable for
–– f 3DB 06594 AA–– [39] 1
1+1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 92 / 332
332
Tab. 33. 1+1 & 8DS1 IDU IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI)

Power ANSI
Ref.
(N.B.)
a
48/60 V 8DS1 (nb1) EXT IDU 8DS1 48/60V PSU 3DB 06794 AA–– [19] 1
c
24 V 8DS1 (nb1) EXT IDU 8DS1 24V PSU 3DB 06802 AA–– [26] (choice)
4E1DS1 4 QAM FLASH

3DB 06571 AA–– [29]
CARD
3DB 06572 AA–– [30]
CARD
8E1/DS1 4 QAM FLASH
3DB 06606 AA–– [31] 1
any nb1 b CARD
(choice)
3DB 06607 AA–– [32]
CARD
FULL FLEXIBLE FLASH
3DB 06574 AA–– [34]
CARD
–– 3DB 06632 AA–– [36]
1+1 1
e
–– 3CC13659 AA–– [37]
1+1
–– f 3DB 06594 AA–– [39] 1
1+1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 93 / 332
332
ËËË c
ËËË

e
ËËË

d

e f
a b
Tab. 34. 1+1 & 16E1 IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI)

Power ETSI
Ref.
(N.B.)
a
c
4E1DS1 4 QAM FLASH

3DB 06571 AA–– [29]
CARD
3DB 06572 AA–– [30]
CARD
8E1/DS1 4 QAM FLASH
3DB 06606 AA–– [31] 1
any nb2 b CARD
(choice)
3DB 06607 AA–– [32]
CARD
FULL FLEXIBLE FLASH
3DB 06574 AA–– [34]
CARD
–– 3DB 06632 AA–– [36]
1+1 2
e
–– 3CC13659 AA–– [37]
1+1
–– f 3DB 06594 AA–– [39] 1
1+1
• nb2 (IDU with tributary 9–16 E1), to Tab. 7. on page 28
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 94 / 332
332
Tab. 35. 1+1 & 16DS1 IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI)


Power ANSI
Ref.
(N.B.)
a
48/60 V 16DS1 (nb2) EXT IDU 16DS1 48/60V PSU 3DB 06795 AA–– [20] 1
c
24 V 16DS1 (nb2) EXT IDU 16DS1 24V PSU 3DB 06803 AA–– [27] (choice)
4E1DS1 4 QAM FLASH

3DB 06571 AA–– [29]
CARD
3DB 06572 AA–– [30]
CARD
8E1/DS1 4 QAM FLASH
3DB 06606 AA–– [31] 1
any nb2 b CARD
(choice)
3DB 06607 AA–– [32]
CARD
FULL FLEXIBLE FLASH
3DB 06574 AA–– [34]
CARD
–– 3DB 06632 AA–– [36]
1+1 2
e
–– 3CC13659 AA–– [37]
1+1
–– f 3DB 06594 AA–– [39] 1
1+1
• nb2 (IDU with tributary 9–16 DS1), to Tab. 7. on page 28
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 95 / 332
332
2–3.7 1+1 & E3/DS3 IDU composition and equipment provisioning
ËËË c
ËËË

ËËË

d e

f
a b
Fig. 37. 1+1 & E3/DS3 IDU: composition
a) “1+1 & E3 IDU” equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 36. below is done according to the voltage of
primary power supply:
Tab. 36. 1+1 & E3 IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI)

Power ETSI
Ref.
(N.B.)
48/60 V E3 (nb3) 1+0 IDU E3 48/60V PSU 3DB 06604 AB–– [3] 1
a
24 V E3 (nb3) 1+0 IDU E3 24V PSU 3DB 06618 AB–– [10] (choice)
48/60 V E3 (nb3) EXT IDU E3 48/60V PSU 3DB 06615 AB–– [7] 1
c
24 V E3 (nb3) EXT IDU E3 24V PSU 3DB 06620 AB–– [14] (choice)

1
any nb3 b FULL FLEXIBLE FLASH
3DB 06574 AA–– [34] (choice)
CARD
–– e E3/DS3 cable for 1+1 3DB 06593 AA–– [38] 2
any
–– f 3DB 06594 AA–– [39] 1
1+1
• nb3 (IDU with tributary E3), to Tab. 8. on page 29
WARNING: E3 tributary can be supported only by:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 96 / 332
332
b) “1+1 & DS3 IDU” equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 37. below is done according to the voltage
Tab. 37. 1+1 & DS3 IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI)


Power ANSI
Ref.
(N.B.)
48/60 V DS3 (nb3) 1+0 IDU DS3 48/60V PSU 3DB 06792 AA–– [17] 1
a
24 V DS3 (nb3) 1+0 IDU DS3 24V PSU 3DB 06799 AA–– [24] (choice)
48/60 V DS3 (nb3) EXT IDU DS3 48/60V PSU 3DB 06796 AA–– [21] 1
c
24 V DS3 (nb3) EXT IDU DS3 24V PSU 3DB 06801 AA–– [28] (choice)

1
any nb3 b FULL FLEXIBLE FLASH
3DB 06574 AA–– [34] (choice)
CARD
–– e E3/DS3 cable for 1+1 3DB 06593 AA–– [38] 2
any
–– f 3DB 06594 AA–– [39] 1
1+1
• nb3 (IDU with tributary DS3), to Tab. 8. on page 29
WARNING: DS3 tributary can be supported only by:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 97 / 332
332
2–3.8 1+1 & Ethernet + 8 E1/DS1 IDU composition and equipment provisioning
ËËË c
ËËË

ËËË

d

e f
a b
Fig. 38. 1+1 & Ethernet + 8 E1/DS1 IDU: composition
a) “1+1 & Ethernet + 8E1 IDU” equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 38. below is done according to
Tab. 38. 1+1 & Ethernet + 8E1 IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI)
Power ETSI
Ref.
(N.B.)
1+0 IDU 8E1 DATA 48/60V
48/60 V Ethernet (nb4) 3DB 06605 AB–– [4] 1
a PSU
(choice)
24 V Ethernet (nb4) 1+0 IDU 8E1 DATA 24V PSU 3DB 06619 AB–– [11]
c
4E1DS1 4 QAM FLASH

3DB 06571 AA–– [29]
CARD
3DB 06572 AA–– [30]
CARD
8E1/DS1 4 QAM FLASH
3DB 06606 AA–– [31] 1
any nb4 b CARD
(choice)
3DB 06607 AA–– [32]
CARD
FULL FLEXIBLE FLASH
3DB 06574 AA–– [34]
CARD
–– 3DB 06632 AA–– [36]
1+1 1
e
–– 3CC13659 AA–– [37]
1+1
–– f 3DB 06594 AA–– [39] 1
1+1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 98 / 332
332
b) “1+1 & Ethernet + 8DS1 IDU” equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 39. below is done according to
Tab. 39. 1+1 & Ethernet + 8DS1 IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI)

Power ANSI
Ref.
(N.B.)
1+0 IDU 8DS1 DATA 48/60V
48/60 V Ethernet (nb4) 3DB 06793 AA–– [18]
PSU 1
a
1+0 IDU 8DS1 DATA 24V (choice)
24 V Ethernet (nb4) 3DB 06800 AA–– [25]
PSU
48/60 V 8E1 (nb4) EXT IDU 8DS1 48/60V PSU 3DB 06794 AA–– [19] 1
c
24 V 8E1 (nb4) EXT IDU 8DS1 24V PSU 3DB 06802 AA–– [26] (choice)
4E1DS1 4 QAM FLASH

3DB 06571 AA–– [29]
CARD
3DB 06572 AA–– [30]
CARD
8E1/DS1 4 QAM FLASH
3DB 06606 AA–– [31] 1
any nb4 b CARD
(choice)
3DB 06607 AA–– [32]
CARD
FULL FLEXIBLE FLASH
3DB 06574 AA–– [34]
CARD
–– 3DB 06632 AA–– [36]
1+1 1
e
–– 3CC13659 AA–– [37]
1+1
–– f 3DB 06594 AA–– [39] 1
1+1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 99 / 332
332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
332
3DB 06687 BA AA
100 / 332
2–4 IDU OPERATIVE INFORMATION
This chapter gives detailed operative information regarding the IDU shelf’s unit available with the
equipment version this handbook issue is relevant to, for installation, commissioning and maintenance
purposes. Information given is relevant to assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, as well as the
usage description of the access points (connectors, visual indicators, buttons). This chapter is organized
as follows:
– Cautions to avoid equipment damage on page 102
– IDU Main Unit front and rear views and access points on page 103
– IDU Extension Unit front and rear views and access points on page 105
– Description of User interfaces and connectors pin–out on page 107
– Flash Card on page 124
– Installation of tributary plug–ins on page 125
– IDU Main unit dip–switches on page 133
N.B. For detailed operative information regarding:
– equipment installation and commissioning, please refer to:

• 9400AWY Installation Handbook REF.[B] on page 314
• 9400AWY Line–up Guide REF.[C] on page 314
– equipment maintenance, please refer to section 3 – MAINTENANCE on page 167.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 101 / 332
332
2–4.1 Cautions to avoid equipment damage
a) Unit assemblies

Each of the IDU MAIN UNIT and IDU EXTENSION UNIT is assembled inside its own box and must

be considered an unique item from the service and maintenance points of view. Such an assembly
is supplied by Alcatel “as it is” and must never be disassembled , with the exception of operations
described in para.2–4.6, that must be carried out exactly as described.
b) Antistatic protection device kit
Whenever is necessary to handle spare parts and boards out of their own box, this kit (see
Fig. 135. on page 305) must be always warn and its termination must be connected to a grounded
structure, to avoid the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges.
c) Screw fixing
In normal operation conditions, all screws (for unit box closing, cable fixing, etc.) must be always
tightened to avoid item detachment and to ensure the equipment EMI–EMC performance.
The screw tightening torque must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %

2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) 10 %
Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.
d) IDU–ODU cable disconnection / connection
Before to disconnect or connect the IDU–ODU cable (at IDU or ODU side) switch off the
corresponding IDU Main Unit or IDU Extension Unit.
e) Craft Terminal connection
To connect the CT cable (at IDU’s F interface and/or PC side):

• verify that the PC is switched off (if switched on, close all running applications, then switch off
it)
• connect suitable cable to IDU’s F interface and PC side
• now the PC can be safely switched on.
f) Craft Terminal disconnection
To disconnect the CT cable (at IDU’s F interface and/or PC side):

• perform the logoff, exiting from the CT applications
• close all other running applications, if any
• switch off the PC
• now the cable can be safely disconnected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 102 / 332
332
2–4.2 IDU Main Unit front and rear views and access points
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A 8 12 15 16 17
9 10 11 13 14 18
19 B C
20
Fig. 39. IDU Main Unit front and rear views
Tab. 40. IDU Main Unit external interfaces and access points
Ref.
Connector or item detail Interface / Explanation Details
Fig. 39.
para.2–4.4.1
(1) SubD 3 Male Station Battery input
on page 107
ON/OFF switch: general I ⇒ ON

(2)
power supply switch O ⇒ OFF
connector for 100 pin SCSI

no pin usage by
(3) flat cable (used only in 1+1
Customer
configurations)
according to equipped plug–in (if any):
when no plug–in equipped, metal plate is
Á Á the slot is closed by a metal

plate (inside the panel rear
side)
mandatory to
ensure EMI–EMC
performance
(4) when 9–16 E1/DS1 plug–in para.2–4.4.4

is equipped on page 109
when E3/DS3 plug–in para.2–4.4.5

when Ethernet plug–in para.2–4.4.6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Tab. 40. continues ...
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 103 / 332
332
.... Tab. 40. continues
Ref.
Fig. 39.

para.2–4.4.8

(5) SubD 15 Female Alarms – Housekeeping
on page 114
para.2–4.4.9
(6) SubD 15 Female NMS V.11 + Audio 1
on page 117
para.2–4.4.2
(7) N 50 ohm for IDU–ODU cable
on page 107
Alarm attending pushbutton:
this pushbutton turns OFF para.3–5.5.2.2
(8)
LEDs MAJ/MIN and turns ON on page 190
yellow LED ATTD
Lamp Test pushbutton: it
para.3–4.2.1
(9) allows to HW test the LEDs of
on page 181
the unit
possible use inside

Equipment Controller
(10) corrective
Reset pushbutton
maintenance
chapter 3–2
(11) EOW telephone RJ 11
on page 171
para.2–4.4.12
(12) OS (or ECT) 10/100BaseT
on page 120
Debug RJ45 for

(13)
Factory use only
para.2–4.4.11
(14) SubD 9 Female ECT – RS232
on page 119
para.2–4.4.3
(15) SubD 37 Female 1–8 E1/DS1
on page 108
para.2–4.4.7
(16) SubD 15 Female User Service Channels
on page 111
para.2–4.4.10
(17) SubD 15 Female NMS G.703 + Audio 2
on page 118
para.2–4.4.13
(18) – LEDs
on page 121
(19) + (20) para.2–4.5
Flash Card
(A) on page 124
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
(B) label Data Matrix codification for factory use

Fig. 136.
(C) label unit identification
on page 306
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 104 / 332
332
2–4.3 IDU Extension Unit front and rear views and access points
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
B C
Fig. 40. IDU Extension Unit front and rear views
Tab. 41. IDU Extension Unit external interfaces and access points
Ref.
Fig. 40.
para.2–4.4.1
(1) SubD 3 (male) Station Battery input
on page 107
ON/OFF switch: general I ⇒ ON

(2)
power supply switch O ⇒ OFF
connector for 100 pin SCSI no pin usage by

(3)
flat cable Customer
according to equipped plug–in (if any):
when no plug–in equipped, metal plate is
Á Á the slot is closed by a metal

plate (inside the panel rear
side)
mandatory to
ensure EMI–EMC
performance
(4)
when 9–16 E1/DS1 plug–in para.2–4.4.4
when E3/DS3 plug–in para.2–4.4.5

para.2–4.4.2
(5) N 50 ohm for IDU–ODU cable
on page 107
Tab. 41. continues ...

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 105 / 332
332
... . Tab. 41. continues
Ref.
Fig. 40.

Lamp Test pushbutton: it
para.3–4.2.1
(6) allows to HW test the LEDs of
on page 181
the unit
para.2–4.4.3
(7) SubD 37 Female 1–8 E1/DS1
on page 108
para.2–4.4.7
(8) SubD 15 Female User Service Channels
on page 111
para.2–4.4.14
(9) – LEDs
on page 123
(B) label Data Matrix codification for factory use
Fig. 136.
(C) label unit identification
on page 306
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 106 / 332
332
2–4.4 Description of User interfaces and connectors pin–out
2–4.4.1 Power Supply connector pin–out

Present on the front panel of the:

– IDU Main Unit (position (1) in Fig. 39. on page 103)
– IDU Extension Unit (position (1) in Fig. 40. on page 105)
Tab. 42. Power supply connections
Pin Function
A1 + BATTERY
A2 GROUND
A3 – BATTERY
2–4.4.2 Connector for IDU–ODU cable

The ODU is connected to the IDU side through this connector (male N 90° – 50 ohm) by a suitable cable.
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)

The N–type connector carries +48 DC voltage for ODU power supply.
Do not connect measuring instruments directly.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 107 / 332
332
2–4.4.3 E1/DS1 tributaries (1 to 8) connector pin–out



For E1/DS1 tributaries the same input and output wires are used for 120 ohm (balanced) and 75 ohm
(unbalanced) (see Tab. 43. herebelow); the selection between the two options is possible with CT/OS.
Tab. 43. E1/DS1 tributaries (1 to 8) connector pin–out
pin 1
Description Pin # Pin # Description
Not Used 1 20 Not Used
IN+ Trib. 1 2 21 IN– Trib. 1
GND 10
29 Not Used
Not Used 11
Out+ Trib. 1 12 30 Out– Trib. 1
N.B. in 75 ohm unbalanced configuration ”Out– Trib.n” is the ground of ”Trib.n”.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
For system wiring solutions, refer to chapter 2–5 on page 135 Distributor subracks
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 108 / 332
332
2–4.4.4 E1/DS1 tributaries (9 to 16) connector pin–out


when the 9–16 E1 plug–in or the 9–16 DS1 plug–in is equipped.
For E1/DS1 tributaries the same input and output wires are used for 120 ohm (balanced) and 75 ohm
(unbalanced) (see Tab. 44. herebelow); the selection between the two options is possible with CT/OS.
Tab. 44. E1/DS1 tributaries (9 to 16) connector pin–out
pin 1
Not Used 1 20 Not Used
GND 10
29 Not Used
Not Used 11

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. In 75 ohm unbalanced configuration ”Out– Trib.n” is the ground of ”Trib.n”.
For system wiring solutions, refer to chapter 2–5 on page 135 Distributor subracks
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 109 / 332
332
2–4.4.5 E3/DS3 tributary



when the E3 plug–in or the DS3 plug–in is equipped.
Two coaxial 1.0/2.3 Siemens connectors are dedicated to the E3/DS3 input/output; the impedance is 75
ohm unbalanced. The line code is HDB3.
If the connector required is a BNC, a suitable adapter must be used. The adapter is a 6 cm cable with a
1.0/2.3 ”locking” connector and a BNC connector.
2–4.4.6 Ethernet tributaries
Present on the front panel of the IDU Main Unit (position (4) in Fig. 39. on page 103) when the Ethernet
plug–in is equipped.
For the Ethernet user data interfaces the following table summarizes the meaning of the LEDs integrated
in the RJ45 connectors:
Tab. 45. RJ45 connectors leds for Ethernet user data interfaces
Display
Color Led–off Led–on Led blinking
Function
Link and
LEFT LED Green Link down Link up –
activity status
No TX/RX
TX/RX activity
RIGHT LED Yellow activity activity –
detected
detected
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 110 / 332
332
2–4.4.7 User service channels (pin–out and description)


User service channel can be used in one of the following modes (selectable by CT/OS):
– 64Kb/s V11 co–directional – (data+clock);

– 64Kb/s co–directional – G.703 asynchronous (i.e. TX and RX data are not necessarily synchronous.
This mode includes DCE behavior);
– 64Kb/s V11 contra–directional (data+clock);
– 9.6Kb/s asynchronous V24/V28;
– 4.8Kb/s asynchronous V24/V28;
– 9.6Kb/s V11;
– 4.8Kb/s V11.
The pin function is shown in the table below.
Tab. 46. User service channel connector pin–out
pin 1
Pin # Signal Direction
2 COD_RX + INPUT
9 COD_RX – INPUT
3 COD_TX + OUTPUT
10 COD_TX – OUTPUT
4 RX_ASY INPUT
11 TX_ASY OUTPUT
5 CC_RX + INPUT
12 CC_RX – INPUT
6 RX_CK + BID
13 RX_CK – BID
7 CC_TX + OUTPUT
14 CC_TX – OUTPUT
8 CC_TCK + OUTPUT
15 CC_TCK – OUTPUT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1 GND /
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 111 / 332
332
For V11 co–directional mode, refer to Fig. 41. for the interface description vs pin–out.
USER SERVICE CHANNEL V11 CO–DIR

< USER RADIO >

USER EQUIPMENT IDU AWY
CC_RX +
DATA CC_RX –
RX_CK +
CLOCK RX_CK –
CC_TX +
CC_TX – DATA
CC_TCK +
CC_TCK – CLOCK
Fig. 41. User service channel: V11 co–directional interface
For V11 contra–directional DCE mode, refer to Fig. 42. for the interface description vs pin–out. Note that
V11 contra–directional DTE mode (as the user–equipment interface) is not supported.
USER SERVICE CHANNEL V11 CONTRA–DIR – DCE
< USER RADIO >
USER SUBORDINATE IDU AWY

EQUIPMENT (DTE)
DCE
CC_RX +
DATA CC_RX–
RX_CK +
CLOCK RX_CK–
CC_TX +
CC_TX– DATA
CC_TCK +
CC_TCK– CLOCK
Fig. 42. User service channel: V11 contra–dirdirectional interface

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 112 / 332
332
For G.703 mode, refer to Fig. 43. for the interface description vs pin–out.
USER SERVICE CHANNEL G.703

< USER RADIO >

COD_RX+
COD_RX–
DATA&CLOCK
COD_TX+
DATA&CLOCK
COD_TX–
Fig. 43. User service channel: G.703 interface
For V24/V28 mode, refer to Fig. 44. for the interface description vs pin–out.
USER SERVICE CHANNEL V28
< USER RADIO >
RX_ASY
DATA&CLOCK
TX_ASY DATA&CLOCK
Fig. 44. User service channel: V24/V28 interface

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 113 / 332
332
2–4.4.8 Alarms Housekeeping (pin–out and description)
Present on the front panel of the IDU Main Unit (position (5) in Fig. 39. on page 103).

The “Alarms–Housekeeping” SubD15 connector (pinout in following Tab. 47. ) is divided in:

– 3 summarizing discrete alarms – equipment outputs (A_1 to A_3); see point [1] below
– 4 housekeeping controls – equipment outputs (HK_O1 to HK_O4); see point [2] on page 115
– 6 housekeeping alarms – equipment inputs (HK_I1 to HK_I6; see point [4] on page 116
– 1 common wire (COM)
– 1 ground (GND).
Tab. 47. Alarms Housekeeping connector pin–out
pin 1
Pin Signal Direction

6 HK_I1 INPUT
13 HK_I2 INPUT
7 HK_I3 INPUT
14 HK_I4 INPUT
8 HK_I5 INPUT
15 HK_I6 INPUT
4 HK_O1 OUTPUT
11 HK_O2 OUTPUT
5 HK_O3 OUTPUT
12 HK_O4 OUTPUT
9 COM
1 A_1 OUTPUT
2 A_2 OUTPUT
3 A_3 OUTPUT
10 GND /
[1] SUMMARIZING DISCRETE ALARMS
The 3 summarizing discrete alarms (equipment outputs) are defined as follows:
A_1 IDU HW Failure alarm ( = IDU Main (or Extension unit) Card fail/missing + Loss of
IDU–ODU cable + Loss of Tributaries)
A_2 ODU Main Failure alarm ( = ODU Tx Failure + ODU Rx Failure)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
A_3 ODU Spare Failure alarm
For electrical characteristics refer to point [3] on page 115.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 114 / 332
332
[2] HOUSEKEEPING CONTROLS
For the 4 housekeeping controls (equipment outputs), it is possible to choose through CT not only
the manual setting of each one of them, but also the association to one of the system alarms available
in the CT menu lists (including: Major Alarm, Minor Alarm, Loss of Tributaries, Loss of IDU–ODU
cable, Remote Defect Indication, Local Defect Indication, ODU alarm, Service Affecting Alarm,
Signal Failure Alarm).
For electrical characteristics refer to point [3] herebelow.
[3] SUMMARIZING DISCRETE ALARMS & HOUSEKEEPING CONTROLS ELECTRICAL

CHARACTERISTICS
The presence of an active output alarm corresponds to a closed relay contact with a common wire.
The relay is compliant with the following electrical specification:
• alarm present ⇒ the relay is ”closed”: |V2| ≤ 2V, |I2| ≤ 50mA (the limit on the current defines
the maximum current supported by the IDU circuit)
• alarm not present ⇒ the relay is ”open”: |I2| ≤ 0.2mA, |V2| ≤ 60V
The limit on the voltage means that the customer is not allowed to force in this condition too large
V2.
IDU
OUTn
ooo ooo
OUT2
I1
OUT1
V1
OUTCommon
Fig. 45. Equipment outputs (summarizing and housekeeping)
Note 1: logic can be independently changed for each input and output (the relay is ”closed” when
the alarm is not present and is ”opened” when the alarm is present) through CT configuration while
for Summarizing outputs the default configuration is the only possibility.
Note 2: when the power supply is down (and also when the power supply is on, but the SW hasn’t
yet initialized the HW), all the relays of the outputs of the alarms/housekeeping are in the ”open” state
(HW default condition).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 115 / 332
332
[4] EQUIPMENT INPUTS
The IDU is able to detect the status of ”commands” coming from customer’s circuits.
A common (in) signal is supplied by the customer’s circuit, and this signal is different from the one

defined for equipment outputs.

The customer can use two different schemes to provide the command:
[case 1] relay
[case 2] open collector
Case 1 (relay)
IDU in n
customer
ooo ooo
I3
in 1 out
V4
V3
common (in)
customer
ground
Fig. 46. Equipment inputs – relay scheme
• alarm present ⇒ the customer relay is ”closed”: –2V ≤ V3 ≤ 0V, |I3| ≤ 10mA
This means that the customer’s circuit guarantees that |V3| ≤ 2V and is allowed to drain from
the IDU a 10mA max current;
• alarm not present ⇒ the customer relay is ”open”: |I3| ≤ 0.2mA. This means that the maximum
current drained by the customer’s circuit is 0.2mA.
Case 2 (open collector)
IDU in n
customer
ooo ooo
I3 in 1 V4
V3
common (in)
customer
ground
Fig. 47. Equipment inputs – open collector scheme
The IDU supplies a suitable negative voltage to the customer’s circuit:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• alarm present ⇒ the customer transistor conduces (= ”closed”): –2V ≤ V4 ≤ 0V, |I3| ≤ 10mA.
• alarm not present ⇒ the customer transistor doesn’t conduce (=”open”): |I3| ≤ 0.2mA.
This limits the max current that the customer’s circuit can drain.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 116 / 332
332
2–4.4.9 NMS V.11 – Audio 1 (pin–out and description)
The “(NMS_V11+Audio1)” interface has 9 pins dedicated to NMS and 6 pins dedicated to EOW analog
party line.
The NMS_V11 channel is a 64Kb/s; its working mode can be selected between:
– DTE: the data in and data out have to be synchronous, data out being the slave,
– CODIR (asynchronous): TX and RX are totally asynchronous (this mode includes DCE behavior).
Expected/transmitted Clock falling edge is in the middle of the data.
Audio1 outputs can be squelched by CT/OS selection.
Tab. 48. NMS–V.11 + Audio 1 connector pin–out
pin 1
RS422 data in (+) 1 9 RS422 data in (–)
RS422 clock in (+) 2 10 RS422 clock in (–)
RS422 data out (+) 3 11 RS422 data out (–)
RS422 clock out (+) 4 12 RS422 clock out (–)
GND NMS 5 13 Audio1 signal from user (–)
Audio1 signal from user (+) 6 14 Audio1 signal to user (–)
Audio1 signal to user (+) 7 15 Not used
GND Audio 8
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 117 / 332
332
2–4.4.10 NMS G.703 – Audio 2 (pin–out and description)

The “(NMS_G703+Audio2)” interface has 5 pins dedicated to NMS and 6 pins dedicated to EOW analog

party line.
The NMS_G703 channel is a 64Kb/s; its working mode can be selected between:
– DTE: G703 data in and G703 data out have to be synchronous, G703 data out being the slave,
– CODIR (asynchronous): G703 data in and G703 data out are totally asynchronous (this mode
includes DCE behavior),
– “In–frame”: this configuration both disables the NMS_G703 interface and enables the
insertion/extraction into/from the first E1/DS1 of the 64Kbit/s channel coming–from/towards the uP.
The insertion/extraction is relative to the first slot of the first tributary even if there is the possibility
in the IDU ASIC to configure the desired slot. This setting is not applicable with unframed E1/DS1.
Audio2 outputs can be squelched by CT/OS selection.
Tab. 49. NMS–G.703 + Audio 2 connector pin–out
pin 1
G703 data in (+) 1 9 G703 data in (–)
Not used 2 10 Not used
G703 data out (+) 3 11 G703 data out (–)
Not used 4 12 Not used
GND NMS 5 13 Audio2 signal from user (–)
Audio2 signal from user (+) 6 14 Audio2 signal to user (–)
Audio2 signal to user (+) 7 15 Not used
GND Audio 8
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 118 / 332
332
2–4.4.11 ECT RS232 connector pin–out
Present on the front panel of the IDU Main Unit (position (14) in Fig. 39. on page 103), and used to connect
the Equipment Craft Terminal, through a suitable cable (supplied with the equipment).
Tab. 50. ECT connections
pin 1
RS 232 RS 232
(IDU MAIN side) (PC side)
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 119 / 332
332
2–4.4.12 OS (or ECT) 10/100BaseT connector pin–out

Receiving Connection status

status led of the interface led
Tab. 51. OS (or ECT) connections

RJ45 RJ45
Signal Color used
(IDU MAIN side) (OS side)
1 Tx + White/Orange 1
2 Tx – Orange 2
3 Rx + White/Green 3
4 Not used Blue 4
5 Not used White/Blue 5
6 Rx – Green 6
7 Not used White/Brown 7
8 Not used Brown 8
Tab. 52. LEDs for Ethernet user data interfaces
Position Display Function Color Status Meaning
OFF link down

LEFT LED Receiving status Green
ON link up
OFF no activity
Connection status
RIGHT LED Orange
of the interface blinking activity in TX or Rx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 120 / 332
332
2–4.4.13 IDU Main Unit LEDs summary
Eight LEDs are present on the front panel of the IDU Main Unit (position (18) in Fig. 39. on page 103):
GREEN
GREEN RED RED
YELLOW
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
GREEN RED RED YELLOW
1) ON = Power ON (green)
2) RDI = Remote Defect Indication (red)
3) MIN = Minor Alarm (red)
4) EOW = Engineering Order Wire (bicolor: yellow if busy; green if free)
5) ODU W = ODU Working (green)
6) ATTD = Attended (yellow)
7) MAJ = Major Alarm (red)
8) LDI = Local Defect Indication (red)
Fig. 48. LEDs on the IDU Main Unit front panel
[1] ON – This green LED is ON when the Station Battery is connected, the ON/OFF switch is ON, and
the internal DC/DC is working properly.
[2] RDI – The Remote Defect Indication is a local indication of the Remote Equipment Failure alarms
requiring consequent operator intervention. It is transmitted from the remote station to the local via
the aggregate radio frame.
• In (1+0) configuration, RDI is formed in the remote station by the following roots :
– Loss of Signal of PDH Tributaries (E1, DS1, E3, DS3)
– Data plug–in Card Fail
– Data plug–in Card Missing
– E1/DS1 plug–in Card Fail
– E1/DS1 plug–in Card Missing
– Main Card Fail
– ODU Card Fail
– Transmission Function Failure (TxFail)
– Receiving Function Failure (RxFail)
– Provisioned Frequency incompatible with actual HW
– Provisioned TX Power incompatible with actual HW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• In (1+1) configuration, RDI is formed in the remote station by the following roots :
– Loss of Signal of PDH Tributaries (E1, DS1, E3, DS3)
– Cable Loss IDU (for both ODUs)
– Data plug–in Card Fail
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 121 / 332
332
– Data plug–in Card Missing


– Main Card Fail
– Extension Card Fail
– Extension Card missing
– ODU Card Fail (for both ODUs)
– Transmission Function Failure (TxFail, for both ODUs)
– Receiving Function Failure (RxFail, for both ODUs)
– Provisioned Frequency incompatible with actual HW (for both ODUs)
– Provisioned TX Power incompatible with actual HW (for both ODUs)
[3] MIN – Minor Alarm is the sum of the alarms to which the customer associates Low Severity weight
through CT
[4] EOW – This LED refers to the use of the EOW. Refer to chapter 3–2 on page 171 for details.
N.B. In 1+1 configuration, the LED EOW lights on (yellow or green) if and only if the Main board
is the active one as far as the EPS protection is concerned.
[5] ODUW – The ODUW led ON identifies ODU TX activity.

It is OFF in case of:
• IDU–ODU Cable Loss alarm
• Mute function activated
• K_TPS command switching–off related ODU in 1+1 HSB configuration
[6] ATTD – The attended LED is ON when the acknowledgement button has been pushed
[7] MAJ – Major Alarm is the sum of the alarms to which the customer associates High Severity (MAJOR
and CRITICAL) weight by CT
[8] LDI – The Local Defect Indication (LDI) has the purpose to show Local Equipment Failure requiring
consequent actions by operators. The LDI roots are:
• Loss of Signal of PDH Tributaries (E1, DS1, E3, DS3)
• Cable Loss IDU
• Data plug–in Card Fail
• Data plug–in Card Missing
• E1/DS1 plug–in Card Fail
• E1/DS1 plug–in Card Missing
• E3/DS3 plug–in Card Fail
• E3/DS3 plug–in Card Missing
• Main Card Fail
• Extension Card Fail
• Extension Card missing
• ODU Card Fail
• Transmission Function Failure (TxFail)
• Receiving Function Failure (RxFail)
• Provisioned Frequency incompatible with actual HW
• Provisioned TX Power incompatible with actual HW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The lamp test pushbutton (position (9) in Fig. 39. on page 103) allows the HW test of all LEDs.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 122 / 332
332
2–4.4.14 IDU Extension Unit LEDs summary
Two LEDs are present on the front panel of the IDU Extension Unit (position (9) in Fig. 40. on page 105):
GREEN GREEN
1) ON = Power ON (green)
This green LED is ON when the Station Battery is connected, the ON/OFF switch is
ON, and the internal DC/DC is working properly.
2) ODU W = ODU Working (green).
The ODUW led ON identifies ODU TX activity.
It is OFF in case of:
– IDU–ODU Cable Loss alarm
– Mute function activated
– K_TPS command switching–off related ODU in 1+1 HSB configuration
Fig. 49. LEDs on the IDU Extension Unit front panel
The lamp test pushbutton (position (6) in Fig. 40. on page 105) allows the HW test of all LEDs.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 123 / 332
332
2–4.5 Flash Card
2–4.5.1 General

Refer to:

– point [1] on page 23 for a brief functional description
– point [5] on page 26 for the possible combinations of interface types and numbers that can be
supported by each flash card type.
The Flash Card is housed inside the IDU Main Unit shelf (see position (19) in Fig. 39. on page 103).
Fig. 50. herebelow shows the FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction
CONNECTOR
SIDE
TOP SIDE
INSERTION
Fig. 50. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction
ATTENTION

Whenever you have to handle flash card(s), wear always the Antistatic protection device kit (see
Fig. 135. on page 305) and connect its termination to a grounded structure, to avoid the possible
damage of the flash card contents for electrostatic discharges.
As shown in position (20) in Fig. 39. on page 103, a suitable metal cover, fixed to the IDU Main Unit shelf
by three screws, is envisaged to ensure equipment EMI–EMC performance and to avoid item detachment:
2–4.5.2 Flash Card identification
The P/Ns for the possible Flash Card types are specified in the sublist FLASH CARD in Tab. 22. on page
82, which indicates, for each P/N, also the Flash Card Name :
a) the Flash Card P/N is reported on the label affixed on it;
b) moreover, the Flash Card Name is affixed on the label present on the front panel of the IDU Main
Unit (position (A) in Fig. 39. on page 103):
flash card name label
2–4.5.3 Flash Card upgrade

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Please refer to the 9400AWY CT Operator’s Handbook SWP 2.0 (REF.[D] on page 314), chapter Flash
Card upgrade .
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 124 / 332
332
2–4.6 Installation of tributary plug–ins
When Customer orders a 9400AWY equipment, usually , if tributary plug–ins are included in the order, IDU
Main unit and IDU Extension unit are delivered with the required plug–ins already mounted. In this case
this procedure has no use.
This procedure is used whenever, after the installation of a 9400AWY equipment with no plug–in equipped,
Customer needs to upgrade it adding tributary plug–in.
Fig. 51. on page 127 shows the tributary plug–ins presently available.
Notice that:
– in 1+0 configuration, you can equip any of the plug–in types into the IDU Main unit
– in 1+1 configuration, you can upgrade the system in one of the following ways:
• upgrade from 8 to 16 E1 tributaries: you must install the 9–16 E1/DS1 PLUG–IN into both the:
– IDU Main unit
– IDU Extension unit
• upgrade to E3 tributaries: you must install the E3/DS3 PLUG–IN into both the:
– IDU Main unit
– IDU Extension unit
• upgrade to Ethernet tributaries: you must install the ETHERNET PLUG–IN into the IDU Main
unit only.
Following Tab. 53. gives the compatibility between the upgrade kits and the IDU units.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 125 / 332
332
Tab. 53. Upgrade Kits and IDU units compatibility
UPGRADE KIT
ETSI &

ETSI ANSI

ANSI
16E1 E3 16DS1 DS3 10/100BT
UPGRADE KIT UPGRADE KIT UPGRADE KIT UPGRADE KIT UPGRADE KIT
3DB 06608 AA–– 3DB 06609 AA–– 3DB 10042 AA–– 3DB 10043 AA–– 3DB 06610 AA––
REF.[46] REF.[47] REF.[49] REF.[50] REF.[48]
ETSI UNITS
1+0 IDU 8E1

48/60V PSU
3DB 06602 AB––
A A NA NA A
REF.[1]
EXT IDU 8E1

48/60V PSU
3DB 06613 AB––
A A NA NA A
REF.[5]
1+0 IDU 8E1 24V

PSU
3DB 06616 AB––
A A NA NA A
REF.[8]
EXT IDU 8E1 24V

PSU
3DB 06623 AB––
A A NA NA A
REF.[12]
ANSI UNITS
1+0 IDU 8DS1

48/60V PSU
3DB 06790 AA––
NA NA A A A
REF.[15]
EXT IDU 8DS1

48/60V PSU
3DB 06794 AA––
NA NA A A A
REF.[19]
1+0 IDU 8DS1

24V PSU
3DB 06797 AA––
NA NA A A A
REF.[22]
EXT IDU 8DS1

24V PSU
3DB 06802 AA––
NA NA A A A
REF.[26]
A = Allowed NA = Not Allowed
REF.[x] in Tab. 22. on page 82

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 126 / 332
332
E3/DS3 PLUG–IN supplied with the E3/DS3 UPGRADE KIT
connector for connection

to board
arrows show position of 3 screws for

plug–in fixing to the board
arrows show position of 2 screws for

plug–in fixing to the front panel
9–16 E1/DS1 PLUG–IN supplied with the 16 E1/DS1 UPGRADE KIT
N.B. this plug–in has 2 connectors

for connection to board
ETHERNET PLUG–IN supplied with the 10/100BT UPGRADE KIT
Fig. 51. Tributary plug–in views

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 127 / 332
332
2–4.6.2 Procedure
Drawings used to show operations are relevant to the IDU Main unit. Operations to be carried
out for IDU Extension unit are exactly the same.

Screw fixing
In all described operations, the screw tightening torque must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %

2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) 10 %
Unit uninstallation and re–installation
In all described operations, when it is necessary to uninstall or re–install the IDU unit (MAIN or
EXTENSION) from/in the shelf, wall or desk assembly, please refer to the instructions given in
the:
– 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook (REF.[B] on page 314)
The following operations concern the IDU unit (MAIN or EXTENSION) to be upgraded:
[1] Isolate the power supply, disconnect Craft Terminal [see point f ) on page 102] and disconnect all
cables.
[2] Uninstall the unit and place it on a workbench
[3] If present, dismount both fixing brackets (Fig. 52. ), there are two screws for each:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 52. Dismounting the fixing brackets
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 128 / 332
332
[4] Undo the side screws (two on each side) shown in Fig. 53. :
2 screws for box cover fix

2 screws for box cover fix

Fig. 53. Cover unfix
[5] Rotating the removed fixing brackets into both the suitable cover’s side holes, slide the box cover
out from the box base, as shown in Fig. 54. :
use of fixing bracket to sliding out the cover

release the cover
Fig. 54. Release and sliding out the cover
[6] Wear the antistatic protection armlet and connect its termination to a grounded structure (see
Fig. 135. on page 305).
ATTENTION

this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 129 / 332
332
[7] Now, you can remove the cover (Fig. 55. ):

Fig. 55. Removing the cover
[8] Dismount the metal plate which closes the plug–in devoted hole (Fig. 56. ). In case the 9–16 E1/DS1
PLUG–IN or the E3/DS3 PLUG–IN has to be installed, take the two removed screws for their fixing.
unscrew the 2 screws ...

.. and remove the metal plate (inside the panel rear side), ...
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 56. Dismounting the metal plate
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 130 / 332
332
[9] Get the plug–in to be installed and prepare it for the insertion into the board. As far as the ETHERNET
PLUG–IN or the E3/DS3 PLUG–IN is concerned, refer to Fig. 51. on page 127. The 9–16 E1/DS1
PLUG–IN must be prepared as shown in figure below (i.e. without screw columns)
NO
YES
Fig. 57. 9–16 E1/DS1 Tributary plug–in preparation
[10] Insert and fix the plug–in as shown in Fig. 58.
N.B. As far as the 9–16 E1/DS1 PLUG–IN is concerned, use the two screw columns to fix it to
the front plate.
.. insert the plug–in in the board connector(s) and fix it to main board by three screws , ...
.. fix plug–in to the front panel by the 2 screws

or screw columns
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 58. Tributary plug–in insertion and fix
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 131 / 332
332
[11] Reinsert the cover
(reverse operation of Fig. 55. on page 130)
[12] Slide in the cover

(reverse operation of Fig. 54. on page 129. The fixing brackets use is not necessary)

[13] Now you can take off the antistatic protection armlet
[14] Fix the cover

[15] If they were present, mount both fixing brackets

[16] Upgrade kit identification label

After this upgrading, the Unit identification label placed on the box rear side [position (C) in Fig. 39. on
page 103 for the IDU Main Unit, and in Fig. 40. on page 105 for the IDU Extension Unit] is no longer
right to correctly identify the assembly as a whole.
This could impact on spare–part–stock management and maintenance.

For this reason:
• if the upgrade kit is supplied with a suitable self–adhesive label (under study), stick it just on side
of that already existing
• otherwise create a label writing the upgrade kit P/N on a self–adhesive sticker, and stick it just
on side of that already existing.
ÉÉÉÉ
additional existing
identification label identification label
of the upgrade kit of the basic unit
[17] Re–install the unit
[18] Complete upgrade operations with:
• system cabling (it is different from that previous to upgrading). Refer to the Installation
Handbook, according to the new hardware configuration
• system data re–definition (it is different from that previous to upgrading). Refer to the Operator’s
Handbook and to the Line–Up Guide, according to the new hardware configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 132 / 332
332
2–4.7 IDU Main unit dip–switches
Fig. 59. on page 134 shows the position of the dip–switch–banks placed on IDU MAIN unit top side; they
are accessible opening the IDU MAIN unit box as explained in para.2–4.6 on page 125.
In Fig. 59. , each dip–switch–bank enlarged view shows the number of switches (2–4) and their ON
position (ON means closed switch, OFF means open switch).
Tab. 54. below indicates the standard and special setting of such dip–switch–banks.
Usually, for standard operations, it is not necessary to access these dip–switch–banks. Units
delivered from Alcatel factory have these dip–switch–banks set in the standard position.
Tab. 54. Setting of dip–switch–banks on IDU MAIN unit
SPECIAL POSITION
STANDARD
BANK SWITCH
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
POSITION SETTING MEANING AND USAGE
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
1&2 OFF
1
ÉÉÉÉÉ OFF
ÉÉÉÉÉ
Allows the MIB scratch.
Configuration used whenever the MIB scratch
I4
2
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ON to a default content is necessary (N.B.)
ÉÉÉÉÉ
Allows the MIB scratch and prevents EC from
ÉÉÉÉÉ
start / restart.
1&2 both ON
Configuration used for the procedure “SW
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ Download through SIBDL” (N.B.)
1&3&4 ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
OFF ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
I5
2 ON
I6 ALL
OFF
Note: in board future versions, this bank could be no longer

I7 ALL OFF
present.
N.B. Do not use these dip–switch configurations, unless specifically referenced to by the specific
procedures present in the Operator’s Handbook or Line–Up Guide.
For the meaning of MIB, refer to para.4–2.3.2.2 on page 230
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 133 / 332
332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
I5
02
I7
FRONT SIDE
I4 position
FRONT SIDE
I4
Fig. 59. Dip–switch–banks on IDU MAIN unit
332
3DB 06687 BA AA
(internal reference
3DB06395AAAA HDZZQ Ed.02)
I6
134 / 332
2–5 DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACKS
For the physical connection of the User signal cables to the main tributaries connectors of the IDU Main
and Extension units, two main solutions are envisaged:
– usage of the Customer Plant Distributor racks, connected to the IDU main tributaries connectors
by means of Customer own cables or cables supplied by Alcatel;

– usage of Alcatel distributor subracks, to be housed in the same rack where 9400AWY IDU shelf is
installed. Following Fig. 60. thru’ Fig. 65. show the types of Alcatel distributor subracks optionally
available for this purpose.
For further information and detailed usage instructions, please refer to the 9400AWY Rel.2 Installation
handbook.
Assembly P/N: 3DB 05583 AA–– (REF.[40] in Tab. 22. on page 82)
Fig. 60. Assembly view of DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 1.0/2.3
Assembly P/N: 3DB 05585 AA–– (REF.[41] in Tab. 22. on page 82)
Fig. 61. Assembly view of DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 120 OHM

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 135 / 332
332
Assembly P/N: 3CC 08061 AA–– (REF.[42] in Tab. 22. on page 82)
Fig. 62. Front view of DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 1.6/5.6
Fig. 63. Front view of 1U DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 120 OHM non EMC
Fig. 64. Front view of 3U DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 120 OHM EMC
Assembly P/N: 3CC 08061 AB–– (REF.[45] in Tab. 22. on page 82)
Fig. 65. Front view of DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR BNC

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 136 / 332
332
2–6 ODU AND ANTENNA CONFIGURATIONS, PART LISTS AND
PROVISIONING
This chapter describes the ODU configurations and relevant provisioning:

– ODU general description: refer to point a ) on page 32
– ODU mechanical design and identification on page 138
– ODU configurations on page 139
– ODU part lists on page 140
• 7–8 GHz ODU part lists on page 140
• 11–38 GHz ODU part lists on page 143
– Antenna configurations on page 148
– Integrated antenna part list on page 155
– Part list of ODU accessories and installation materials on page 157
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 137 / 332
332
2–6.1 ODU mechanical design and identification
The ODU consists of one or two cabinets including the modem + transceiver + branching of a channel.
Two mechanical solutions are adopted:

– one for all frequency bands from 11 to 38 GHz, where the branching (diplexer) is internal to the ODU
cabinet; each of this type of ODU is identified by one P/N only
– another for all frequency bands from 7 to 8 GHz, where ODU is composed by two independent units:
the BRANCHING assembly (containing the diplexer) and the TRANSCEIVER assembly (containing
the RF section); each of this type of ODU is identified by two P/Ns, one for the BRANCHING
assembly and another for the TRANSCEIVER assembly. To read the BRANCHING assembly
identification label it is necessary to separate the BRANCHING assembly from the TRANSCEIVER
assembly.
Tab. 55. ODU dimensions and weights

11…38 GHz 7–8 GHz
Frequency TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER
TRANSCEIVER BRANCHING
+ BRANCHING + BRANCHING
235 x 235 x 72 mm 248 x 257 x 93 mm 235 x 235 x 73.5 mm 248 x 257 x 156.5 mm
Dimensions
(9.25x9.25x2.8in) (9.76x10.1x3.7in) (9.25x9.25x2.9in) (9.76x10.1x6.6in)
Weight 3.9 kg (8.58 lb) 4.2 kg (9.24 lb) 3.2 kg (7.04 lb) 7.4 kg (16.28 lb)
11 ... 38 GHz 7–8 GHz
BRANCHING
BRANCHING
IDENTIFICATION LABEL
(INSIDE)
(see Fig. 77. on page 164)
TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER
+
BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER
ODU IDENTIFICATION LABEL IDENTIFICATION LABEL
(see Fig. 137. on page 307) (see Fig. 137. on page 307)
Fig. 66. ODU types, identification, dimensions and weights
The ODUs are delivered with the “nose” adapter in case of configurations with the separated antenna.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 138 / 332
332
2–6.2 ODU configurations
The available outdoor configurations are listed in Tab. 56. herebelow:

Tab. 56. ODU configurations
Outdoor
UNITS APPLICATIONS ADVANTAGES
configuration
1x ODU
1+0 Non–protected
1x antenna single polarization
2x ODUs at same frequency
Protection against
1+1 HSB 1x coupler
failures
1x antenna single polarization
2x ODUs at same frequency

Protection against Improvement of performances
1+1 HSB SD
failures versus multipath propagation
2x antennas single polarization
2x ODUs at different frequencies

Protection against Improvement of performances
1+1 FD
2x antennas single polarization failures versus multipath propagation
(or 1 antenna dual polarization)
N.B. For explanatory diagrams, refer to para.1–1.2 on page 36 System configurations.
Legend:
FD: Frequency diversity
HSB: Hot Stand By
SD: Space Diversity
The P/Ns of the available ODUs in the different RF bands are listed in para. 2–6.3 on page 140.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 139 / 332
332
2–6.3 ODU part lists


Note: The ODU P/Ns listed in the following tables include the solar shield.
2–6.3.1 7–8 GHz ODU part lists
2–6.3.1.1 General
The 7/8 GHz diplexer included in the available BRANCHING assemblies refers to ITU–R F.385, 386 and
RF special CUSTOMERS channelling with Tx/Rx separation specified in following Tab. 58. and Tab. 60.
Each diplexer is a three port passive device with two band–pass filters as described hereafter (phisycal
arrangement is shown in Fig. 76. on page 163):
Port A
Port C
Port B
Each BRANCHING assembly has two different variants by duplex spacing, depending on the RF_Tx
output frequency band as described on the table below :
3DB Variant Channel

3DB xxxxx AA–– 1_1p
3DB xxxxx AB–– 2_2p
The arrangement between each filters on the same branching device is described below:
foL foH
f1 f2 f3 f4
frequencies
2.5 dB
70 dB
attenuation fr SHIFTER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 140 / 332
332
2–6.3.1.2 7 GHz ODU part list
Tab. 57. 7 GHz Transceiver assemblies

ANV P/N DENOMINATION
3DB 06691 AA–– TRX 9470 7.1–7.75 GHZ LHB

3DB 06692 AA–– TRX 9470 7.25–7.9 GHZ UHB
Tab. 58. Branching assemblies for 7 GHz ODU

Filter 1 MHz Filter 2 MHz Shifter menu
BRANCHING ASSEMBLY (Lower Band) (Upper Band) on CT Tun-
ability
Low High Low High (Mhz)
Designation 1 line per couple
P/N Limit Limit Limit Limit
(Shifter, CF)
BRANCHING 7GHZ ... f1 f2 f3 f4
3DB 10057 AA–– ... P.SH.154_C MHz 7107,0 7163,0 7261,0 7317,0 154C 7212,0 56
3DB 06774 AA–– ... CH1–1P P.SH. 154_A MHz 7428,0 7512,0 7582,0 7666,0 154A 7547,0 84
3DB 06774 AB–– ... CH2–2P P.SH. 154_A MHz 7484,0 7568,0 7638,0 7722,0 154A 7603,0 84
... CH1–1P P.SH.154_B MHz 7442,0 7526,0 7596,0 7680,0 154B 7561,0 84
3DB 06775 AA––
... CH1–1P P.SH.160 MHz 7442,0 7526,0 7596,0 7680,0 160 7561,0 84
... CH2–2P P.SH.154_B MHz 7498,0 7583,0 7652,0 7743,0 154B 7620,5 84
3DB 06775 AB––
... CH2–2P P.SH.160 MHz 7498,0 7583,0 7652,0 7743,0 160 7620,5 84
3DB 06780 AA–– ... CH1–1P P.SH.161_A MHz 7124,5 7194,5 7285,5 7355,5 161A 7240,0 70
3DB 06780 AB–– ... CH2–2P P.SH.161_A MHz 7194,5 7264,5 7355,5 7425,5 161A 7310,0 70
3DB 06781 AA–– ... CH1–1P P.SH.161_B MHz 7249,5 7319,5 7410,5 7480,5 161B 7365,0 70
3DB 06781 AB–– ... CH2–2P P.SH.161_B MHz 7319,5 7389,5 7480,5 7550,5 161B 7435,0 70
3DB 06782 AA–– ... CH1–1P P.SH.161_C MHz 7274,5 7344,5 7435,5 7505,5 161C 7390,0 70
3DB 06782 AB–– ... CH2–2P P.SH.161_C MHz 7344,5 7414,5 7505,5 7575,5 161C 7460,0 70
3DB 06783 AA–– ... CH1–1P P.SH.161_D MHz 7424,5 7494,5 7585,5 7655,5 161D 7540,0 70
3DB 06783 AB–– ... CH2–2P P.SH.161_D MHz 7494,5 7564,5 7655,5 7725,5 161D 7610,0 70
3DB 06784 AA–– ... CH1–1P P.SH.161_E MHz 7549,5 7619,5 7710,5 7780,5 161E 7665,0 70
3DB 06784 AB–– ... CH2–2P P.SH.161_E MHz 7619,5 7689,5 7780,5 7850,5 161E 7735,0 70
3DB 06785 AA–– ... CH1–1P P.SH.161_F MHz 7574,5 7644,5 7735,5 7805,5 161F 7690,0 70
3DB 06785 AB–– ... CH2–2P P.SH.161_F MHz 7644,5 7714,5 7805,5 7875,5 161F 7760,0 70
3DB 10058 AA–– ... CH1–1P P.SH.168_B MHZ 7187,0 7243,0 7355,0 7411,0 168B 7299,0 56
3DB 06776 AA–– ... CH1–1P P.SH.168 MHZ 7443,0 7527,0 7611,0 7695,0 168 7569,0 84
3DB 06776 AB–– ... CH2–2P P.SH.168 MHZ 7499,0 7583,0 7667,0 7751,0 168 7625,0 84
3DB 06777 AA–– ... CH1–1P P.SH.182 MHZ 7414,0 7498,0 7596,0 7680,0 182 7547,0 84
3DB 06777 AB–– ... CH2–2P P.SH.182 MHZ 7470,0 7554,0 7652,0 7736,0 182 7603,0 84
3DB 06778 AA–– ... CH1–1P P.SH.196 MHZ 7107,0 7191,0 7303,0 7387,0 196 7247,0 84
3DB 06778 AB–– ... CH2–2P P.SH.196 MHZ 7163,0 7247,0 7359,0 7443,0 196 7303,0 84
3DB 06779 AA–– ... CH1–1P P.SH.245 MHZ 7428,0 7540,0 7673,0 7785,0 245 7606,5 112
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3DB 06779 AB–– ... CH2–2P P.SH.245 MHZ 7540,0 7652,0 7785,0 7897,0 245 7718,5 112
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 141 / 332
332
2–6.3.1.3 8 GHz ODU part list
Tab. 59. 8 GHz Transceiver assemblies

ANV P/N DENOMINATION

3DB 06693 AA–– TRX 9470 7.7–8.4 GHZ LHB
3DB 06694 AA–– TRX 9470 8.0–8.5 GHZ UHB
Tab. 60. Branching assemblies for 8 GHz ODU

Filter 1 MHz Filter 2 MHz Shifter menu
BRANCHING ASSEMBLY (Lower Band) (Upper Band) on CT Tun-
ability
Low High Low High (Mhz)
Designation 1 line per couple
P/N Limit Limit Limit Limit
(Shifter, CF)
BRANCHING 8GHZ ... f1 f2 f3 f4
... CH1–1P P.SH.119 MHz 8282,5 8328,0 8405,0 8450,5 119 8366,5 45
3DB 06789 AA––
... CH1–1P P.SH.126 MHz 8282,5 8328,0 8405,0 8450,5 126 8366,5 45
... CH2–2P P.SH.119 MHz 8324,5 8370,0 8447,0 8492,5 119 8408,5 45
3DB 06789 AB––
... CH2–2P P.SH.126 MHz 8324,5 8370,0 8447,0 8492,5 126 8408,5 45
3DB 06787 AA–– ... CH1–1P P.SH.151 MHz 8204,2 8274,2 8355,8 8425,8 151 8315,0 70
3DB 06787 AB–– ... CH2–2P P.SH.151 MHz 8274,2 8344,2 8425,8 8495,8 151 8385,0 70
3DB 06788 AA–– ... CH1–1P P.SH.266 MHZ 7905,0 8024,0 8171,0 8290,0 266 8097,5 119
3DB 06788 AB–– ... CH2–2P P.SH.266 MHZ 8017,0 8136,0 8283,0 8402,0 266 8209,5 119
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 142 / 332
332
2–6.3.2 11–38 GHz ODU part lists
The following tables report the P/N of the available 11–38 GHz ODUs with the following information from
left to right:
Column 1: Shifter (MHz)

Column 2 & 3: Tx and Rx sub–bands
Column 4 to 7: Tx & Rx frequency ranges at RF interface (MHz)
Tab. 61. 11 GHz ODU

RF interface (MHz)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ODU P/N Shifter Tx Rx RF Tx min RF Tx max RF Rx min RF Rx max
3CC 14116 AA–– 2 2p 10950 11200 11480 11730
530
3CC 14117 AA–– 2p 2 11480 11730 10950 11200
Tab. 62. 13 GHz ODU

RF interface (MHz)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3CC 13690 AA–– 1p 1 13016 13131 12750 12865
3CC 13691 AA–– 2p 2 13131 13246 12865 12980
266
3CC 13688 AA–– 1 1p 12750 12865 13016 13131
3CC 13689 AA–– 2 2p 12865 12980 13131 13246
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 143 / 332
332
Tab. 63. 15 GHz ODU
RF interface (MHz)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

3CC 13694 AA–– 1p 1 14963 15075 14648 14760
3CC 13695 AA–– 2p 2 15075 15187 14760 14872
315
3CC 13692 AA–– 1 1p 14648 14760 14963 15075
3CC 13693 AA–– 2 2p 14760 14872 15075 15187
3CC 13698 AA–– 1p 1 14920 15140 14500 14720
3CC 13699 AA–– 2p 2 15130 15350 14710 14930
420
3CC 13696 AA–– 1 1p 14500 14720 14920 15140
3CC 13697 AA–– 2 2p 14710 14930 15130 15350
3CC 13702 AA–– 1p 1 14975 15135 14500 14660
3CC 13703 AA–– 475 High 2p 2 15135 15350 14660 14875
3CC 13700 AA–– Power 1 1p 14500 14660 14975 15135
3CC 13701 AA–– 2 2p 14660 14875 15135 15350
3CC 14079 AA–– 1p 1 14975 15135 14500 14660
3CC 14080 AA–– 2p 2 15135 15350 14660 14875
475
3CC 14077 AA–– 1 1p 14500 14660 14975 15135
3CC 14078 AA–– 2 2p 14660 14875 15135 15350
3CC 13706 AA–– 1p 1 14890 15125 14400 14635
3CC 13707 AA–– 2p 2 15115 15350 14625 14860
490
3CC 13704 AA–– 1 1p 14400 14635 14890 15125
3CC 13705 AA–– 2 2p 14625 14860 15115 15350
3CC 13710 AA–– 1p 1 15140 15352 14500 14712
640
3CC 13708 AA–– 1 1p 14500 14712 15140 15352
3CC 13711 AA–– 1p 1 15144 15350 14500 14706
644
3CC 13709 AA–– 1 1p 14500 14706 15144 15350
3CC 13713 AA–– 1p 1 15228 15348 14500 14620
728
3CC 13712 AA–– 1 1p 14500 14620 15228 15348
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 144 / 332
332
Tab. 64. 18 GHz ODU
RF interface (MHz)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

3CC 13470 AA–– 1p 1 18708 19203 17700 18195
3CC 13471 AA–– 2p 2 19203 19698 18195 18690
1008
3CC 13468 AA–– 1 1p 17700 18195 18708 19203
3CC 13469 AA–– 2 2p 18195 18690 19203 19698
3CC 12993 AA–– 1p 1 18710 19205 17700 18195
3CC 12994 AA–– 2p 2 19205 19700 18195 18690
1010
3CC 12991 AA–– 1 1p 17700 18195 18710 19205
3CC 12992 AA–– 2 2p 18195 18690 19205 19700
3CC 13716 AA–– 1p 1 18921.75 19038.25 18581.75 18698.25

3CC 13717 AA–– 2p 2 19041.75 19158.25 18701.75 18818.25
340
3CC 13714 AA–– 1 1p 18581.75 18698.25 18921.75 19038.25
3CC 13715 AA–– 2 2p 18701.75 18818.25 19041.75 19158.25
3CC 14474 AA–– 1p 1 18820.00 19177.50 17727.50 18085.00
3CC 14475 AA–– 2p 2 19315.00 19672.50 18222.50 18580.00
1092.5
3CC 14472 AA–– 1 1p 17727.50 18085.00 18820.00 19177.50
3CC 14473 AA–– 2 2p 18222.50 18580.00 19315.00 19672.50
3CC 12996 AA–– 1p 1 19260 19700 17700 18140
1560 ETSI
3CC 12995 AA–– 1 1p 17700 18140 19260 19700
3CC 13948 AA–– 1p 1 19260 19700 17700 18140
1560 ANSI
3CC 13947 AA–– 1 1p 17700 18140 19260 19700
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 145 / 332
332
Tab. 65. 23 GHz ODU
RF interface (MHz)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

3CC 13720 AA–– 1p 1 23008.00 23323.00 22001.75 22315.00
3CC 13721 AA–– 2p 2 23308 .00 23598.25 22300.00 22600.00
1008
3CC 13718 AA–– 1 1p 22001.75 22315.00 23008.00 23323.00
3CC 13719 AA–– 2 2p 22300.00 22600.00 23308 .00 23598.25
3CC 13724 AA–– 1p 1 22400 22980 21200 21780
3CC 13725 AA–– 1200 2p 2 23020 23600 21820 22400
3CC 13722 AA–– ANSI 1 1p 21200 21780 22400 22980
3CC 13723 AA–– 2 2p 21820 22400 23020 23600
3CC 14390 AA–– 1p 1 22401.75 23018.25 21201.75 21818.25
3CC 14391 AA–– 1200 2p 2 22981.75 23598.25 21781.75 22398.25
3CC 14388 AA–– ETSI 1 1p 21201.75 21818.25 22401.75 23018.25
3CC 14389 AA–– 2 2p 21781.75 22398.25 22981.75 23598.25
3CC 13728 AA–– 1p 1 22430 23010 21198 21783
3CC 13729 AA–– 2p 2 23020 23600 21783 22368
1232
3CC 13726 AA–– 1 1p 21198 21783 22430 23010
3CC 13727 AA–– 2 2p 21783 22368 23020 23600
Tab. 66. 25 GHz ODU

RF interface (MHz)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3CC 13736 AA–– 1p 1 25548 26002 24540 24994
3CC 13737 AA–– 2p 2 26002 26456 24994 25448
1008
3CC 13734 AA–– 1 1p 24540 24994 25548 26002
3CC 13735 AA–– 2 2p 24994 25448 26002 26456
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 146 / 332
332
Tab. 67. 28 GHz ODU
RF interface (MHz)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

3CC 13740 AA–– 1p 1 28548 29002 27540 27994
3CC 13741 AA–– 2p 2 29002 29456 27994 28448
1008
3CC 13738 AA–– 1 1p 27540 27994 28548 29002
3CC 13739 AA–– 2 2p 27994 28448 29002 29456
Tab. 68. 32 GHz ODU

RF interface (MHz)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3CC 13746 AA–– 1p 1 32612 33006 31800 32194
3CC 13747 AA–– 2p 2 33006 33400 32194 32588
812
3CC 13744 AA–– 1 1p 31800 32194 32612 33006
3CC 13745 AA–– 2 2p 32194 32588 33006 33400
Tab. 69. 38 GHz ODU

RF interface (MHz)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3CC 12989 AA–– 1p 1 38310 38880 37050 37620
3CC 12990 AA–– 2p 2 38880 39440 37620 38180
1260
3CC 12987 AA–– 1 1p 37050 37620 38310 38880
3CC 12988 AA–– 2 2p 37620 38180 38880 39440
3CC 13054 AA–– 1p 1 39300 39650 38600 38950
3CC 13055 AA–– 700 2p 2 39650 40000 38950 39300
3CC 13052 AA–– ANSI 1 1p 38600 38950 39300 39650
3CC 13053 AA–– 2 2p 38950 39300 39650 40000
3CC 13934 AA–– 700 2p 2 39600 39800 38900 39100
3CC 13933 AA–– Canada 2 2p 38900 39100 39600 39800
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 147 / 332
332
2–6.4 Antenna configurations
The ODU can be connected to:

– an integrated antenna of 30 cm (1FT) or 60 cm (2FT) or 90 cm (3FT) or 120 cm (4FT) diameter.

– a separated antenna, if larger diameters are necessary. In this case, the antenna is interconnected
by a flextwist directly to the ODU, or the coupler, depending on the protection used.
For the outdoor section different 1+1 configuration can be implemented:
• basic HSB with a 1 dB/10 dB asymmetrical coupler and 1 antenna: this configuration optimizes
the infrastructure using only one antenna, a 10 dB coupling has been chosen to minimize the
losses on the normal path (1 dB only).
• HSB configuration is also available with a 3 dB symmetrical coupler and 1 antenna
• without coupler and 2 antennas: this configuration adds a natural Space Diversity and improves
the link budget avoiding coupler losses on the stand–by path.
• without coupler and 1 dual polarization antenna: this configuration allows a polarization
diversity, minimizes the antenna and avoids coupler losses on the stand–by path.
The pole mounting versions are given in the following Tab. 70. for each configuration:
Tab. 70. Pole Mounting versions
Version see para
1+0 with integrated antenna 2–6.4.1 page 149
1+1 HSB configuration with coupler and integrated antenna (11–38 GHz) 2–6.4.2 page 151
1+1 HSB configuration with hybrid coupler and not integrated antenna (7–8 GHz) 2–6.4.3 page 152
Configuration with separated antenna 2–6.4.4 page 153

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 148 / 332
332
2–6.4.1 1+0 configuration with integrated antenna
The following Fig. 67. and Fig. 68. show the 1+0 configuration with a 30 cm (1FT) antenna in both vertical
and horizontal configurations. The modification of the polarization is obtained by rotating the ODU and the
nose of the antenna.

7–8 GHz
antenna
IDU connector
INTEGRATED
ANTENNA
POLE MOUNTING
(P/N REF.[58]
in Tab. 76. on page 157 11 ... 38 GHz
antenna
360 mm
(14.17 in)
IDU connector
390 mm
(15.35 in)
620 mm
(24.41 in)
Fig. 67. View of ODU with integrated antenna (V polarization)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 149 / 332
332
7–8 GHz
antenna

IDU connector
INTEGRATED
ANTENNA
POLE MOUNTING
(P/N REF.[58] 11 ... 38 GHz
in Tab. 76. on page 157
antenna
IDU connector
measures as Fig. 67.
Fig. 68. View of ODU with integrated antenna (H polarization)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 150 / 332
332
2–6.4.2 1+1 HSB configuration with coupler and integrated antenna (11–38 GHz)
– See Fig. 69. below. The 2 ODUs are interconnected through a 3 dB / 3 dB or a 1 dB /10 dB coupler.
The coupler is fixed on the 1+0 pole mounting with 4 catches. The 2 ODUs are connected to the
coupler with their catches.

– The modification of the polarization is done on the coupler by rotating rings at antenna port and on
the antenna by rotating the nose (the ODUs are always in the same position).
– Different couplers are available, as shown in Tab. 71. herebelow:
Tab. 71. Available couplers (11–38 GHz)

Waveguide
Frequency band Coupler type Coupling loss Coupler ANV P/N
(3 ports)
3 dB 3 dB / 3 dB 3CC 14140 AA––

11 GHz WR 75
10 dB 1 dB / 10 dB 3CC 14140 AB––
3 dB 3 dB / 3 dB 3CC 13472 AA––

13, 15 GHz WR 62
10 dB 1 dB / 10 dB 3CC 13472 AB––
3 dB 3 dB / 3 dB 3CC 13473 AA––

18, 23, 25 GHz WR 42
10 dB 1 dB / 10 dB 3CC 13473 AB––
3 dB 3 dB / 3 dB 3CC 13474 AA––

28, 32, 38 GHz WR 28
10 dB 1 dB / 10 dB 3CC 13474 AB––
Coupler antenna
360 mm
(14.17 in)
535 mm
(21.83 in)
620 mm COUPLER VIEW
(24.41 in)
Fig. 69. Coupler (11–38 GHz)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 151 / 332
332
2–6.4.3 1+1 HSB configuration with hybrid coupler and not integrated antenna (7–8 GHz)
(a) (b)

flange to antenna

(back)

(c2)
flanges for
flex twist
cables
NOT INTEGRATED
ANTENNA
POLE MOUNTING
(c1) (P/N REF.[59]
Tab. 72. Available couplers and related items (7–8 GHz)

position in
ANV P/N Denomination Quantity
figure above
3DB 05365 AA–– 3DB COUPLER 7.1–7.7 GHz
(a) 3DB 05366 AA–– 3DB COUPLER 7.7–8.5 GHz 1 (choice)
3DB 06767 AA–– 10DB COUPLER 7.1–8.5 GHz
(b) 3DB 10006 AA–– PDR84 Connection KIT 1
(c1) & (c2) 1AF 03114 AA–– PDR/84/UDR84 ADAPTER 2
Fig. 70. Coupler and related items (7–8 GHz)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 152 / 332
332
2–6.4.4 Configuration with separated antenna
The ODU is fixed on a dedicated pole mounting for separated antenna. A nose adapter (different P/Ns
depending on the waveguide dimension, see Tab. 73. below) is used to connect the ODU and the flextwist.
7–8 GHz 11 ... 38 GHz
NOSE (under)
ADAPTER
NOT INTEGRATED
ANTENNA
POLE MOUNTING
(P/N REF.[59]
Fig. 71. Nose adapters for ODU with separated antenna
Tab. 73. Nose adapters for ODU with separated antenna

ANV P/N Denomination
1AF 03114 AA–– 7–8 GHz: PDR/84/UDR84 ADAPTER
3DB 02223 AA–– 11 GHz: WR90 ADAPTER KIT (NOT INT ANTENNA)
1AB 14609 0003 13–15 GHz: WR62 NOSE ADAPTER (NOT INT ANTENNA)
1AB 14609 0002 18–23–25 GHz NOSE ADAPTER (NOT INT ANTENNA)
3DB 02082 AA–– 28–32–38 GHz NOSE ADAPTER (NOT INT ANTENNA)
Concerning the interface between the ODU output flange and the suggested antenna flange, the following
Tab. 74. details for each product the standard wave guide to be used and the suggested flange for the
external antenna.
Please note that the use of 600 mm flex twist is not suggested for antennas bigger than 3ft (90 cm
diameter), due to mechanical reasons. The suggested way to make the RF connection is to use the
elliptical wave guide fitted with flanged connectors.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 153 / 332
332
Tab. 74. ODU Output flanges with external antenna


Equipment ODU Suggested
and Range Output FLEXTWIST L=600 mm Antenna
(GHz) Flange Flange
A C.E.I. E.I.A. B P/N C D
9470 AWY
UDR84 R84 WR112 PDR84 1AF 03114 AA–– UDR84 PDR84
7–8
9411 AWY
UBR100 R100 WR90 PBR100 3DB 00686 AA–– UBR100 PBR100
10.7 – 11.7
9413 AWY
UBR140 R140 WR62 PBR140 3CC 05751 AC–– UBR120 PBR120
12.7 – 13.3
9415 AWY
UBR140 R140 WR62 PBR140 3CC 05750 AC–– UBR140 PBR140
14.2 – 15.4
9418 AWY
UBR220 R220 WR42 PBR220 UBR220 PBR220
17.7 – 19.7
9423 AWY
21.2 – 23.6
3CC 05749 AC––
9424 AWY
24.2 – 25.3
9425 AWY
24.5 – 26.5
9428 AWY
27.3 – 31.3
9431 AWY
31.0 – 31.3
3DB 00682 AA––
9432 AWY
31.8 – 33.4
9438 AWY
37.0 – 40.0
N.B. If the flex–twist is not provided by Alcatel, the user must carefully choose the type of the
connection guide in order to limit as much as possible galvanic couples between
antenna/flex–twist and flex–twist/ODU contact surfaces that can induce rust. For this purpose
please note that the surfaces are:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– chromium–plated at ODU’s output flange side

– tin–plated at flex–twist’s flange side
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 154 / 332
332
2–6.5 Integrated antenna part list
Tab. 75. Part list of available integrated antennas

Frequency
∅ ANV P/N Commercial Denomination
(GHz)
7 2FT 3DB 00677 AA–– 7GHZ 2FT SP INTEGRATED ANTENNA
3FT 1AF 11293 AA–– INT. ANT. COMPACT LINE 3FT 7.1/8.5GHZ SP
7&8
1FT 1AF 01893 AA–– 13GHZ 1FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA ANDREW
1AF 10018 AA–– 13GHZ 2FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA RFS

2FT
13 1AF 01894 AA–– 13GHZ 2FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA ANDREW
1AF 10018 KA–– 15GHZ 1FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA RFS

1FT
1AF 01891 AA–– 15GHZ 1FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA ANDREW
1AF 10018 AB–– 15GHZ 2FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA RFS

15 2FT
1AF 10018 LA–– 18GHZ 1FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA RFS

1FT
1AF 10018 AC–– 18GHZ 2FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA RFS

18 2FT
3FT 1AF 11290 AA–– INT. ANT. COMPACT LINE 3FT 17.7/19,7GHZ SP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 155 / 332
332
Frequency
(GHz)
∅ ANV P/N Commercial Denomination
1AF 10018 AD–– 23GHZ 1FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA RFS

1FT

1AF 10018 AE–– 23GHZ 2FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA RFS

23 2FT
1AF 10018 AF–– 25GHZ 1FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA RFS

1FT
1AF 10018 AH–– 25GHZ 2FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA RFS

25 2FT
1FT 3DB 00658 AA–– 28GHZ 1FT SP INTEGRATED ANTENNA

28

32
1AF 10018 AJ–– 38GHZ 1FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA RFS

1FT
38
1AF 10018 AG–– 38GHZ 2FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA RFS
2FT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 156 / 332
332
2–6.6 Part list of ODU accessories and installation materials
Tab. 76. Part list of ODU accessories and installation materials

Ref.[x] is used in other parts of this handbook to refer to the item
Name Max
Ref. ANV P/N
and notes Q.ty
EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES FOR ODU
SOLAR SHIELD
Depicted in Fig. 73. on page 160 and Fig. 74. on page 161
3CC 13476 AA–– 1
N.B. Note: The ODU P/Ns listed in the previous tables include
the solar shield.
LIGHT SERVICE KIT CABLE
This item includes a cable used to connect the ODU to a digital
[57] 3CC 13477 AA–– 1
multimeter so as to have a dc voltage proportional to the RF Rx
level. See para.2–7.3 on page 165 for details.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS FOR ODU
INTEGRATED ANTENNA POLE MOUNTING
[58] 3CC 10752 AA–– For usage examples, see Fig. 67. , Fig. 68. , Fig. 69. on pages 1
149–150–151
NON INTEGRATED ANTENNA POLE MOUNTING
[59] 1AB 12851 0002 1
For usage examples, see Fig. 70. and Fig. 71. on pages 152–153
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 157 / 332
332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
332
3DB 06687 BA AA
158 / 332
2–7 ODU AND RELATED OPTIONAL TOOLS OPERATIVE INFORMATION
This chapter gives operative information, for installation, commissioning and maintenance purposes
regarding:
– ODU, herebelow
– 7–8 GHz ODU additional information on page 162

– Light service kit cable on page 165
2–7.1 ODU operative information

2–7.1.1 General, views and access points
Refer to:
– para. 1–1.1.3 on page 32 for a brief functional description of ODU.
– chapter 2–6 on page 137 for composition and P/Ns
Fig. 73. (for 11–38 GHz) and Fig. 74. (for 7–8 GHz) on pages 160–161 show ODU views and access
points.
The external interfaces are listed in Tab. 77. below, with the corresponding connector.
Tab. 77. ODU external interfaces

Ref. in
Further
Fig. 73. Interface Connector
information
and Fig. 74.
Tab. 78.
(1) RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler waveguide
herebelow
(2) Connector for IDU/ODU cable male N 50 ohm
12–pin LEMO
para.2–7.3
(3) Connector for Light service kit cable (Fig. 72.
on page 165
on page 160)
Tab. 78. RF interface

FREQUENCY GHz ⇒ 7–8 and 11 13–15 18–25 28–38
Waveguide type ⇒ WR90 WR62 WR42 WR28
N.B. for further information, refer to para.2–6.4 on page 148
N.B. For detailed operative information regarding:
– equipment installation and commissioning, please refer to:

• 9400AWY Installation Handbook REF.[B] on page 314
• 9400AWY Line–up Guide REF.[C] on page 314
– equipment maintenance, please refer to section 3 – MAINTENANCE on page 167 of this

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
handbook.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 159 / 332
332
7 6

8 5

12 11
1 9 10 4
2 3
KEY
Fig. 72. ODU LEMO connector pinout
(4)
TRANSCEIVER
+
BRANCHING
SOLAR SHIELD
(1)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(3) (A)
(2)
(A) Levers (4) to fix/unfix ODU assembly to antenna or coupler
(1) RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler
(2) Connector for IDU/ODU cable
(3) Connector for Light service kit cable
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
(4) ODU identification label (see Fig. 137. on page 307)
Fig. 73. ODU views (11–38 GHz)
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 160 / 332
332
BRANCHING
(4)
TRANSCEIVER
SOLAR SHIELD
(B) (A)
(1)
(B)
(A)
(A)
(B)
(2)
(3)
(A) (B)
(A) 4 levers to fix/unfix branching assembly (diplexer) to transceiver
(B) 4 levers to fix/unfix branching assembly (diplexer) to antenna or coupler
(1) RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler
(2) Connector for IDU/ODU cable
(3) Connector for Light service kit cable
(4) TRANSCEIVER identification label (see Fig. 137. on page 307)
Fig. 74. ODU views (7–8 GHz)
2–7.1.2 ODU hardware settings
No hardware settings are envisaged on 11–38 GHz ODUs, while on 7–8 GHz ODUs a setting allows to
choose the half–band (LOW or HIGH) for TX (see para.2–7.2 on page 162 for details).
2–7.1.3 ODU identification

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Through the Solar Shield window are visible the ODU or TRANSCEIVER identification label and the
Vertical or Horizontal polarization mounting. In case of 7–8 GHz ODU, the BRANCHING identification label
(Fig. 77. on page 164) can be viewed only separating the TRANSCEIVER from the BRANCHING.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 161 / 332
332
2–7.2 7–8 GHz ODU additional operative information
2–7.2.1 7–8 GHz ODU composition

The 9400AWY in 7 and 8 GHz bands (9470AWY) is provided with a new ODU mechanical arrangement
in order to minimize the parts number required.
As shown in Fig. 75. below, the 9470AWY ODU assembly is composed, unlike the existing ones in the
other frequency bands, by two boxes, one for diplexer system (BRANCHING) and the other for the all other
active functions (TRANSCEIVER) connected together to form the ODU.
An O–RING present in the TRANSCEIVER box guarantees the ODU assembly pressurization.
BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER
O–RING
Fig. 75. 7–8 GHz ODU composition
The TRANSCEIVER box is very similar to the existing ones 9400AWY ODU used in the other frequency
bands, but without the diplexer system.
The BRANCHING box provides the interface between the pole mounting/antenna and the
TRANSCEIVER.
The favorite solution foresees the possibility to change in field a spare part TRANSCEIVER without
disconnecting the BRANCHING box from the pole mounting/antenna. The TRANSCEIVER and
BRANCHING boxes fixing and unfixing are obtained through the four levers (A) shown in Fig. 74. on page
161.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 162 / 332
332
2–7.2.2 7–8 GHz ODU’s TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling
Fig. 76. below shows the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces:
– (A) BRANCHING box label informative content

described in Fig. 77. on page 164
– (B) (HIGH FREQ) and (C) (LOW FREQ) RF interfaces on BRANCHING box
– (D) (TX) and (E) (RX) RF interfaces on TRANSCEIVER box

The TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes can be coupled in two alternative ways (1800–rotated with
respect to each other):
– BRANCHING box’s (B) (HIGH FREQ) coupled to TRANSCEIVER box’s (D) (TX)
in this case the TX part of the transceiver uses the HIGH frequency range of the Shifter set by Craft
Terminal (see field D in Fig. 77. on page 164); obviously the RX part of the transceiver uses the
corresponding LOW frequency range;
– BRANCHING box’s (C) (LOW FREQ) coupled to TRANSCEIVER box’s (D) (TX)
in this case the TX part of the transceiver uses the LOW frequency range of the Shifter set by Craft
Terminal (see field D in Fig. 77. on page 164); obviously the RX part of the transceiver uses the
corresponding HIGH frequency range.
TRANSCEIVER BRANCHING
(D)
(A) (B)
(C)
(E)
Fig. 76. 7–8 GHz ODU’s TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 163 / 332
332
2–7.2.3 Label affixed inside the 7–8 GHz ODU BRANCHING box


A
B
C
154_B LOW 7442 7526

HIGH 7596 7680
160 LOW 7442.5 7512.5 D
HIGH 7602.5 7673.5
SYMBOL OR WRITING MEANING
A9400 Equipment Acronym & Alcatel Logo

ALCATEL
CE European Community logo

12345 (example) Notified body
! Not harmonized frequency logo
2002/96/EC WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic
Equipment) Logo (see para.1–2.10.3 on page 65)
PN/ICS 3DB 06775 AAAA 01 (example) ANV P/N + ICS
A ANV P/N + ICS bar code 128
Logistical Item 3DB 06775 AAXX (example) ANV P/N Customer
B ANV P/N Customer bar code 128
S/N CW 050609001 (example) Factory Serial number
C Factory Serial number bar code 128
– the field “Shifter MHz” indicates the possible
frequency bands that can be used with this
branching assembly.
The choice between different shifters is done by
Craft Terminal (refer to Operator’s Handbook for
details).
D (shown numbers as examples) For additional functional information, please
refer to para.4–1.2 on page 210.
– for each “Shifter MHz”, the TX “LOW” and

“HIGH” rows indicate the frequency range
assumed by transceiver TX section, according to
the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes
coupling described in para.2–7.2.2 on page 163
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 77. Label affixed inside the 7–8 GHz ODU BRANCHING box
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 164 / 332
332
2–7.3 Light service kit cable operative information
Fig. 78. herebelow shows this optional cable (P/N REF.[57] in Tab. 76. on page 157):
A B
F G
1 1
3
2
3
Black
4 4
5 5
A 6 6 B
7 7 D
8
9
8
9
C
10 10 Red
11 11
12 12
1
E
C D
6 7 7 6
12 12 11
11 5
5 8 8
4 1 4
9 1
10 9 10
3 2 3
2
View following F View following G
LEMO wire 6 = ground

Fig. 78. Light service kit cable
Connector usage:
– (A) LEMO connector, to be plugged into LEMO connector on ODU (see Fig. 73. on page 160 and
Fig. 74. on page 161)
– (B) LEMO connector, for ALCATEL internal use only.
– banana plugs (C) and (D) : output is a 0 to +3V dc voltage proportional to the radio Rx field. During
equipment line–up, through a multi–meter it is possible to easily point the antenna until the measured
voltage is the maximum, corresponding to the maximum radio Rx field. Actual Rx field value can be
measured by means of the Craft Terminal (see CT Operator’s Handbook).
For further information, please refer to the 9400AWY Line–up Guide REF.[C] on page 314
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– (E) RS232 connector, for ALCATEL internal use only.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 165 / 332
332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
332
3DB 06687 BA AA
166 / 332
SECTION 3: MAINTENANCE
It contains the whole logical and operative information for the equipment maintenance.
Chapter 3–1 – Maintenance Policy

169
It introduces the basic concepts for the equipment maintenance.
Chapter 3–2 – Set and use of EOW functions

It explains how to configure and use the Engineering Order–Wire functions of the 171
equipment.
Chapter 3–3 – Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts

It describes the instruments, accessories and the equipment spare parts that are 173
envisaged to carry out the routine and corrective maintenance of the equipment.
Chapter 3–4 – First Level Maintenance

181
It describes the First Level Maintenance (system state display) of the equipment.
Chapter 3–5 – Second Level Maintenance

185
It describes the preventive and corrective maintenance of the equipment.
In all chapters, possible references to DS1 and DS3 interfaces (that are not supported by the
SWP version this handbook issue refers to) are given just for general information purposes and
are subject to change.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 167 / 332
332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
332
3DB 06687 BA AA
168 / 332
3–1 MAINTENANCE POLICY
This chapter introduces the basic concepts for the equipment maintenance.
3–1.1 Classification of maintenance levels and operators
The maintenance procedures described in the following chapters are based on the following
considerations:
– The possibility of carrying out routine and corrective maintenance is based on the availability of:
• a suitable set of instruments and accessories
• a suitable set of spare parts
These matters are described in chapter 3–3 on page 173.
– Maintenance can be classified as:
• First Level Maintenance:
– ROUTINE (system state check)
• Second Level Maintenance:
– PREVENTIVE (periodic set of measurements and checks)

– CORRECTIVE (troubleshooting and repair)
First level maintenance consists of a set of simple operations by means of which a First Level
Maintenance Operator can acknowledge the state of the system and decide whether or not the
intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is required in order to bring back the assembly
to optimum operating conditions by troubleshooting and unit replacement, if necessary. In this
philosophy:
• First Level Maintenance Operator should not be authorized to change the equipment status;
he should be only authorized to display it or to make some simple tests through the Craft
Terminal, if expressly authorized by the Station Manager.
These actions are described in chapter 3–4 on page 181.
• Second Level Maintenance Operator is authorized to make all actions necessary to repair
the system; moreover he should only be authorized to carry out routine maintenance.
These actions are described in chapter 3–5 on page 185.
– The two–station layout typical of a radio link requires often that different operators can communicate
with each other to solve problems. The EOW functions of this equipment give a simple way for this
communication need.
This matter is described in chapter 3–2 on page 171.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 169 / 332
332
3–1.2 First Level Maintenance Personnel skill
First Level Maintenance Personnel must have received:

– an adequate technical background on telecommunications. Experience in first level maintenance

activities is a must;
– an adequate presentation on the equipment this handbook refers to;
– detailed instructions on “what to do” and/or “who must be contacted” in the case should he find the
equipment not in its normal conditions.
3–1.3 Second Level Maintenance Personnel skill
Second Level Maintenance Personnel must have received an adequate technical background on
telecommunications. Experience in maintenance activities is a must.
In particular, Second Level Maintenance Personnel must be familiar:
– with the equipment this handbook refers to
– and with the use of the Craft Terminal applications of the equipment this handbook refers to.
Without these prerequisites, reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in para.C.2.1
on page 313 is usually not enough to properly maintain equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 170 / 332
332
3–2 USE OF EOW FUNCTIONS
Please refer to chapter 3–1 on page 169 for an introduction to the basic concepts of equipment
maintenance.
This chapter explains how to configure and use the EOW (Engineering Order–Wire) function of the
equipment.
3–2.1 Setting information
The telephone handset (P/N REF.[51] in Tab. 22. on page 82) allows to carry out EOW in/out calls at IDU
side. It uses DTMF (tone) dialling.
a) Connection diagram
STATION A STATION B
ODU ODU
1 2 3 3 1 2
4
7
5
8
6
9
IDU IDU 6
9
4
7
5
8
0 # # 0
* *
OFF ON MAIN UNIT MAIN UNIT OFF ON
Telephone handset Telephone handset
N.B. each Telephone handset has its own phone number. Phone number can be in the 10 to
99 range. Telephone handsets must have different phone numbers.
Physical connection on IDU: connect Telephone handset RJ11 plug to TPH connector on the IDU
MAIN unit [ (12) in Fig. 39. on page 103 ].
b) Telephone handset view
N.B. To safeguard against EMC problems, remember to clip the isolating ferrite core on the cable.
This is supplied with the handset or in the main IDU connector kit.
Caution: to operate, set the handset switch to “FV”.
Set switch to “FV”
ON/OFF switch
Isolating ferrite core
RJ 11 connector
c) Telephone handset keyboard
KEY MEANING
*
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Force unlocking of the line
# Engage line
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 171 / 332
332
d) Telephone handset phone number display/setting
Display/setting is done through the Craft Terminal with the following menus:
• display: Configuration ⇒ System Settings ⇒ Overhead ⇒ Phone Parameter
• setting: Configuration ⇒ System Settings ⇒ Overhead ⇒ Phone Parameter ⇒ ’phone number’

⇒ Apply

Refer to CT Operator’s Handbook for details.
e) Ways of Calling : two different ways of calling are possible:

• SELECTIVE: a connection between two users (dial a number: 10 to 99)
• OMNIBUS: a unidirectional connection with all the users (dial digits 00)
f) LEDs indication:
• EOW (GREEN): free line
• EOW (YELLOW): busy line
• Flashing YELLOW: received and recognized call
N.B. position of green/yellow LED on IDU MAIN unit:
EOW
GREEN
GREEN RED RED
YELLOW
GREEN RED RED YELLOW
3–2.2 Call Set–up/End by Telephone handset connected to the IDU Main unit
a) To Call from Handset:
1) Check that line is free (EOW–free green LED on the MAIN unit is on)
2) Set Handset ON/OFF switch to “ON”
3) On keypad, press # to engage line
4) Check that EOW–busy yellow LED on the MAIN unit is on
5) On keypad, dial two–digit number of station to be called (or 00 for omnibus call)
6) Ring tone is audible in the handset, wait for answer
b) To Answer Call at Handset:
1) EOW–busy yellow LED on the MAIN unit flashes and audible tone is present
2) If not connected, connect handset to IDU, set ON/OFF switch to “ON”, press # on keypad, speak
c) To End Call from Handset:
1) On keypad, press *
2) Move handset ON/OFF switch to “OFF”
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 172 / 332
332
3–3 MAINTENANCE TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS
3–3.1 Introduction
maintenance.
This chapter describes the instruments, accessories and the equipment spare parts that are envisaged
to carry out the routine and corrective maintenance of the equipment, and and is organized as follows:
– Instruments and accessories herebelow, including:

• Software tools herebelow
• Maintenance, Installation and Station Kit Tools on page 174
– Set of spare parts on page 177, including:

• Types of Spare Parts on page 177
• Number of Spare Parts on page 179
• General rules on spare parts management on page 179
• Spare Flash Card management on page 180
3–3.2 Instruments and accessories
3–3.2.1 Software tools
There is a local Craft Terminal (PC) which permits to display all the alarms and which manages the
Equipment. Its implementation is described in the Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbook relevant to the
SWP used (see Tab. 99. on page 314).
When a TMN is implemented, an Operation System will display alarms and manage all the connected
Equipment of the network. Refer to the relevant handbooks.
With reference to Fig. 39. on page 103:
– connection with the PC is achieved through connector (14) available on the IDU MAIN unit;
– through connector (12) the same unit can be connected to an Operation System associated to the
Transmission Management Network in order to execute operations similar to those carried out by the
PC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 173 / 332
332
3–3.2.2 Maintenance, Installation and Station Kit Tools
For the P/Ns of these Kit Tools, please see REF.[52], [53] and [54] in Tab. 22. on page 82.

a) The Installation Kit Tool includes various types of common usage fixed spanners, standard and

crosshead screwdrivers, polygon spanners, polygon tube spanners, special fixed spanners, a torque
wrench, etc.
b) The Maintenance Kit Tool is practically equal to the Station Kit Tool, with the addition of the
Antistatic wrist–band.
c) The Station Kit Tool is a bag additionally containing various types of cables and cable adapters.
The detailed item list of these Kit Tools is given in the documents enclosed to this handbook:
• Installation Kit Tool part list, REF.[A] in Tab. 105. on page 331
• Maintenance Kit Tool part list, REF.[B] in Tab. 105. on page 331
• Station Kit Tool part list, REF.[C] in Tab. 105. on page 331
N.B. These Kit Tools are standardized kits for the use with all ALCATEL WTD equipment types: they
contain also items that are not used in 9400AWY environment (they are not described in this
manual).
Some special items are listed in Tab. 79. below, which gives also reference to figures where they are
depicted.
Tab. 79. Special items of the Kit Tools

SPECIAL ITEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENTS OF ANTISTATIC WRIST–BAND
Antistatic wrist–band
Antistatic applications cord
para.B.5 on page 305
Plug with crocodile pliers
Female button termination
SPECIAL TOOLS AND ITEMS FOR ODU
Lever for ODU mounting/dismounting Fig. 79. on page 175
SPECIAL CABLES
Cord for use with SIBDL Fig. 80. on page 176
SPECIAL EXTRACTORS
Unhook tool for 1.0/2.3 coax Fig. 81. on page 176
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 174 / 332
332
When, in ODU configurations 1+1 with coupler, you must dismount and then mount one of the
two ODUs for maintenance purposes, the following operations:
UNBLOCK BEFORE DISMOUNT

One at a time, unblock the four ODU blocking levers (A) pushing up the restraint spring
(B) and, contemporarily, turning down the lever (C).
BLOCK AFTER MOUNT
Block the four ODU blocking levers (A)
may produce vibrations that could cause synch loss or other electrical disturbances to the other
ODU still working.
A B
Using the special lever:
allows to do the same unblock/block operations without producing vibrations.

The following photographs should clarify the correct lever handling and usage.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 79. Lever for ODU mounting/dismounting
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 175 / 332
332
N.B. For the use of this cord to carry out the NE software download via SIBDL, please refer to the
dedicated Section (if the application is made available to Customers) of the:
– 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Line Up Guide (REF.[C] on page 314)
Fig. 80. Cord for use with SIBDL
Fig. 81. Special extractor to remove the coaxial cables 1.0/2.3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 176 / 332
332
3–3.3 Set of spare parts
3–3.3.1 Types of Spare Parts

N.B. The unit replacement procedures described in paragraph Corrective Maintenance of chapter
Second Level Maintenance in this section presume that the units present in the spare–part
stock correspond exactly to the plug–in replaceable units that are equipped in the system (i.e.
with the same Part Number).
3–3.3.1.1 ODU Spare Parts
As spare part must be provided:
– for 11–38 GHz: the complete ODU. For the P/Ns refer to para. 2–6.3.2 on page 143.
– for 7–8 GHz: the TRANSCEIVER assembly. For the P/Ns refer to:
• Tab. 57. on page 141 (7 GHz)
• Tab. 59. on page 142 (8 GHz)
3–3.3.1.2 IDU Spare Parts
The set of spare parts for the IDU is inclusive of a minimum number of spares for each type of replaceable
units. The suggested spare parts should be at least those containing electronic parts; in general the spare
part types are:
– IDU Main unit, for both (1+0) and (1+1) systems
– IDU Extension unit, for (1+1) systems only
– Flash card, for both (1+0) and (1+1) systems

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 177 / 332
332
a) Spare parts for IDU Main and Extension units
As general policy, in case of unit replacement need, the spare parts for IDU Main and Extension units
will be as in the following Tab. 80. :

Tab. 80. Spare parts for IDU Main and Extension units
Spare part
Power
Market ANV P/N
supply Type Name
(N.B.)
3DB 06602 AB––
IDU Main unit basic 1+0 IDU 8E1 48/60V PSU
REF.[1]
48/60 V
3DB 06613 AB––
IDU Extension unit basic EXT IDU 8E1 48/60V PSU
REF.[5]
3DB 06616 AB––
IDU Main unit basic 1+0 IDU 8E1 24V PSU
REF.[8]
ETSI 24 V
3DB 06623 AB––
IDU Extension unit basic EXT IDU 8E1 24V PSU
REF.[12]
3DB 06608 AA––
8–16 E1 plug–in 16E1 UPGRADE KIT
REF.[46]
ALL
3DB 06609 AA––
E3 plug–in E3 UPGRADE KIT
REF.[47]
3DB 06790 AA––
IDU Main unit basic 1+0 IDU 8DS1 48/60V PSU
REF.[15]
48/60 V
3DB 06794 AA––
IDU Extension unit basic EXT IDU 8DS1 48/60V PSU
REF.[19]
3DB 06797 AA––
IDU Main unit basic 1+0 IDU 8DS1 24V PSU
REF.[22]
ANSI 24 V
3DB 06802 AA––
IDU Extension unit basic EXT IDU 8DS1 24V PSU
REF.[26]
3DB 10042 AA––
8–16 DS1 plug–in 16DS1 UPGRADE KIT
REF.[49]
ALL
3DB 10043 AA––
DS3 plug–in DS3 UPGRADE KIT
REF.[50]
ETSI & 3DB 06610 AA––
ALL Data plug–in 10/100BT UPGRADE KIT
ANSI REF.[48]
(N.B.) REF[x] is reference to column Ref. in Tab. 22. on page 82.
When an IDU Main or Extension faulty unit with plug–in must be replaced, the spare part box has
first to be opened, then the plug–in must be installed, at last box must be closed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 178 / 332
332
b) Spare parts for Flash Card
There are six possible types of Flash Cards. For details refer to:
• point [5] on page 26 (possible combinations of interface types and numbers that can be
supported by each of the six types of flash cards)
• sub–list FLASH CARD in Tab. 22. on page 82 (P/Ns of Flash Cards)
• para.2–4.5 on page 124 (operative information for Flash Cards)
• para.4–2.3.2.2 on page 230 (Flash Card content).
For the spare–part–stock, Customer should provision at least one Flash Card for each type (P/N) of
Flash Card equipped in systems in service. For cost saving, as alternative to provision the various
types, the FULL FLEXIBLE flash card type could be provisioned instead.
Read important information regarding the spare Flash Card management in para.3–3.3.4
on page 180.
3–3.3.2 Number of spare parts
The overall number of spares depends on Customer requirements, and should be based on the average
amount of transmission circuits available to be accounted for not only during MTBF (Mean Time Between
Failures) but also during MTTR (Mean Time To Repair); the latter depending on the amount of spare parts
available.
3–3.3.3 General rules on spare parts management
Before storing the spare units make sure that they are working by inserting them in an operating
equipment.
It is suggested to periodically check those spare units that have not been utilized for over a year.
If the spare parts and the equipment are stored in the same environment, make sure that the spare parts
are placed in cabinets to safeguard them from dust and damp.
Moreover, they should also be well grounded to avoid electrostatic discharges.
If the spare parts are stored in another room, or have to be moved from another place, building or site,
make sure that the following is observed:
– the spare parts must be wrapped in anti–static and padded envelopes;
– the spare parts must not touch wet surfaces or chemical agents that might damage them (e.g. gas);
– if during transportation the temperature is lower than that of the room where they had been kept,
make sure that before using them they pass a certain period in a climatic chamber to prevent thermal
shocks and/or the possibility of steaming up.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 179 / 332
332
3–3.3.4 Spare Flash Card management
With reference to the Flash Card content description given in para.4–2.3.2.2 on page 230, a spare Flash
Card:

a) supplied as “specific” spare part for a certain NE should contain the same SW information (SW
COMMIT VERSION, MIB and NE network routing data) stored in the Flash Card present in the NE
delivered to Customer from Alcatel factory. In this case, such a “specific” spare Flash Card can be
used at any time only to replace that existing in that “specific” NE, provided that no change is made
on the NE SW information by Craft Terminal or by TMN system.
b) supplied as “generic” spare part, contains default SW information, stored by Alcatel factory for testing
purposes before delivery to Customer. In this case you cannot insert it “as it is” in any NE, without
making specific operations by Craft Terminal, which are described in the Operator’s Handbook. The
same warning applies also for a Flash Cards supplied as “specific” spare part for a certain NE [see
point a ) above], whenever the NE SW information has been changed by Craft Terminal or by TMN
system after the system installation phase.
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid complete traffic loss)

Do not insert in the system a Flash Card the content of which you do not well know!
You must be aware that if a Flash Card with SW information different from that running in the system
is inserted “as it is”, the software download will be automatically carried out from the Flash Card
toward the System’s PQ/ECRC and Supervisory Units, thus causing a complete system crash.
Specific instructions for the Flash Card content management and its correct insertion in the system
could be given in the following handbooks:
• Operator’s Handbook (REF.[D] on page 314), chapter Flash Card upgrade.
• Line–up guide (REF.[C] on page 314), chapter SW download through SIBDL application (if
present).
SUGGESTION
Use one IDU Main unit of the spare–part–stock as an off–line service station (non connected to the
network) to manage the content of Flash Cards, before using them as spare parts.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 180 / 332
332
3–4 FIRST LEVEL MAINTENANCE
maintenance.
This chapter describes the First Level Maintenance of the equipment and is organized as follows:
– System state display by visual indications below
– Craft Terminal interface common used commands on page 183
3–4.2 System state display by visual indications
3–4.2.1 LED test
To be sure to have correct indications, carry out the LED test of IDU MAIN unit, pushing pushbutton (9)
in Fig. 83. on page 182: while pushed, all leds of the MAIN unit should be turned on.
In 1+1 system, perform the same test also on the IDU Extension Unit, pushing pushbutton (6) in
Fig. 82. below: while pushed, all leds of EXTENSION unit should be turned on.
3–4.2.2 Alarm LEDs on the IDU MAIN unit
All the alarms detected on the units are collected and processed by the IDU MAIN unit which gives
centralized optical indications by means of LEDs on its front coverplate, as shown in Fig. 83. on page 182.
3–4.2.3 Alarm LEDs on the Extension unit
(2) ON/OFF switch
ON
(6) LED test
GREEN
LED Normal status
ON (green) ON (if the ON/OFF switch is on)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 82. LEDs and pushbutton on IDU Extension unit for maintenance purposes
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 181 / 332
332
ON RDI MIN

GREEN RED RED
RED RED YELLOW
(2) ON/OFF switch ATTD

LDI MAJ
(14) F interface for

(8) Alarm attending (9) LED test (10) Reset Craft Terminal
LED on Meaning Action
If off (and if the ON/OFF switch is on) there is a problem in the station
Green LED ON A
battery or in the MAIN unit
Red LED LDI There is a failure in the equipment A
Red LED RDI There is a failure in the remote station A
Detection of an URGENT alarm: it means that there is at least one

Red LED MAJ A
alarm (internal and/or external) for which traffic is affected.
Detection of a NOT URGENT alarm: it means that there is at least one

alarm (internal and/or external) for which traffic is not affected (e.g.
Red LED MIN B
something is wrong, but the traffic is recovered by an automatic
protection switch).
Alarm condition ATTENDED: it means that an Operator (by pushbutton

Yellow LED ATTD (8) or by Craft Terminal) has attended the alarm (for details, see para. B
3–5.5.2.2 on page 190).
ACTION:
A The immediate intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is required.
B The immediate intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is not required
Fig. 83. LEDs and pushbutton on IDU MAIN unit for maintenance purposes
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 182 / 332
332
3–4.3 Craft Terminal interface commonly used commands
This paragraph explains how to login the CT application and sums up the common used commands for
system status display and checks. For screen details, please refer to the CT Operator’s Handbook.
N.B. This operation can be done by the First Level Maintenance Operator only if expressly
authorized by the Station Manager.
a ) Craft Terminal (CT) connection and start–up

1) connect Craft Terminal (CT) to Equipment
plug the suitable cable to PC and to ECT connector (14) on the IDU MAIN unit (see Fig. 83. on
page 182) following cautions stated in point e ) on page 102.
2) CT start
– power on CT and wait for PC start–up
– Start ⇒ 1320CT–K v.x.x.x ; notes:
• if choice 1320CT–K v.x.x.x is not available, PC is not configured as Craft Terminal:
Software Package loading is necessary
• x.x.x depends on Software Package loaded
after a while, the “Network Element Synthesis” screen will appear, showing all Network
Elements that can be selected. After this Start operation, all NEs appear with symbol “?”
(it means that they are not supervised)
b ) Start supervision on a selected Network Element (NE)

From screen “Network Element Synthesis” [see point a ) – 2 ) above] :
1) select interested Network Element (NE) clicking the left mouse button on it once
2) while NE is selected, with the right mouse button choose Start Supervision, and with the left
mouse button execute it (click once)
wait until the symbol “?” becomes colored “•” (it means “NE in supervised state”)
c ) Alarm Surveillance
From screen “Network Element Synthesis” with NE in supervised state [see point b ) – 2 ) above] :
1) select interested Network Element (NE) clicking the left mouse button on it once
2) while NE is selected, with the right mouse button choose Show NE alarms, and with the left
mouse button execute it (click once)
(note: if Show NE alarms does not appear, wait a few seconds, then try again)
after a while, alarm screen will appear showing alarms. At the end close all the alarm screens.
d ) Network Element login

From screen “Network Element Synthesis” with NE in supervised state [see point b ) – 2 ) above] :
1) select interested Network Element (NE) clicking the left mouse button on it once.
2) while NE selected, with right mouse button choose NE login , and with left mouse button
execute it (click once)
(if NE login does not appear, wait some seconds, then try again).
The login screen appears. Type:
– in “Login” field: as communicated by the Station Manager
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– in “Password” field: as communicated by the Station Manager

Then click OK with left mouse button
3) if the login is accepted, the USM screen appears. The following checks are now possible.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 183 / 332
332
e ) Radio Frequency check
From USM screen of the NE [see point d ) – 3 ) on page 183] :
1) menu: Radio ⇒ Frequency

after a while, Frequency screen will appear showing Transmitted and Received frequencies.

At the end close the Frequency screen.
f ) Transmitted and Received power levels

1) menu: Radio ⇒ Power Measurement ⇒ Start

after a while, Graphic Power Measurement screen will appear
2) on Measure screen, click with left mouse button on Show Details to see detailed power
measures. At the end close all measure screens.
g ) Performance Monitoring
1) menu: Performance
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 184 / 332
332
3–5 SECOND LEVEL MAINTENANCE
maintenance.
Second level maintenance consists of a set of operations which maintain or bring back the assembly to
optimum operating conditions in a very short time, with the aim of obtaining maximum operational
availability.
Second level maintenance is classified as:
– ROUTINE or PREVENTIVE (periodic set of measurements and checks, independently of troubles)

– CORRECTIVE (troubleshooting and repair, in case of troubles)
This chapter describes the routine and corrective maintenance operations and is organized as follows:
– Warnings on page 186, including:

• EMC norms
• Safety rules
• Cautions to avoid equipment damage
– Routine (preventive) Maintenance on page 187, including:

• Routine (preventive) Maintenance every year on page 187
– Consequences of unit extraction in the IDU on page 188
– Corrective Maintenance on page 189, including:

• General flow–chart on page 189
• Alarm acknowledgment and attending on page 190
• Trouble–Shooting starting with visual indications on page 191
• Trouble–Shooting via Craft Terminal on page 193
• IDU Unit replacement on page 195
• ODU replacement on page 204
– Faulty unit repair and Repair Form on page 205
The handbook parts that should be read before starting this chapter are:
– chapter 1–1 on page 21 System description

– chapter 2–4 on page 101 IDU operative information
– chapter 2–7 on page 159 ODU operative information
– chapter 3–1 on page 169 Maintenance Policy
– chapter 3–3 on page 173 Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts
– chapter 3–4 on page 181 First Level Maintenance
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 185 / 332
332
3–5.2 Warnings
3–5.2.1 EMC norms

ATTENTION EMC NORMS
WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA.
B.4.3 ON PAGE 304
3–5.2.2 Safety rules
The Safety Rules stated in para.B.3 on page 298 describe the operations and/or precautions to observe
to safeguard operating personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety.
Please read them carefully before starting each action on the equipment.
SAFETY RULES
General
Carefully observe the front–panel warning labels prior to working on optical

connections while the equipment is in–service.
Should it be necessary to cut off power during the maintenance phase, proceed
to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream
(rack or station distribution frame)
Electrical safety
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by

–48 V dc.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low–voltage,

low–impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns
and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before
working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input
terminals.
3–5.2.3 Cautions to avoid equipment damage
Read carefully para.2–4.1 on page 102.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 186 / 332
332
3–5.3 Routine (preventive) Maintenance
Routine maintenance is a periodic set of measurements and checks. This maintenance discovers those
devices whose function has deteriorated with time and therefore need adjustment or replacement.
Typically, digital equipment requires no routine maintenance.

The equipment allows to assess the quality of the connection links or counting the errored events and
obtaining performance data.
The Performance Monitoring Application, described in para. 3–5.5.4.3 on page 193, allows this function.
3–5.3.1 Routine (preventive) Maintenance every year
It is suggested to carry out the following operations yearly:
[1] Mechanical checks

Check that:
• the units,
• the cables,
• the mounting fixtures
are inserted and connected correctly.
[2] Grounding check

Check that the racks, subracks, and modules are grounded (for 9400AWY shelves, see para.B.3.6
on page 302.
[3] Power cables check
SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by

–48 V dc.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low–voltage,

low–impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns
terminals.
Make these operations:
• Check that the power cable is perfectly safety grounded.
• Make sure that the subrack has been tightly fastened to the rack with screws, to guarantee
grounding (the rack is connected to the station ground).
[4] Operative checks
• Visual check:
– During the normal operation, check the led normal condition, as specified in para.3–4.2
on page 181.
• Checks by Craft Terminal

– Refer to the specific attachment of the Line–Up Guide (REF.[C] on page 314).
N.B. some suggested checks are indicated in para.3–4.3 on page 183.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 187 / 332
332
3–5.4 Consequences of unit extraction in the IDU
Generally, a unit can be extracted from the system for the following reasons:

– to replace it with a spare part during corrective maintenance

– to check a spare part taken from the spare part stock
– to restore the suspected faulty unit (after its successful replacement with a spare unit during
corrective maintenance) to verify that it is really faulty.
The extraction of a unit has always some consequences on system behavior and performance that the
Maintenance Operator must know in advance:
a) Consequences of the MAIN unit extraction
The time taken to extract the MAIN unit must be short and should be limited to the time strictly
necessary for operation and maintenance purposes; it causes:
• interruption of the traffic on channel 1
• in (1+1) configurations, all protections are lost
• the NE not to be supervised because the Equipment controller is installed in this unit.
Note for (1+1) configurations:
• before extracting the unit make sure that the traffic is transmitted over channel 0 (on the
Extension unit). Otherwise, force with the CT the traffic onto channel 0.
b) Consequences of the Extension unit extraction
The time taken to extract the Extension unit must be short and should be limited to the time strictly
necessary for operation and maintenance purposes; it causes:
• interruption of the traffic on channel 0
• all protections lost
Note:
• before extracting the unit make sure that the traffic is transmitted over channel 1 (on the MAIN
unit). Otherwise, force with the CT the traffic onto channel 1.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 188 / 332
332
3–5.5 Corrective Maintenance
3–5.5.1 General flow–chart
START
Alarm acknowledgment and attending

(para.3–5.5.2 page 190)
Trouble–Shooting starting with visual indications

(para.3–5.5.3 page 191)
Other measures
Trouble–Shooting starting via Craft Terminal

(para.3–5.5.4 page 193).
Identification of a unit to be replaced.
IDU unit replacement ODU replacement

(para.3–5.5.5 page 195). (para.3–5.5.6 page 204).
System check via Craft Terminal
Try again with N

Fault repaired?
another unit
Y
If possible, restore replaced unit in the system
and perform system check via Craft Terminal,
to verify that is really faulty
Possible intermittent N
Fixed fault?
failure
Y
Restore spare part in the system and perform
system check via Craft Terminal
Send back faulty unit to Repair Centre together

with Repair Form filled in (para.3–5.6 page 205)
END
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 84. Corrective Maintenance general flow–chart
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 189 / 332
332
3–5.5.2 Alarm acknowledgment and attending
3–5.5.2.1 Alarm acknowledgment

Refer to Fig. 84. on page 189, for the position of this step inside the corrective maintenance general

flow–chart.
The need for Operator intervention is notified:
– locally (on the front of the equipment or in the station):
• when one of the alarm LEDs MAJ – MIN on the MAIN unit front plate lights up.
– remotely (in a TMN maintenance center) when the OS acknowledges the presence of problems in
the station.
When the local Operator decides to manage the problem, he should carry out the alarm attending
operation (see para. 3–5.5.2.2 below). This operation has the scope of notifying locally in the station and
remotely to the TMN maintenance center that a local operator is attending the problem.
3–5.5.2.2 Alarm Attending
See Fig. 83. on page 182:
– the detected alarm condition can be stored through the Alarm attending push–button on the MAIN
unit.
This operation will turn OFF the LEDs MAJ / MIN and will light up the yellow LED ATTD on the MAIN
unit (Attended). The local Operator could also attend the alarm via the craft terminal.
– a possible new alarm condition (following the Attending) will turn on the LEDs MAJ / MIN.
– when the fault has been repaired, the yellow LED (if the alarm had been attended) or the red ones
(if the alarm had not been attended and no further alarms have occurred in the mean time) will turn
off.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 190 / 332
332
3–5.5.3 Troubleshooting starting with visual indications
flow–chart.
Some problems may be localized through the LEDs indicated in para. 3–4.2 on page 181.
In any case, the inspection through the Craft Terminal is recommended before any unit replacement.
Flow–chart of Fig. 85. indicates LEDs on the MAIN unit that should be considered first.
START
N MAJOR, MINOR,
END LDI or RDI LED
on the MAIN unit
is “ON”
Y
Try login NE by Craft Terminal
N Y
Login successful ?
Carry out procedure in Carry out procedure in

para.3–5.5.3.1 page 192 para.3–5.5.4 page 193
Fig. 85. Troubleshooting starting with visual indications

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 191 / 332
332
3–5.5.3.1 Problems with the Craft Terminal
Whenever the login with the Craft Terminal does not work, proceed with the following checks:

– Restart the Craft Terminal (logout and switch off/on).

– With the Craft Terminal connected to the equipment F–interface, open the ’Alcatel Lower Layer
Manager’ screen (by clicking with the mouse pointer on the Alcatel symbol in the MS–Windows
menu bar). The fields to be verified in this screen are:
Port Physical OSI or

Logical
COM1 ON ON
– Verify that the CT port is effectively that connected by cable to equipment’s F interface
– If ’Physical’ is OFF, the problem can be due to:

• CT physical port faulty
• MAIN unit F–interface port faulty
• the cable
If possible, verify the correct working of the Craft Terminal and of the CT–F interface cable using them
with another Alcatel equipment. If the problem still persists, solve the problem.
Otherwise, proceed with the MAIN unit replacement, or perform steps indicated in para.3–5.5.3.2 on
page 192.
– If ’OSI/Logical’ is OFF, the problem can be due to:

• FLASH CARD missing on MAIN unit (verify) or FLASH CARD/MAIN faulty
Proceed with the MAIN unit replacement, or perform steps indicated in para.3–5.5.3.2 on page 192.
3–5.5.3.2 MAIN unit or FLASH CARD replacement
If the Craft Terminal application does not respond (login unsuccessful):
1) push the RESET button on the MAIN unit and wait 10 minutes;
2) if, after 10 minutes, the Craft Terminal application responds, open the ”Alarm status” procedure
and proceed investigating the system state;
3) if, after 10 minutes, the Craft Terminal application does not respond, replace the MAIN unit, as
described in para.3–5.5.5.1 on page 196;
4) if the problem still persists after the MAIN unit has been replaced, the failure or content
corruption of the FLASH CARD must be suspected (a very extraordinary event); proceed with
its replacement, as indicated in para.3–5.5.5.3 on page 201.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 192 / 332
332
3–5.5.4 Troubleshooting via Craft Terminal
flow–chart.
The ECT/RECT application includes several types of functions for system maintenance (used in line–up
operations, too), as depicted in the following table:
FUNCTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Alarm surveillance para.3–5.5.4.1 on page 193
Loopbacks para. 3–5.5.4.2 on page 193
Operator’s Controls of the protection switches para. 3–5.5.4.3 on page 193
Tx mute functions para. 3–5.5.4.4 on page 194
Performance Monitoring para. 3–5.5.4.5 on page 194
Event Log para. 3–5.5.4.6 on page 194
3–5.5.4.1 Alarm surveillance
The Alarm surveillance available with the CT allow the Operator to examine the alarms currently present in
the equipment or in the link or in the PDH network.
The troubleshooting operating instructions and details of the alarms for each card and relevant
indications are included in the section Maintenance of the CT OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK.
The operating instructions make it possible to identify the faulty unit.
Having located the suspected faulty unit, replace it with a spare one (refer to para. 3–5.5.5 on page 195).
3–5.5.4.2 Loopbacks
The loopbacks (settable by CT) give the possibility to perform some functional tests, thus making the fault
location and maintenance tests faster and easier. The loopbacks are explained in para. 4–2.6 on page 253.
To implement the loopbacks, refer to the CT OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK.
3–5.5.4.3 Operator’s Controls of the protection switches
In certain troubleshooting conditions, changing the state of the protection switches can be useful to fix
problems.
Details on protection switches and on relevant Operator’s Controls, for each system configuration, are
given in the suitable paragraphs of para. 4–2.4 on page 234.
In this chapter are described the logic actions that can be carried out. For further information and operative
procedures, refer to the CT OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 193 / 332
332
3–5.5.4.4 Tx mute function (local and remote)
This facility allows to switch off the transmitter. This facility can be useful during commissioning to avoid
producing interference if the frequency is not yet properly set.

For further information and operative procedures, refer to the CT OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK.
3–5.5.4.5 Performance Monitoring
The Performance Monitoring is responsible for quality events counting and reporting.
For further information and operative procedures, please refer to the CT OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK.
3–5.5.4.6 Event Log
The generic events occurred and discriminated by the NE are stored in one or more Event Log files.
The ELB (Event Log Browsing) application embedded in the 9400AWY SWP allows the Operator to read
such log files, in order to have historical data that can be useful to troubleshoot the equipment or the link or
the PDH network, in case of multiple alarm conditions or intermittent alarms.
The event log file examination is quite complex; it is reserved to Alcatel skilled personnel
as a debug tool (only using filters on the not meaningful events, it is possible to
understand the meaning of the stored data).
For further information and operative procedures, refer to the CT OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 194 / 332
332
3–5.5.5 IDU unit replacement
flow–chart.
Specific instructions/cautions according to the unit type are given in the paragraphs listed in Tab. 81.
below.
Tab. 81. IDU unit replacement procedures
UNIT PARAGRAPH PAGE
IDU MAIN unit 3–5.5.5.1 196
IDU EXTENSION unit 3–5.5.5.2 199
FLASH CARD (housed on MAIN unit) 3–5.5.5.3 201

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 195 / 332
332
3–5.5.5.1 IDU MAIN unit replacement procedure
ON/OFF switch

Flash Card label
Flash Card Flash Card cover possible additional

Identification label
identification label
of the upgrade kit
(see point [16]
on page 132)
Fig. 86. Details for IDU MAIN unit or FLASH CARD replacement
General warnings:
Screw fixing
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %

2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) 10 %
Unit uninstallation and installation
In all described operations, when it is necessary to uninstall or re–install the IDU MAIN unit
from/in the shelf, wall or desk assembly, please refer to the instructions given in the:
Procedure:
[1] Note for 1+1 configurations:

If possible, before removing the IDU MAIN defective unit, by Craft Terminal ensure that:
• traffic is forced to channel “0” for mux, Radio and transmitter
• the scheme protection is closed to “NON REVERTIVE MODE”
[2] If the local Craft Terminal is connected, perform the logoff, then switch it off
[3] If possible, verify that also remote Craft Terminal(s) and Supervision Operating System(s) are
disconnected from the equipment
[4] On the unit identification label present at unit rear side (see Fig. 86. above) read the unit P/N and the
Power Supply nominal voltage (read also notes in point [16] on page 132, for the possible additional
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
identification label of the upgrade kit)
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 196 / 332
332
[5] Get a spare unit with the same P/N (see para.3–3.3.3 on page 179 for general cautions) verifying
also that its labelled Power Supply nominal voltage comply with that of the IDU Main unit to be
replaced.
N.B. If the unit to be replaced is equipped with an optional tributary plug–in (9–16E1/DS1
plug–in, or E3/DS3 plug–in, or Data plug–in), according to the spare part policy described
in para.3–3.3.1.2 point a ) on page 178, you must at first install the spare tributary plug–in
into the spare IDU Main unit basic, as described in para.2–4.6 on page 125 (obviously
de–installation and re–installation steps do not apply).
[6] Turn off the front panel power switch (position “O”, see Fig. 86. on page 196):
• of the IDU MAIN unit to be replaced
• of the IDU MAIN spare unit
[7] if possible, switch off the circuit breaker that gives power supply to the cable connected to the IDU
MAIN unit to be replaced.
[8] Disconnect all cables from the front panel of the IDU MAIN unit to be replaced.
Notes:
SAFETY RULES
If operation indicated in previous point [7] has not been carried out, a TNV–2
(battery) voltage could be present on Station Battery input (cable side); do not
touch the pins when unplugged.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage,
low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns
terminals.
• before removing cables ensure they are labeled
• in (1+1) configurations, leave the:

– flat cable and the split–cables connected to the IDU EXTENSION unit
– user interface cables connected to the split cables
In this way, the tributary and user service channels traffic interruption is avoided (it continues
on channel “0” through the IDU EXTENSION unit)
[9] Uninstall the IDU MAIN unit to be replaced and place it on the workbench
[10] Wear the antistatic protection armlet and connect its termination to a grounded structure (see
Fig. 135. on page 305).
ATTENTION

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 197 / 332
332
[11] Carry out the following operations on the IDU MAIN defective unit (see Fig. 86. on page 196):
• remove the Flash Card cover

• extract the Flash Card (it will be mounted in the spare IDU Main unit)

• restore the Flash Card cover

[12] Carry out the following operations on the IDU MAIN spare unit (see Fig. 86. on page 196):
• remove the Flash Card cover

• insert the Flash Card you have extracted from the IDU MAIN defective unit in previous step [11]
• restore the Flash Card cover
[13] Now you can take off the antistatic protection armlet.
[14] Install the IDU MAIN spare unit
[15] Reconnect the cables on the front panel exactly as they were connected before the faulty unit was
extracted.
N.B. SAFETY RULES: see point [8] on page 197
[16] if switched off in step [7] on page 197, switch on the circuit breaker giving power supply to the cable
connected to the new IDU MAIN unit.
[17] Turn on power on the new IDU MAIN unit (position “I”, see Fig. 86. on page 196)
[18] Wait for the unit configuration (about 2 minutes).
[19] Check the system status using LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal.
[20] Note for 1+1 configurations: by Craft Terminal, remove any forced switches on channel 1 that could
have been set in step [1] on page 196
[21] Flash Card identifier label affixing
Please read para.2–4.5.2 on page 124.

If the inserted IDU MAIN spare unit has no Flash Card identifier label sticked on it or the label does
not match the flash card effectively inserted, put a label with the correct information (if not available,
create a label writing the information on a self–adhesive sticker).
End of IDU MAIN unit replacement procedure

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 198 / 332
332
3–5.5.5.2 IDU EXTENSION unit replacement procedure
ON/OFF switch
possible additional identification label Identification label

of the upgrade kit (see point [16] on page 132)
Fig. 87. Details for IDU EXTENSION unit replacement
General warnings:
Screw fixing
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %

2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) 10 %
Unit uninstallation and installation
In all described operations, when it is necessary to uninstall or re–install the IDU EXTENSION
unit from/in the shelf, wall or desk assembly, please refer to the instructions given in the:
Procedure:
[1] If possible, before removing the IDU EXTENSION defective unit, by Craft Terminal ensure that:
• traffic is lockout to channel “1” for mux, Radio and transmitter
• the scheme protection is closed to “NON REVERTIVE MODE”.
[2] On the unit identification label present at unit rear side (see Fig. 87. above) read the unit P/N and the
Power Supply nominal voltage (read also notes in point [16] on page 132, for the possible additional
identification label of the upgrade kit)
[3] Get a spare unit with the same P/N (see para.3–3.3.3 on page 179 for general cautions) verifying
also that its labelled Power Supply nominal voltage comply with that of the IDU EXTENSION unit to
be replaced.
N.B. If the unit to be replaced is equipped with an optional tributary plug–in (9–16E1/DS1
plug–in, or E3/DS3 plug–in), according to the spare part policy described in para.3–3.3.1.2
point a ) on page 178, you must at first install the spare tributary plug–in into the spare
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
IDU Extension unit basic, as described in para.2–4.6 on page 125 (obviously

de–installation and re–installation steps do not apply).
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 199 / 332
332
[4] Turn off the front panel power switch (position “O”, see Fig. 87. on page 199):
• of the IDU EXTENSION unit to be replaced

• of the IDU EXTENSION spare unit

[5] if possible, switch off the circuit breaker that gives power supply to the cable connected to the IDU
EXTENSION unit to be replaced.
[6] Disconnect all cables from the front panel of the IDU EXTENSION unit to be replaced.
Notes:
SAFETY RULES
If operation indicated in previous point [5] has not been carried out, a TNV–2
(battery) voltage could be present on Station Battery input (cable side); do not
touch the pins when unplugged.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage,
low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns
terminals.
• before removing cables ensure they are labeled
• leave the:
– flat cable and the split–cables connected to the IDU MAIN unit
– user interface cables connected to the split cables
In this way, the tributary and user service channels traffic interruption is avoided (it continues
on channel “1” through the IDU MAIN unit)
[7] Uninstall the IDU EXTENSION unit to be replaced
[8] Install the IDU EXTENSION spare unit
[9] Reconnect the cables on the front panel exactly as they were connected before the faulty unit was
extracted.
N.B. SAFETY RULES: see point [6] above
[10] if switched off in step [5] on page 200, switch on the circuit breaker giving power supply to the cable
connected to the new IDU EXTENSION unit.
[11] Turn on power on the new IDU EXTENSION unit (position “I”, see Fig. 87. on page 199)
[12] Wait for the unit configuration (about 2 minutes).
[13] Check the system status through LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal.
[14] Note: by Craft Terminal, remove any lockout switches on channel 0 that could have been set in step
[1] on page 199.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
End of IDU EXTENSION unit replacement procedure
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 200 / 332
332
3–5.5.5.3 FLASH CARD replacement procedure
The need for this replacement is described in para. 3–5.5.3.2 on page 192.
The FLASH CARD contains the system software (see para.4–2.3.2.2 on page 230). Many types are
envisaged: its identification is described in para.2–4.5.2 on page 124.
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid complete traffic loss)

Do not insert in the system a Flash Card the content of which you do not well know!
You must be aware that if a Flash Card with SW information different from that running in the system
is inserted “as it is”, the software download will be automatically carried out from the Flash Card
toward the System’s PQ/ECRC and Supervisory Units, thus causing a complete system crash.
The FLASH CARD replacement procedure to use depends on the choice adopted by the Customer with
reference to the type of spare flash card stored in the spare–part–stock (refer to the Spare Flash Card
management policy described in para.3–3.3.4 on page 180):
a) “specific” spare part for a certain NE (each NE has its own “specific” spare Flash Card, kept aligned
to SW changes made on the NE in service, through an off–line service station).
In this case proceed as specified in para.3–5.5.5.3.1 on page 202.
b) “generic” spare part that cannot be inserted it “as it is” in any NE.
In this case proceed as specified in para.3–5.5.5.3.2 on page 203.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 201 / 332
332
3–5.5.5.3.1 FLASH CARD replacement with a spare flash card “specific” for the NE
General warnings:

Screw fixing

2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %

2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) 10 %
Procedure to be used only in the case specified in point a ) on page 201
Procedure:
[1] read the Flash Card Name on the label affixed on IDU MAIN unit (see Fig. 86. on page 196) and
according to it, retrieve the Flash Card P/N through the sublist FLASH CARD in Tab. 22. on page
82
[2] get the spare Flash Card with the same P/N; leave it in its protective envelope until you have worn
the antistatic protection armlet;
N.B. verify that is really “specific” for the NE where it must be inserted, by suitable
documentation that should be together with it
[3] wear the antistatic protection armlet (see Fig. 135. on page 305) and connect its termination to a
grounded structure
ATTENTION

[4] remove the Flash Card cover (see Fig. 86. on page 196). Store tidily cover and screws for their
successive mount
[5] extract the faulty Flash Card from the IDU Main Unit and insert the spare one (refer to Fig. 50. on page
124 for Flash Card profile and insertion direction)
[6] restore the Flash Card cover removed in step [4] above
[7] now you can take off the antistatic protection armlet
[8] carry out functional checks by Craft Terminal.
End of procedure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 202 / 332
332
3–5.5.5.3.2 FLASH CARD replacement with a “generic” spare flash card
Procedure to be used only in the case specified in point b ) on page 201.

In practice , you have to rebuild all SW information on the flash card. You can do that in two alternative
ways:
– using the procedure Installation of a new Flash Card not configured in factory described in the
9400AWY Rel.2.0 Operator’s Handbook (REF.[D] on page 314), chapter Flash Card upgrade.
– using the procedure SW download through SIBDL application described in the 9400AWY Rel.2.0
Line–up guide (REF.[C] on page 314), if present in the handbook.
Both procedures require the NE to be isolated from the supervision network.
N.B. Before to isolate the system from the supervision network, inform the supervision center: if (from
the supervision point of view), there are other NEs cascade–connected to it (and without
supervision ring network) they will be isolated, too.
End of procedure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 203 / 332
332
3–5.5.6 ODU replacement
General warnings:

ODU unit uninstallation and installation

In all described operations, when it is necessary to uninstall the faulty ODU and install the spare
ODU, please refer to possible additional instructions given in the:
Procedure:
[1] Get a spare ODU unit or, in case of 7–8 GHz ODU, a spare TRANSCEIVER box with the same P/N
of that to be replaced
[2] Note for (1+1) configurations:

before replacing the ODU make sure that the traffic is transmitted over the other channel. Otherwise,
force with the CT the traffic onto the other channel.
[3] Switch off the ODU by using the ON/OFF switch of the relevant IDU unit:
• for channel 1, operate on MAIN unit (position “O”, see Fig. 86. on page 196)
• for channel 0, operate on EXTENSION unit (position “O”, see Fig. 87. on page 199)
ATTENTION

this avoids a possible unrecoverable unknown condition of the spare ODU, when connected in next
step [7]
[4] If present, remove the solar shield (see Fig. 73. on page 160 and Fig. 74. on page 161)
[5] Disconnect the IDU–ODU cable at ODU side.
[6] Change the ODU. NOTES:
• in case of ODU configurations 1+1 with coupler, use lever shown in Fig. 79. on page 175;
• in case of 7–8 GHz ODUs:

a ) remove the faulty TRANSCEIVER box in the following way (refer to Fig. 74. on page 161):
1 ) leave the BRANCHING box attached to antenna or coupler, i.e. do not open
levers (B)
2 ) unblock the four levers (A) and separate gently the faulty TRANSCEIVER box from
the BRANCHING box
3 ) verify the coupling between TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes (see
para.2–7.2.2 on page 163), i.e. if the TRANSCEIVER box’s (D) (TX) is coupled to
the:
– BRANCHING box’s (B) (HIGH FREQ)
– or BRANCHING box’s (C) (LOW FREQ)
b ) install the spare TRANSCEIVER box in the following way:
4 ) verify the presence and correct positioning of the O–RING on the spare
TRANSCEIVER box (see Fig. 75. on page 162)
5 ) gently couple the spare TRANSCEIVER box on the BRANCHING box in the same
position you have verified in step 3 ) above
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
6 ) fix the spare TRANSCEIVER box to the BRANCHING box using the four levers (A)
(refer to Fig. 74. on page 161)
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 204 / 332
332
[7] Reconnect the IDU–ODU cable at ODU side.
[8] If was present, mount the solar shield that was removed in step [4] above
[9] Switch on the ODU by using the ON/OFF switch (position “I” of the relevant IDU unit (MAIN or
EXTENSION unit) that has been switched off in step [3] above.
[10] Check with the CT that there are no alarms.
3–5.6 Faulty unit repair and Repair Form
flow–chart.
3–5.6.1 Faulty unit sending back to repair center
The complete faulty unit (complete ODU assembly, or TRANSCEIVER box in case of 7–8 GHz
ODU, or IDU Main or Extension Unit including plug–in, if any) must be sent back to the Alcatel
repair center.
Faulty unit repair must be done by authorized repair centers only.
3–5.6.2 Repair Form filling
To facilitate repair operation, data on the faulty unit must be reported on the form shown in Fig. 88. on
page 206.
The repair form must be filled–in with as much data as possible and returned to Alcatel together with
the faulty unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 205 / 332
332
ALCATE L
REPAIR FORM
Fill in this form and affix it to the faulty unit to be returned to Alcatel

CUSTOMER NAME ORDER NUMBER/CONTRACT NUMBER
SITE BRANCH/UNIT/COUNTRY
SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT PRODUCT RELEASE EQUIPMENT SOFTWARE PART NUMBER
STATION/RACK SUBRACK SLOT

TO BE FILLED IN BY THE SENDER
MNEMONIC ALCATEL PART NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER FAULTY UNIT SOFTWARE VERSION
FAULT PHASE REASON FOR REPAIR PRESUMED CAUSE
INSTALLATION / CLEAR FAULT DROP IN PERFORMANCE INTERNAL

TURN ON
LIGHTNING
OPERATION INTERMITTENT FAULT UPGRADE/QUALITY ALERT
EXTERNAL AIR COND.
MAINTENANCE TEMPERATURE FAULT OTHER
DATE NAME OF SENDER

FAULT STILL PRESENT
AFTER REPAIR
COMMENTS
PROCESSING FAULTS DETECTED

TO BE FILLED IN BY THE REPAIR OPERATOR
NO FAULTS FOUND UPGRADE SOLDERING / COMPONENT ADJUSTMENT

WIRING
A I C F–L P
STANDARD REPAIRING NOT REPAIRABLE MECHANICAL PRINTED DIRT

(REJECTED) CIRCUIT BOARD
B–D M V1 V1 V2
SUBSTITUTED
QUALITY ALERT CORROSION OTHER
I S–X V3
NOTE : LETTERS ARE FOR FACTORY USE
COMMENTS
DATE REPAIRING NUMBER REPAIRING CENTRE NAME OF REPAIR OPERATOR

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 88. Repair form
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 206 / 332
332
SECTION 4: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
It provides the second–level description of 9400AWY Rel.2.0 equipment.
Chapter 4–1 – Radio transmission features

It describes the Radio Transmission features: Frequency Agility, ATPC, ATPC, 209
Internal service channels, User service channels
Chapter 4–2 – System description

It gives the detailed description of the equipment features and subsystems that have 217
not been given in the previous part of this handbook.
Chapter 4–3 – IDU Data Interface plug–in

It describes in detail the implementation and working environment of the Ethernet 257
accesses.
Chapter 4–4 – Network management and interworking

It describes the network management and interworking available for the equipment 267
control.
Chapter 4–5 – Alarms

275
It describes the alarms managed in the SWP version this handbook issue refers to.
In all chapters, possible references to DS1 and DS3 interfaces (that are not supported by the
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 207 / 332
332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
332
3DB 06687 BA AA
208 / 332
4–1 RADIO TRANSMISSION FEATURES
This chapter describes the Radio Transmission features:

– Frequency Agility on page 210

– Frequency shifter management on page 210
– Transmitted power control: ATPC function on page 211
– Transmitted power control: RTPC function on page 214
– Internal service channels on page 214
– User service channels on page 215

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 209 / 332
332
4–1.1 Frequency Agility
The Frequency Agility feature gives the Operator the possibility to set via ECT the frequency of a single
Transceiver within a chosen sub–band to select the RF working channel. This implies benefits for spare

parts, order processing and frequency co–ordination.

4–1.2 Frequency shifter management
The configuration of radio Tx frequency and radio Rx frequency is done by setting the radio Tx frequency.
The NE automatically calculates the Rx frequency based on a shifter value (specific for the diplexer
installed on ODU).
Each ODU can manage only one shifter (fixed shifter) or a list of predefined shifter (flexible shifter), but,
due to the inability to read the shifter information from the diplexer Remote Inventory, the shifter value (and
the central frequency) to use in case of flexible shifter management is chosen by managing system in a
list of allowed shifter value and central frequency. This list is known by ODU based on frequency band
(read from Remote Inventory).
The list is sent by ODU to IDU , one entry for each couple shifter value–central frequency allowed and for
each radio channel.
Also in case of fixed shifter the list is managed (with only one entry) to allow shifter management
independent from ODU type. The managing system chooses the shifter value to use.
Associated to each couple shifter value–central frequency (and based on frequency sub–band read from
Remote Inventory) the Tx frequency range is reported to allow the radio TX frequency setting.
Rx frequency is calculated automatically by the NE using Tx frequency configured by the managing

system and the shifter value (fixed or configured by the managing system).
In a few cases, the Rx frequency can be modified by the managing system in a range of 5.000 KHz around
the Rx frequency calculated automatically by the NE (but inside the Rx frequency range associated to
couple shifter value–central frequency configured).
That’s just the same of the use a new shifter value not included in the predefined list.
To resume: the configuration of frequency parameters of a radio channel is done by setting in a first time
the couple ‘shifter value–central frequency’ (by managing system for flexible shifter and the only value for
fixed shifter) and then the Tx frequency (and eventually the Rx frequency).
There are no default values for ‘shifter value–central frequency’ and Tx and Rx frequency values.
Shifter value–central frequency and Tx frequency are explicitly configured by managing system, while Rx
frequency it is automatically calculated.
In case of IDU–ODU communication never activated, due to ODU never connected or never responding,
it is not possible to configure shifter value (and central frequency) and Tx frequency.
In case of Shifter value (and central frequency) not configured, a default value is applied
(7.000.000–40.000.000 KHz or maximum hardware range known by ODU) for Tx frequency range to allow
to configure in one shot all frequency parameters.
The configuration of ‘shifter value–central frequency’ is allowed only on local station (during the installation
phase).
An ‘Incompatible Frequency’ alarm is raised in the following cases:

– when a Tx Frequency value not included on the allowed Tx Frequency Range is configured;
– when a shifter value–central frequency not included in the allowed list is configured;
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– when, on configuring a new ‘shifter value–central frequency’, the Tx Frequency is no longer included
on the new allowed Tx Frequency Range.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 210 / 332
332
4–1.3 Transmitted power control: ATPC function
The automatic control of the transmitted power (ATPC) function allows to regulate the transmitted power in
order to supply a reduced power in situation of normal propagation and the maximum power in conditions
of fading.
In radio link systems the ATPC device is considered a very important function taking into account the
following advantages:
– reduction of the internal interferences of the radio system and with other systems
– reduction of the average consumption of the transmitter considering that the maximum power is
supplied for small percentage of time
– improvement of the average condition of the transmitter about the linearity and consequent reduction
of phenomena of background error due to non linear distortion that with ATPC could be revealed only
in conditions of fading
– possibility to increase the System Gain as a consequence to the reduction of the Back–off on the
power transmitter taking into account what mentioned above
[1] ATPC Working principle
The ATPC system is based on a control loop of the transmitted power between a transmitter and a
receiver connected in a radio link.
With reference to the Fig. 89. on page 213 the receiver in Station B furnishes through the AGC
voltage the information of the received power to the ATPC controller; the received power level is set
to the local IDU by the IDU–ODU service channel and then transferred to the remote station (in the
IDU the power level is extracted by the PDH frame and sent to the ODU, where the ATPC controller
is resident, by IDU–ODU dialogue). In the remote station (A) the ATPC controller compares the
voltage with threshold values (pre–settable in the embedded ODU SW) and according to the
obtained result it orders to increase/decrease the transmitted power. These orders are processed
and therefore transferred to the associated transmitter.
In the protected configurations the control information of the transmitted power are 1+1 protected
transmitted.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 211 / 332
332
The information regarding the ATPC functionality can be summarized as follows (for each channel):
• received power (absolute digital value to be transmitted towards the remote station in order to
move the Tx output power).

• Rx failure (for remote Tx inhibition). This information is transmitted instead of the received

power level
• The ATPC channel is identified according to the position in the frame where the ATPC
information is inserted/extracted
The information for each channel received at the remote station is sent to the relevant transmitter
where the PRx information received is compared to the set thresholds and it is decided to send the
up or down or hold commands to the transmitter.
The Rx failure received in the Tx remote station is used to set the Tx at low Pout. The failure of “Rx0
and Rx1” received in the Tx remote station is used to set them at low Pout in case of 1+1HSB
configuration. It will be switched on after Rx failure removal.
The Rx failure alarm is not comprehensive of propagation alarms.
[2] Organization of the control system
The ATPC control system is repeated for each channel without any centralized function.
The system control is organized in two parts for each channel and for each direction:
• the Rx system control implementing PRx detection, eventual Rx failure detection and insertion
of the above data in the service channel;
• The Tx system control implementing extraction of data from the service channel and PTx drive.
[3] ATPC threshold management
The transmitter can change the output power in the ML (max level) and mL (min level) range. The
transceiver has its own default value for ML, mL and NL (nominal level).
The following values can be set through the CT:
AML (ATPC Max. Level) where AML <= ML
AmL (ATPC min. Level) where AmL >= mL
With the constraints mL <= AmL <= NL
mL <= AML <= ML
It means that:
• the ATPC range is not fixed but is variable according to the values set for AML and AmL
• the max ATPC output power can differ from the max output power of the transmitter and the
ATPC functionality can be maintained with reduced range
Every power change, from manual to automatic and vice–versa, is performed at the speed of 1dB
/10ms.
A 3 dB “POWER HOLD” hysteresis range has been defined between the “POWER UP” and the
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
“POWER DOWN” threshold levels.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 212 / 332
332
In case of loss of Tx_Rx ATPC signal, exchanged between Tx and Rx, the output power is frozen and
an ATPC loop alarm must be activated (no other actions are taken); when the communication is
restored the ATPC loop alarm is deactivated after an hysteresis to be defined.
The ATPC function can be both enabled or disabled: when ATPC is disabled the output power can
be driven normally.
An ”identifier station code” is used in the remote station to be sure that an Rx power decrease of one
receiver corresponds to a PTx increase of the relevant Tx one.
STATION A STATION B
PRX RX
IF IF
MOD DEM
VATPC
COMATPC
ATPC AGC
CONTROL
RFCOH RFCOH
EXTRACT INSERT
RX FAILURE PRX ATPC
ATPC DATA ATPC DATA
PTX
PRX
DEM IF
RX TX IF
MOD
NOTE: ATPC REGULATION SHOWN IN ONE DIRECTION OF TRANSMISSION ONLY AND VALID FOR EACH CHANNEL
Fig. 89. ATPC functionality
[4] ATPC in HSB configuration
Fig. 90. on page 214 shows all possible system states and actions carried out, according to the
following legend:
A = PRx > –30dBm
E = PRx < Extra power threshold
N = PRx within A and S or within A and E according to cases
HOLD = The current output power value is maintained
LOWER = The output power value is ruled by the lowest PRx of the pair
HIGHER = The output power value is ruled by the greatest PRx of the pair
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Whenever one PRx is not considered valid (because it is not received, or there is a Card_Fail, or it
is squelched, ..), the output power value is ruled by the only valid PRx.
Should both PRx be not valid, system stays in the HOLD condition.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 213 / 332
332
PRx–0 state PRx–1 state
A N E

A

HIGHER HOLD HIGHER
HOLD LOWER LOWER

N
HIGHER LOWER LOWER
E
Fig. 90. ATPC in HSB configuration
4–1.4 Transmitted power control: RTPC function
The capability to adjust the transmitted power in a static and fixed way (RTPC = Remote Transmit Power
Control) has been introduced for those countries where, due to internal rules, the ATPC function is not
accepted or for those hops in which due to the short length and interface problems, a fixed reduced
transmitted power is preferred. The range of the possible attenuation depends on the frequency band
involved. The setting of the transmitted power can be performed locally through ECT.
4–1.5 Internal service channels
The system to transmit CLA, RDI and ATPC information uses a 64 kbit/s service channel inserted in the
radio aggregate frame.
– CLA (not operative in current release)
CLA (Common Loss Alarms) is a mechanism, used only in 1+1 hot standby configurations, which
detects local failures of the transmitter (“Silent alarms“) normally not detected by the conventional
Tx–Rx alarms.
– RDI
RDI (Remote Defect Indication) is a 1–bit alarm transmitted from the remote system to the local one,
even if the NMS–RF bi–directional channel is not working / not present.
RDI is generated by the remote EC as the sum of the various card failures of the remote system.
The RDI information is available on the Main unit (channel 1) front panel through LEDs.
Refer to point [2] on page 121 for further information.
– ATPC
The ATPC (Automatic Transmit Power Control) function allows to regulate the transmitted power in
order to supply reduced power in normal propagation conditions, and maximum power in fading
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
conditions.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 214 / 332
332
4–1.6 User service channels
Two service channels are available.

a) Service Channel 1 (data channel)

This channel can be used in one of the following modes (settable by CT):
• 64 kbit/s V.11 co–directional
• 64 kbit/s G.703 co–directional
• 64 kbit/s V.11 contra–directional
b) Service Channel 2 (Engineering Order Wire)
EOW is a telephone channel with the possibility of implementing general or selective call. The
handset is connected to a connector on the front panel of the IDU Access unit. To implement a
selective call the CT/OS must assign a station number (between 10 and 99) to each terminal during
the installation phase. Number 00 is for the general call (omnibus call). Two terminals in the network
should not have the same station number.
Two ways of calling are possible:
• SELECTIVE: a connection between two stations
• OMNIBUS: a unidirectional connection between one station and all the others
The numbers available for calls are from 10 to 99.
The omnibus call number is identified by number 00.
Fig. 91. on page 216 shows the block diagram of the EOW channel in 1+0 configuration.
Fig. 105. on page 241 shows the block diagram of the EOW channel in 1+1 configuration (K_SWRx
is the EPS–Rx Switch command).
For operative details refer to chapter 3–2 on page 171.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 215 / 332
332
Main
ASICPegaso
EOW dRXODU
Front Panel West ck64
RX
sync8 IDU–ODU
framer
COMBO
dTX–ODU
TX
Analog ck64 , sync8
Party–Line
TX
dTX–RF
COMBO
towards dRXRF MUX
RF frame Main frame
ck64
RX
EOW sync8
Front Panel East
ODU
ASICPerseo
IDU–ODU
framer
Fig. 91. EOW analog party line block diagram in 1+0 configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 216 / 332
332
4–2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This chapter gives the detailed description of the equipment features and subsystems that have not been
given in the previous part of this handbook.
Information given in the following is:
– Functional description and components on page 218
– Control subsystem hardware architecture on page 223
– IDU functional description on page 225
– Protection schemes on page 234
– ODU functional description on page 251
– Loopbacks on page 253
Please refer to other chapters of this section for the following related information:
– IDU Data Interface plug–in chapter 4–3 on page 257
– Network management and interworking chapter 4–4 on page 267
– Alarms chapter 4–5 on page 275

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 217 / 332
332
4–2.1 Functional description and components
This paragraph sums–up the equipment functions and defines its components from the SW point of view:
– Functions and configurations herebelow

– IDU and ODU Components herebelow:

• IDU on page 219
• ODU on page 219
• Allowed Equipment Types on page 220
• Remote Inventory Management on page 222
4–2.1.1 Functions and configurations
ULS NE has the aim to multiplexer/demultiplexer the main tributaries (up to 16xE1 / 16xDS1 or 1xE3 /
1xDS3) with different modulation formats.
The following Tab. 82. resumes the relation among market, tributaries and modulation.
Tab. 82. Markets, tributaries and modulations forecasted

Market Tributary Modulation
2xE1 4QAM
4xE1 4QAM / 16QAM
ETSI 8xE1 4QAM /16QAM
16xE1 4QAM / 16QAM
1xE3 4QAM / 16QAM
4xDS1 4QAM
8xDS1 4QAM /16QAM
ANSI
16xDS1 4QAM / 16QAM
1xDS3 4QAM / 16QAM
The main functions performed by IDU and ODU of ULS equipment are the following:
– Multiplexer/Demultiplexer
The multiplexer function receives main tributaries (see Tab. 82. above) and generates a PDH frame.
The demultiplexer function receives a PDH frame and generates main tributaries.
– Signal Protection switch (if any)
The function provides one protection channel for the main signal against channel–associated failures
for both hardware failures and temporary signals degradation or losses due to propagation effects
(e.g. rain) according to equipment configuration.
– Radio Physical Interface
The function converts a radio frequency signal into an internal logic level signal, and vice versa
(RPPI). Specifically, the following functions are performed:
• Modulation and Tx functions in the transmit side
• Demodulation and Rx functions in the receive side
ULS NE can be composed by:
– one radio channel (1+0 configurations);
– two radio channels (1+1 configurations).
The 2+0 configuration is not supported.
4–2.1.2 IDU and ODU Components

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The ULS NE is composed by two different parts: the indoor and the outdoor part. In the following they are
described from physical and management point of view.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 218 / 332
332
4–2.1.2.1 IDU
The indoor part is composed by one or two units/shelves (see Fig. 1. on page 22):
– IDU Main Unit Ch#1
– IDU Extension Unit Ch#0

[1] IDU Main Unit

The IDU Main unit is used both in 1+0 and 1+1 configurations.
Four different types of IDU Main Unit are envisaged (with different P/Ns):
• IDU Main Unit for ETSI market, for ±24 V Power Supply
• IDU Main Unit for ETSI market, for ±48/±60 V Power Supply
• IDU Main Unit for ANSI market, for ±24 V Power Supply
• IDU Main Unit for ANSI market, for ±48/±60 V Power Supply
The IDU Main Unit provides the external interfaces for the 8xE1 (ETSI version) or 8xDS1 (ANSI
version) tributaries, user service channel, housekeeping and summarizing alarms, NMS V11 and
G703 interfaces and a telephone jack. It contains the MONOM, the PQECRC and the Power Supply
units. The MONOM unit manages 8E1/DS1 tributaries, the Mux/Demux and the cable interface
functions. The PQECRC unit implements the Equipment and IDU Controller functions.
a) Software Key on IDU Main unit
A Software Key (Flash Card) is always plugged onto the Main board allowing flexibility in
choosing user interfaces. Refer to para.2–4.5 on page 124 for details.
b) Optional plug–in unit for IDU Main unit
An optional plug–in unit (alternative between them, with different P/Ns) for:
– additional 8xE1 plug–in or 8xDS1 plug–in
– or 1xE3 plug–in or 1xDS3 plug–in
– or Data plug–in implementing Ethernet interfaces
can be plugged onto the IDU Main unit.
[2] IDU Extension Unit
The IDU Extension Unit is used only in 1+1 configurations.
Four different types of IDU Extension Unit are envisaged (with different P/Ns):
• IDU Extension Unit for ETSI market, for ±24 V Power Supply
• IDU Extension Unit for ETSI market, for ±48/±60 V Power Supply
• IDU Extension Unit for ANSI market, for ±24 V Power Supply
• IDU Extension Unit for ANSI market, for ±48/±60 V Power Supply
The IDU Extension Unit contains the MONOE, the Power Supply and the Hitless Switch units.
c) Optional plug–in unit for IDU Extension unit
An optional plug–in unit (alternative between them, with the same P/Ns of those envisaged for
the IDU Main Unit) for:
– additional 8xE1 plug–in or 8xDS1 plug–in
– or 1xE3 plug–in or 1xDS3 plug–in
must be plugged onto the IDU Extension unit, when the same type of plug–in unit is equipped
on the IDU Main unit .
Note: even if equipped on the IDU Main unit, Data plug–in is not envisaged on IDU Extension
unit.
4–2.1.2.2 ODU
According to the configuration type, one or two electrical ODU are managed in the Outdoor part. Each ODU
contains a PQECRC unit. It implements the ODU controller functions.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 219 / 332
332
4–2.1.2.3 Allowed Equipment Types
This paragraph provides information on the allowed equipment types for all the configurations supported
by ULS NE.

In the following tables, the list of allowed equipment types for each physical position, includes the whole

set of possible types, but, according to the NE configuration defined by the managers, only one value will
be present for each physical position.
N.B. Both IDU and ODU shelves are numbered inside a virtual rack (equipmentPosition = 1). All the
IDUs, ODUs and contained positions will be numbered accordingly.
[1] Shelves Equipment Types
The following Tab. 83. provides the shelves equipment types allowed for each supported NE
configuration (see support domain section for the list of supported configurations).
The shelves are numbered according to the following sequence rule:
• IDU Ch#1
• ODU Ch#1
• IDU Ch#0
• ODU Ch#0
Tab. 83. Shelves Equipment Types
Allowed
NE Market Allowed Equipment Type Equipment
Position Equipment
Configuration Type Description Label
Type
(note 1) 1.1.0.0 IDU Main Shelf IDU–M IDU Ch#1

1+0
1+0 ETH ETSI ODU 1+0 4/16 QAM ETSI ODU–E ODU Ch#1
(note 2) 1.2.0.0
ANSI ODU 1+0 4/16 QAM ANSI ODU–A
(note 1) 1.1.0.0 IDU Main Shelf IDU–M IDU Ch#1
ETSI ODU 1+0 4/16 QAM ETSI ODU–E ODU Ch#1

1.2.0.0
1+1 ANSI ODU 1+0 4/16 QAM ANSI ODU–A
(note 3) (note 1) 1.3.0.0 IDU Extension Shelf IDU–E IDU Ch#0
ETSI ODU 1+0 4/16 QAM ETSI ODU–E ODU Ch#0

1.4.0.0
ANSI ODU 1+0 4/16 QAM ANSI ODU–A
(note 1) The equipment types allowed for IDU shelf are market type independent.
(note 2) All the 1+0 configurations.
(note 3) All the 1+1 configurations.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 220 / 332
332
[2] Slots and Sub–slots Equipment Types
The following tables indicate the allowed equipment types for each slot inside each shelf type.
1) IDU
IDU–M
Tab. 84. Allowed board/plug–in types in IDU Main shelf
Allowed
Position Allowed Equipment Type Description Equipment Equipment Label
Type
Main Unit ±24 V Supply M24S

1.1.1.0 IDU/MAIN Ch#1
Main Unit ±48/±60 V Range Supply M4860S
8xE1/DS1 plug–in unit P8E1DS1
1.1.1.1 1xE3/DS3 plug–in unit P1E3DS3 IDU/MAIN/<note 1> Ch#1
2xEthernet plug–in unit P2DATAS
(note 1) The label is one of the following:

– E1, when the 8xE1/DS1 plug–in is provisioned and it configured to work in E1 mode
– DS1, when the 8xE1/DS1 plug–in is provisioned and it configured to work in DS1 mode.
– DATA, when the 2xDATA plug–in is provisioned.
IDU–E
Tab. 85. Allowed board/plug–in types in IDU Extension shelf
Allowed
Position Allowed Equipment Type Description Equipment Equipment Label
Type
Ext. Unit ±24 Supply E24S

1.3.1.0 IDU/EXT Ch#0
Ext. Unit ±48/±60 V Range Supply E4860S

1.3.1.1 IDU/EXT/<note 1> Ch#0
(note 1) The label is one of the following:

2) ODU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
No slot can be defined inside the Electrical ODU.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 221 / 332
332
4–2.1.2.4 Remote Inventory Management
The Remote Inventory feature allows to store the information useful to identify the components of the
product.

From management point of view the Remote Inventory data are provided by the following equipment

types:
– Main Unit (M24S, M4860S)
– Extension Unit (E24S, E4860S)
– Ethernet plug–in (P2DATAS)
– PDH Tributary optional plugs–in (P8E1DS1, P1E3DS3)
– ODU unit (ODU–E, ODU–A)
For all the other equipment types the remoteInventoryStatus columnar object assumes the value
“unavailable”.
The RI data of each sub–components unit (i.e. MONOM in the IDU, MILOU in the ODU) cannot be seen
at SNMP management interface but only by means of factory tools.
Also the information about the equipment type can be read from the remote inventory data (‘Unit
mnemonic’ field). All the units must be provided in its own remote inventory data this type of information.
It is used to identify the actual equipment type and then, eventually, to provide an equipment mismatch
alarm, if the equipment type read from remote inventory data is different from the equipment expected
provided by the managers.
If it is not possible to read the Remote Inventory information, a “Card Fail” alarm is declared.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 222 / 332
332
4–2.2 Control subsystem hardware architecture
This paragraph describes briefly the control subsystem hardware architecture, defines the control
elements, the function partitioning among them and the internal interfaces managed by this subsystem.
The control subsystem block diagram is shown in Fig. 92. on page 224.
4–2.2.1 Function partitioning
The control subsystem provides the resources to support the communication interfaces and the
processing functions required by the NMS (Network Management System).
The functionalities performed by the control subsystem can be summarized as follows:

– Message Communication Function (MCF);
– Equipment Management Function (EMF);
• Virtual Machine Management Function (VMMF);
• Physical Machine Management Function on whole equipment basis (PMMF/E);
• Physical Machine Management Function on unit basis (PMMF/U);
– Basic Functions (BF).
4–2.2.2 Control elements
The control elements supporting the functionalities described above are:

– Equipment controller (EC);
– ODU controller (ODUC).
[1] Equipment Controller
One EC has in charge the MCF, VMMF: it provides resources (physical interfaces and protocol stack)
required for the communication between the NE and the management systems (OS and CT).
It performs all the control and management functions of the virtual machine (info model).
No protection of this control element is performed. In case of failure, the main tributaries transport
capability is guaranteed.
EC is also in charge of the PMMF/E and PMMF/U–IDU: it provides the resources to support the
control and management functions related to the real physical machine.
The EC is physically located on the ”μP Plug–in” of IDU MAIN board (para.4–2.3.2 on page 226).
[2] ODU Supervisory Unit
The ODUC has in charge the PMMF/U–ODU. This function requires a real time processing of the
data coming from the ODU ASIC. The ODUC has the aim to provide an uniform interface towards
the EC avoiding a EC dependency from the ODU HW.
Inside the IDU there is one single internal communication interface: the IDU SPI interface.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 223 / 332
332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
ODU #1 IDU Main Board μ P plug –in Flat
ODU –ASIC cable
μP SPI master SPI 1
02
D_UP ASIC core IDU –ODU bus
CK_UP cable
ODU Cable
Frame
D_D MUX Pegaso –ASIC
SPI –driver ins /extr ASIC core
CK_D D_UP
CK_UP
Cable Frame ODU
MUX D_D driver
ins /extr
SPI slave SPI slave CK_D
Other SPI2
slave devices
Vcc
SPI master SPI master Spider
SPI slaves (IDU driver)
μP Slot #1
ODU SC PSU
Rem .Inv Parallel Alarms
Rem .Inv
ODU #0 IDU Extension Board

ODU –ASIC
D_UP ASIC core IDU –ODU

CK_UP cable
Cable
ODU Frame Pegaso –ASIC
D_D MUX
SPI –driver ins /extr ASIC core
CK_D D_UP
Fig. 92. Control subsystem block diagram

CK_UP
Cable Frame ODU
MUX D_D driver
ins /extr
SPI slave SPI slave CK_D
332
3DB 06687 BA AA
Other SPI2
slave devices
Vcc
SPI master Spider
SPI master
(IDU driver)
μP SPI slaves Slot #0
ODU SC PSU
Rem .Inv Parallel Alarms
Rem .Inv
224 / 332
4–2.3 IDU functional description
The Indoor Unit (IDU) performs all customer interface requirements both as voice and data:
– NxE1/E3 for ETSI market
– NxDS1/DS3 for ANSI market
– EOW
– Service channels
– OS–TMN
and feeds the Outdoor Unit (ODU) via a single coaxial cable carrying:
– Base Band Transmission Signal (from IDU to ODU)
– Base Band Receiver Signal (from ODU to IDU)
– ODU Supply Voltage
The IDU is available in 2 configurations:
– 1+0 IDU
Please refer to para.1–1.2.1 on pages 36–37 for general descriptions and block diagrams.
– 1+1 IDU
Please refer to para.1–1.2.2.1 on pages 38–43 for general descriptions and block diagrams.
The boards used in IDU are:
– IDU Main unit para.4–2.3.2 on page 226
– IDU Extension unit para.4–2.3.3 on page 232
The IDU power supply system is described in para.4–2.3.4 on page 233.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 225 / 332
332
4–2.3.2 IDU Main unit
As shown in Fig. 93. below, the components of the IDU Main unit are:

– the MONOM unit (the motherboard), which includes:

• the interface for 8E1/DS1 tributaries and for all the other channels whose connectors are
present on its front plate
• the Mux/Demux (block diagram in Fig. 94. on page 227), which carries out the following
functions:
– Multiplexing/Demultiplexing of the Tributary signals, and the insertion/extraction from the

main stream of the following signals:
• EOW
• Service Channel
• Network Management System
– Multiplexing/Demultiplexing of the signal toward the ODU interface as framed / unframed

implementing the following processes:
• Scrambler/Descrambler
• Coding/Decoding (Reed–Solomon) + Interleaving
• cable interface functions: cable Interface circuit adds to this signal the ODU supply
voltage and ODU connector management information, feeding the ”N” connector
available on the front panel of the board.
– the microprocessor platform (PQ/ECRC), see para.4–2.3.2.1 on page 228.
– DC/DC converter plug–in board (PSU). It is a module including DC/DC converters and filters. The
power distribution for 1+1 systems is described in para.4–2.3.4 on page 233 (in 1+0 systems the IDU
extension board is not equipped).
– the connector for the flash Card, which stores the SW of the terminal, see para.4–2.3.2.2 on page
230.
– the connectors for an optional tributary plug–in.

PSU
tributary plug–in (optional)
flash card
MONOM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 93. Components of the IDU Main unit
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 226 / 332
332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
64 Kbit /s NMS –RF
from μ P plug –in
02
Main Board
XO
Parallel I/O
F 1TX
Frame Synch “Pegaso ” ASIC
Trib . F1 IDU –ODU

F 1TX
MUX SCR RS –COD Interleav . Up –sampling
interf chann . insert
F CK= F 1, F 1/2 , F 1/4 , F 1/8
SPI uP mess. 614Kbit/s IDU ⇒ ODU

Spider
service channel Cable
IDU –ODU
interface
ATPC frame
Local SPI
EOW ODU 614Kbit/s ODU ⇒ IDU
service channel
Remote 16 NCO @ 2048K
inventory 2 NCO @ 64K
Frame Synch
Fig. 94. Mux/Demux block diagram

F1 F1 F 1RX
RX Trib . Down 614Kb/s Frame
interf DE MUX DE SCR RS –DEC Deinterl . sampling recovery
switch extract.
332
3DB 06687 BA AA
F CK= F 1 , F 1/2 , F 1/4 , F 1/8 F 1RX
VCXO
PSU
64 Kbit /s NMS –RF

Ethernet data plug –in
to μ P plug –in
227 / 332
4–2.3.2.1 Microprocessor platform
The “μP platform”, identified as PQ/ECRC (Power Quick / Equipment Controller Radio Controller), is
embedded in IDU Main mono–board.

Refer to Fig. 95. on page 229.
The μP platform is equipped with:
– CPU: Embedded PowerPC core;
– 32 Mbyte SDRAM;
– 32 Mbyte Flash Eprom;
– Ethernet 10/100BaseT electrical interface for OS (or CT);
– a switch (“Tri–state” in Fig. 95. ) for the 64Kb/s NMS RF–side channel (“NMS – RF” in Fig. 95. ). This
switch is necessary for the (1+1) system where:
• RF TX side: NMS is transmitted on both channels (⇒ TX split). The clock is co–directional;
• RF RX side: the μP selects the active channel, with the same strategy used for main tributaries
(⇒ RX switch).
– a CPLD (“Gutturnio”) for various logical and system–related logical functions (including identification
data of the module and board itself).
The μP platform is designed to be supplied by 3.3V; in (1+1) configuration, the μP platform is supplied in
parallel by the Main mono–board and by the the Extension mono–board.
The μP supports the following interfaces:
– MII towards the on–board Ethernet 10/100BaseT interface;
– three “64Kbit/s SCC” interfaces for the NMS (PPP–HDLC connection):

• one co–dir. interface (“NMS–RF” in Fig. 95. ) towards the BB ASICs;
• two co/contra–dir. interfaces (“NMS – Front panel” in Fig. 95. ) towards the IDU front panel.
– one SCC interface for a serial RS–232 connection to a CT;
– SPI interface towards the back–plane:

• to directly control IDU HW (Asic – FPGA – Rem. Inventory);
• to indirectly control ODU HW (“Direct Protocol over SPI” ⇒ “BB ASIC” ⇒ “ODU Modem ASIC”
⇒ “Direct Protocol over SPI” ⇒ “ODU mP” ⇒ “SPI ODU” ⇒ “ODU HW”);
• FPGA download (“Ethernet Data” and ”Hitless”), only for SW upgrades: the FPGA has its own
local memory, whose content is changed – via SPI bus – only in the case of a SW upgrade;
– parallel Commands/Alarms (by CPLD “Gutturnio”);
– RS–232 interface for debug purposes;
– parallel interface for system identification (by CPLD “Gutturnio”).
– HW control is performed with the architecture described in Fig. 95.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 228 / 332
332
32 Mbyte
10/100 Ethernet OS (or CT)
Flash EPROM
MII
Interface
32 Mbyte
SDRAM
SCC 64Kbit/s
NMS (Front panel – RS422)
Commands CPLD 64Kbit/s

SCC NMS (Front panel – G703)
Alarms Gutturnio
μP SCC
RS–232
CT
NMS (RF#1)
Tri–state NMS (RF)
SCC RS–232
NMS (RF#0) SMC Debug
64Kbit/s
CPLD Serial channel

Gutturnio (System identification)
l ASIC/FPGA/Rem.Inventory
49,152MHz CLOCK OSC
l uP messages towards ODU SPI
BUFFER 24,576MHz
l FPGA download (SW upgrade only)
Fig. 95. Microprocessor platform supported interfaces

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 229 / 332
332
4–2.3.2.2 Flash Card content
Whole Equipment configuration data and programs are contained in the Flash Card, as shown in
Fig. 96. below:

SW SW
SW instances COMMIT STAND–BY
VERSION VERSION
(ACTIVE) (not active)
MIB
NE Data Base
configuration NE network
routing data
Fig. 96. Flash Card content
[1] SW instances
The SW COMMIT VERSION is that used by the system.
The SW STAND–BY VERSION instance is created the first time a SW download from ECT to the NE
is carried out.
A new SWP download is envisaged whenever a new SWP package version or release (new with
respect to that presently loaded in the system) is supplied to Customer (*).
(*) for the meaning of SWP package version and release refer to para.C.3.2 on page 317.
The management of these SW instances is described in the CT Operator’s Handbook.
[2] NE data
N.B. as shown in Fig. 96. above, differently from SW instances, NE data are present as single
instances in the Flash Card.
a) Base configuration
It is defined by Flash Card P/N.
It is not changeable, but with Flash Card upgrade (described in the CT Operator’s Handbook).
b) MIB
Most (but not all) configuration data set is named MIB (Management Information Base).
Such data are defined by Craft Terminal and can be changed only within the limits (Base
configuration) implicitly defined by the employed Flash Card type.
MIB can be saved as a file in the Craft Terminal (or OS) environment, as well can be restored
in the Flash Card retrieving this file from the Craft Terminal (or OS), as described in detail in the
CT Operator’s Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 230 / 332
332
c) NE network routing data
Defined by Craft Terminal, they are:

1. Local configuration ⇒ System’s local address

2. NTP server configuration
3. Interface configuration ⇒ NMS configuration

⇒ Ethernet configuration
4. IP configuration ⇒ IP Static Routing configuration

⇒ OSPF AREA configuration
All those listed parameter are NOT stored into the MIB file because considered unique to a
particular system in a network and are NOT meant to be reproduced on other systems in the
same network because will cause conflicts in the supervision network centre.
[3] System restart
The system restart (reloading of all RAMs present in the system with information stored in the Flash
Card) is without traffic interruption and is carried out:
• after the activation of a new SWP
• after power off/on
• after EC/OC reset (manual of after new SWP activation)
• after plug–in insertion
[4] FPGA download
As a whole, the correct performance of a certain SWP is granted if the system software works
together with the FPGAs’ SW versions specifically required by the SWP itself. When a new SWP is
loaded into the NE, the SW versions present in the equipped FPGA may not be consistent with those
expected, so FPGA upgrade could be necessary.
When a new SWP is loaded from ECT into the ULS NE, also the SW images of FPGAs are loaded
into the PQ/ECRC. Each of these SW images is downloaded automatically toward the relevant FPGA
only in case the FPGA version currently running is lower than that made available by the new SWP.
The FPGA version comparison and the possible FPGA download are without traffic interruption and
are launched every time a system restart is carried out.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 231 / 332
332
4–2.3.3 IDU Extension unit
As shown in Fig. 97. below, the components of the IDU Extension unit are:

– the MONOE unit (the motherboard), which includes:

• the interface for 8E1/DS1 tributaries and for all the other channels whose connectors are
present on its front plate
• the Mux/Demux (block diagram in Fig. 94. on page 227), which carries out the following
functions:
– Multiplexing/Demultiplexing of the Tributary signals, and the insertion/extraction from the

main stream of the following signals (exchanged with the IDU Main unit):
• EOW
• Service Channel
– Multiplexing/Demultiplexing of the signal toward the ODU interface as framed / unframed

implementing the following processes:
• Scrambler/Descrambler
• Coding/Decoding (Reed–Solomon) + Interleaving
• cable interface functions: cable Interface circuit adds to this signal the ODU supply
voltage and ODU connector management information, feeding the ”N” connector
available on the front panel of the board.
– the Hitless Switch function, described in detail in para.4–2.4 on page 234
– DC/DC converter plug–in board (PSU). It is a module including DC/DC converters and filters. The
power distribution for 1+1 systems is described in para.4–2.3.4 on page 233)
– the connectors for an optional tributary plug–in.
PSU
tributary plug–in (optional)
MONOE
Fig. 97. Components of the IDU Extension unit

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 232 / 332
332
4–2.3.4 IDU Power Supply Unit
The PSU is a plug–in of the Main mono–board and Extension mono–board.

The PSU is functionally made up of three main blocks:
– Input Section (IS): common to both LVS and HVS

– Low Voltage Section (LVS): for internal IDU power supply

– High Voltage Section (HVS): for external ODU power supply
and two auxiliary blocks:
– Alarm generation: for external supervision
– Remote Inventory: for factory identification
The following versions are foreseen:
a ) floating (48–60) V nom. ±20%;
b ) floating 24V nom. ±20%
Input is designed as floating, meaning that either plus or minus of battery input could be externally
connected to ground input, without affecting any required characteristic or functionality.
Following alarms are provided by the PSU Unit and connected to spider’s pins:
– Fail_IS: IS is not working properly or standing input voltage outside the normal service range
– Fail_LVS: Low Voltage Section (+3,3V and 1,5V) not working properly
– Fail_HVS: High Voltage Section (–55V) not working properly
IDU Extension board

Flat
PSU cable
–Batt –55V => ODU
GND Filter High

+ Batt Voltage
section
Hold–up Cap
+1.5V
Low
Voltage +3.3V
Remote section +3.3V
Alarms
inventory
IDU Main board
PSU
–Batt –55V => ODU
GND Filter High

+ Batt Voltage
section
Hold–up Cap
+1.5V
Low
Voltage +3.3V
Remote section +3.3V
Alarms
inventory
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 98. Power distribution in 1+1 systems
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 233 / 332
332
4–2.4 Protection schemes

Hitless switching is always present in (1+1) configuration. The Hitless switching functionality is

permanently integrated in the Extension Unit (embedded in the Extension mono–board MONOE).
Two different protection schemes are supported:
– Electrical Protection Switch (EPS) both at TX and RX side: the aim is to protect circuitry after Hitless
Switching; EPS switching at TX and RX side are in tracking (one single logic drives both TX and RX
EPS)
– RX Hitless Radio Protection Switch (RPS–RX).
The way to implement the above two versions are described in para.4–2.4.12 on page 249, here only a
functional description is given.
Tab. 86. below summarizes the protection type supported for tributaries and services.
Tab. 86. Protections for Tributaries/services in 9400AWY (1+1) configuration

EPS
RPS–RX Main/Extension Special
tributaries / protected Connector
(HSW) external interface split
services (TX–RX in type
protected location cable
tracking)
1–8 E1/DS1 Y Y M&E SubD37 Y
9–16 E1/DS1 (opt) Y Y M&E SubD37 (opt) Y
2x(1.0/2.3)
E3/DS3 (opt) Y Y M&E Y
(opt)
Ethernet DATA (opt) N Y M 2x RJ45 (opt) –
TMN V11 N Y M SubD15 (a) –
TMN G703 Y Y M SubD15 (b) –
TMN RF Y Y – – –
User Service
Y Y M&E SubD15 ( c) Y
channel
Telephone N Y M RJ11 –
Audio1 N Y M SubD15 (a) –
Audio2 N Y M SubD15 (b) –
Alarms –
N Y M SubD15 –
Housekeeping
The following Tab. 87. defines the characteristics of this protection scheme.
Tab. 87. Characteristics of the protection scheme

Parameter Type Value
Protection group type 1+1
Switching type Single ended
Restoration criteria Revertive/Non Revertive
Switching condition Equipment failures
Lockout spare Forced switch from main to spare Manual
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Operator commands
switch from main to spare and vice–versa
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 234 / 332
332
4–2.4.2 Tributaries
The architecture is depicted in Fig. 99. below.

Note that:
– E1/DS1 tributaries external interfaces are located both on Main and Extension Units.
The E1/DS1 TX Split functionality is performed by a special cable connecting tributaries external
interfaces on Main sub–rack to Extension sub–rack, dedicated to tributaries (see Fig. 9. on page 39),
and by an input high impedance circuitry driven by EPS–TX command to match input impedance
– E3/DS3 external interfaces are located both on Main and Extension Units.
The E3/DS3 TX Split functionality is performed by two special cable connecting tributaries external
interfaces on Main sub–rack to Extension sub–rack, dedicated to tributaries (see Fig. 13. on page
42 and Fig. 14. on page 43), and by an input high impedance circuitry driven by EPS–TX command
to match input impedance
– the TX Split functionality is performed by a special cable connecting tributaries external interfaces
on Main sub–rack to Extension sub–rack, dedicated to tributaries (E1/DS1 – refer to Fig. 9. on page
39 – and E3/DS3), AND by an input high impedance circuitry driven by EPS–TX command to match
input impedance
– Switch EPS is implemented by:

• a Switch EPS – Input section: due to the use of the special split cable, an input high impedance
circuitry driven by EPS command to match input impedance
• a Switch EPS – TX section: necessary for the hitless switching, because it allows for the
transmission of the same signal over the two RF channels, and to allow replacement of main
or extension sub–racks without loss of traffic. Switches sw1 and sw2 move together;
• a Switch EPS – RX section: when sw6 is closed, sw7 is opened and vice–versa
Switch EPS Input section, TX section and RX section move together driven by the same switching
command depending on a suitable set of alarms from the two channels;
– the RPS RX (hitless) receives the two aggregate signal, aligns them, and selects the best one,
depending on a suitable set of alarms from the two channels;
– both sw4 and sw5, when in (1+1) configuration and if the Hitless Switch circuitry is not in failure,
ALWAYS select the signal coming from sw3;
– in a (1+1) HSB system the two Squelch TX commands control (on–off) the emission of RF power.
SwitchEPS SwitchEPS SwitchEPS

– Input sect – –TX sect – –RX sect –
PDH PDH
tributaries PDH tributaries
Z ODU ODU PDH
MUX
Demux
IDU MAIN TX sw1 sw4
IDU MAIN RX sw6
SPLIT Squelch TX
CABLE SPLIT
sw3 IDU EXT RX CABLE
Squelch TX
IDU EXT TX Hitless RX
sw2 sw5 sw7
PDH
Z ODU ODU PDH
PDH MUX
Demux PDH
tributaries
tributaries
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 99. EPS and RPS system overview
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 235 / 332
332
4–2.4.3 TMN–RF
TMN–RF is a 64Kbit/s channel (data+clock) connecting micro–processors of two network elements.

In 9400AWY (1+1) configuration, TMN–RF channel is protected by both by RPS–RX (Hitless Switch) and

EPS.

< LINE SIDE TMN –RF: TX RADIO SIDE >
MAIN
EPS PEGASO
trib
… SCR
+ RS COD IDU –ODU
MUX
D#1,CK#1 + INTERL INS
PQ/EC –RC
+ UP SAMPL
platform 64Kbit/s
TMN–RF
EPS PEGASO
trib
… SCR
+ RS COD IDU –ODU
MUX
+ INTERL INS
D#0,CK#0 + UP SAMPL
EXTENSION
Fig. 100. TMN–RF: signals exchanged between Main and Extension Units at TX side
< RADIO SIDE TMN–RF: RX LINE SIDE >
MAIN
EPS
PEGASO
64Kbit/s
TMN–RF
DWN SAMPL D#1,CK#1 PQ/EC –RC
IDU –ODU DE –SCR
+ DE –INTERL
EXTR + DEMUX platform
+ RS DEC
… trib
EXTENSION
HSW
PEGASO
D#0,CK#0
DWN SAMPL
IDU –ODU DE –SCR
+ DE –INTERL
EXTR + DEMUX
+ RS DEC
… trib
Fig. 101. TMN–RF: signals exchanged between Main Extension Units in RX direction
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Note that NMS–RF EPS switching is implemented by a switch in the μP platform (refer to para.4–2.3.2.1
on page 228).
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 236 / 332
332
4–2.4.4 TMN line: V11
TMN–V11 (in two working modes: DTE, CODIR) is a 64Kbit/s channel from the micro–processor towards
the front panel.
The only components between the micro–processor and the front panel are:
– the RS422 TX–RX interface
– a couple of Mux for DTE/CODIR clock management
These components receive a protected power supply.
4–2.4.5 TMN line: G.703 and “in–frame”
Both TMN line G703 (in two working modes: DTE, CODIR) and TMN line “in–frame” is a 64Kbit/s channel
from the micro–processor towards the front panel.
TMN G703 external interface (Sub–D 15 connector) is located on Main Unit only.
TMN line in–frame mode is alternative to TMN line G703 mode. This working mode in fact disables NMS
G703 interface and enables the insertion/extraction of the 64 Kbit/s channel in the first E1/T1 slot when
in framed configuration.
TMN in–frame channel is inserted without stuffing, so that it must be synchronous with the tributary going
towards the line chosen by EPS logic thus meaning that the microP–towards–line interface must be EPS
driven.
The not–in–service channel (#0 or #1) according to EPS command tries to insert a TMN line in–frame in
an outgoing E1/DS1 tributary that is not synchronous, but this is not a problem because E1/DS1 is in ”high
impedance” (by EPS command) towards the line.
In 9400AWY (1+1) configuration, TMN–line G.703 and “in–frame” channel are EPS (TX–RX) protected
(refer to Fig. 102. and Fig. 103. on page 238 for TX and RX directions).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 237 / 332
332
< RADIO SIDE TMN – G703 LINE DTE– CODIR – IN FRAME: TX LINE SIDE >
MAIN
EPS
64Kbit/s G703

D#1, HDB3
D,CK CK#1 RZ ± Transf
PQ/EC – RC
Z PEGASO RZ ± /HDB3
platform
D_RXN_G703
D_RXP_G703
D#1,
CK#1 RZ ±
Z PEGASO RZ ± /HDB3
EPS
EXTENSION
Fig. 102. TMN–G.703: signals exchanged between Main and Extension Units in TX direction
Note that in tx–side (μP => Pegaso => front panel) there is a signal (=”dte/co–dir”) defining two working
modes for clock generation :
– codir (=TMN line mode ”G.703 co–dir”) : the clock is an output of the uP and an input for Pegaso
– contro–dir (=TMN line modes ”DTE” or ”in–frame”). In this case Pegaso provides the suitable output
clock to the μP.
TMN–G703 LINE DTE –CODIR –IN FRAME: RX

< RADIO SIDE LINE SIDE >
MAIN
D EPS
PQ/EC –RC DTE/CODIR RZ ±

platform PEGASO Z RZ ±/HDB3 T
CK CK
In DTE: Pegaso output 64Kbit/s G703

In CO –DIR: Pegaso input HDB3
EPS
DTE/CODIR
EPS D_TXN_G703
D D_TXP_G703
RZ ±
PEGASO Z RZ ±/HDB3
CK CK
EPS EXTENSION
Fig. 103. TMN–G.703: signals exchanged between Main and Extension Units in RX direction
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 238 / 332
332
4–2.4.6 User Service channel
User service channel working modes are described in 2–4.4.7 on page 111.
User service channel external interface (Sub–D15) is located both on Main and Extension sub–rack.
A special user service channel split–cable (linking externally the Sub–D15 connectors on Main sub–rack
and on Extension sub–rack, see Fig. 9. on page 39) is used to support EPS protection in (1+1)
configuration.
In 9400AWY R.2.0, user service channels in all working modes are both EPS and RPS–RX (Hitless
Switch) protected.
Refer to Fig. 104. below as an example of the scheme necessary when the user service channel is in
G.703 mode.
64Kbit/s user service channel: TX–RX

< LINE SIDE RADIO SIDE >
MAIN
COD_RXP RZ+_IN
G703 RZ–_IN
COD_RXN
COD_TXP RZ+_OUT PEGASO
Z COD_TXN G703 RZ–_OUT
split
cable
EPS
EXTENSION
COD_RXP RZ+_IN
G703 RZ–_IN
COD_RXN
COD_TXP RZ+_OUT PEGASO
Z COD_TXN G703 RZ–_OUT
EPS
Fig. 104. User Service Channel (TX–RX direction) in G703 mode

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 239 / 332
332
4–2.4.7 EOW – party line
See Fig. 105. on page 241.

Telephone, Audio1 and Audio2 external interfaces (respectively RJ11, SubD15, SubD15) are located on

Main sub–rack only.
RF EOW channel is RPS–RX (Hitless Switch) protected in (1+1) configuration but not EPS protected
meaning that when the Main Unit is switched–off or in failure, the EOW channel is lost.
Note that Audio1 and Audio2 output can be squelched by independent commands driven by the μP (by
Spider device) after OS/CT selections in case that NMS (which I/O are in the same sub–D15 Main
Restyling front connector) inter–networking connections may lead to audio loops.
4–2.4.8 Alarms – Housekeeping
Alarms and Housekeeping external interface (Sub–D15 connector) is present on Main sub–rack only.
TMN–RF supervision, transporting alarms and housekeeping to remote sites, is (1+1) EPS and RPS–RX
protected.
Components between the micro–P and the front panel are not EPS protected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 240 / 332
332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
EOW – PARTY LINE ARCHITECTURE
< RADIO SIDE AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2
LINE SIDE >
LG=“EOW busy” from Pegaso

uP/Spider .
ICCH k_EPS
PEGASO K_EPS . . AB_DTMF
k_EPS from pegaso .
IDU–ODU MUX pegaso LV=“EOW free”
insert + RS cod . dtmf tx dtmf rx
μtel c
Z on/off
sum
COMBO
RF frame ABTX pegaso
rx tx from pegaso hook
IDU–ODU DWN SAMPL DE–SCR PARTY .
extract + DE –INTERL + DEMUX ck64rx c
+ RS DEC
LINE
ck64tx .
LIOC=
sum
ABRX “free/busy” c
rx tx
from Pegaso
COMBO dtmf rx k_EPS
service kit current
gener
pegaso
MAIN
(hitless )
PEGASO
EXTENSION
k_EPS k_EPS
IDU–ODU MUX
Fig. 105. EOW–party line architecture

insert + RS cod
Z
COMBO
RF frame
DWN SAMPL
rx tx
332
IDU–ODU DE–SCR PARTY
extract + DE –INTERL + DEMUX ck64rx
3DB 06687 BA AA
+ RS DEC
LINE
ck64tx
rx tx
COMBO
service kit
(hitless )
241 / 332
4–2.4.9 EPS logic management
Refer to Fig. 106. on page 243 for an high level scheme (for sw1 / sw2 switches position refer to
Fig. 99. on page 235).

Switch EPS is implemented by:
– a Switch EPS – Input section: due to the use of the special split cable, an input high impedance
circuitry driven by EPS command to match input impedance
– a Switch EPS – TX section: necessary for the hitless switching, because it allows for the transmission
of the same signal over the two RF channels, and to allow replacement of main or extension
sub–racks without loss of traffic. Switches sw1 and sw2 move together;
– a Switch EPS – RX section: when sw6 is closed, sw7 is opened and vice–versa
EPS Input section, TX section and RX section are driven by one single EPS command (K_eps) generated
by Gaia PLD in the Restyling Main Unit after elaborating alarms from both Main and Extension Units and
distribute the EPS command K_EPS.
Both all_eps_main and all_eps_ext alarms are based on related:
– Mux_TX_AL (from Pegaso) / clock alarm detecting a TX failure
– LOF_Demux, Demux failure generated by the demux section of Pegaso; together they give the
general Fail_EPS alarm;
– Overall Card fail
– Los_in_trib: active when ALL the 16 tributaries (or E3/DS3 tributary) are in LOS condition (generated
by HW circuit external to EPS logic)
“Missing” conditions (ext_missing_off / main_miss) are managed in the EPS logics (in Main/Extension)
with highest priorities.
If the Extension Unit is missing or not–missing but switched off (according to ext_missing_off value), the
K_eps command choose Main channel as the EPS active one.
The Extension logic:
– produces a single EPS summarizing alarm from Extension: all_eps_ext
– activates its local K_EPS if the auxiliary 100–pins flat cable is missing (signal main_miss).
When on both channels there is an active alarm of the same weight, the logic leaves in service the channel
currently in service.
Auxiliary signals are used by the logic to decide according to SW configuration status (SW start,
config_SW_KO, .. tbc).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 242 / 332
332
ext_miss_off
Card Fail Main “Gaia” SW Start tbc Config SW Main KO

OC_eps EC/RC
Config SW Ext KO
Fail EPS Main (echo)

(LOFDemux+
Demux Fail) all_eps_main
Rev_EPS via SPI
config SW Main KO config SW Ext KO Process K_EPS
OR
all_mux Main
Sw1
ext_miss_off
(in Pegaso )
all_ck39_main SPIDER
los_in_trb_main Rev_EPS
MAIN
EPS function
+Vloc +Vpar
EXTENSION
main_miss
Card Fail Ext
Fail EPS Ext

NOT
(LOFDemux+
Demux Fail)
Sw2
(in Pegaso )
OR
All Mux Ext all_eps_ext K_EPS (loc)
SPIDER
CK3956Ext
(echo)
LOS INTrb Ext
Extension Logic
Fig. 106. EPS alarms and commands overview
The operator can modify with the CT the state of the switch through the commands listed in Tab. 88.
Tab. 88. EPS switch priority table

Description Priority Action
Lockout 1 When activated the main channel is used
Force Switch 2 When activated the spare channel is used
Automatic Switch 3 Normal operating condition
Manual Switch 4
At CT level there are two ”Manual Switch” : channel 1 and channel 0. Manual Switch command includes
Manual Switch ON and manual Switch OFF command (impulsive type commands); the manual operation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
is applicable if and only if no alarms criteria are present (otherwise it is removed).
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 243 / 332
332
4–2.4.10 RF TX Squelch management
In (1+1) Hot stand–by configuration, the squelch command (K_TPS) is managed by EC and sent from IDU
to ODU by HW wire command (IDU μP ⇒ Pegaso ASIC ⇒ IDU–ODU channel ⇒ Perseo2 ⇒ ODU μP

by which it is managed as interrupt).

Refer to Fig. 107. on page 245.
In Main Unit a summarizing all_tps_main and all_tps_ext (active low) are generated by the TPS logic
(implemented in Gaia PLD) based on:
– an internal all_tx_main based on incoming ALM_TX coming from ODU detecting ODU TX failure
(ODU ch#1 μP ⇒ Perseo2 ch#1 ⇒ ODU–IDU channel by HW command à Pegaso ch#1 ⇒ Gaia
PLD), Card Fail, IDU–ODU cable loss
– all_tx_ext coming from Extension Unit by 100 pins auxiliary flat cable
– ext_missing_off (= Extension missing or not–missing but switched–off) from Extension Unit by 100
pins auxiliary flat cable
The general principle is:
– if the Extension is missing or switched off, then all_tps_main = 1 and all_tps_ext = 0

– if the Extension is not missing and switched–on, Gaia manages the output all_tps_main and
all_tps_ext according to “normal logic” based on all_tx_main and all_tx_ext
If both transmitters have an active alarm, the last active transmitter is kept as active transmitter except in
Revertive Mode where TX#1 is chosen.
Note that the EC avoids switching to ODU while in its re–configuration phase (for example: after ODU#1
replacement in Revertive Mode); this condition is checked by an auxiliary EC–OC exchange between EC
and OC.
The Extension logic:
– generates a single summarizing alarm: all_tx_ext based on ALM_TX_Ext (ODU ch#0 μP ⇒ Perseo2
ch#0 ⇒ ODU–IDU channel by HW command ⇒ Pegaso ch#0 ⇒ Extension logic), Card Fail,
IDU–ODU cable loss
– activates its local K_TPS if the auxiliary flat cable is missing (main_miss)
If the 100–pins auxiliary flat cable is missing while both units are switched–on (to be avoided in the
maintenance procedure), both transmitters are put in antenna.
In (1+1) FD configuration, the ODU RF–TX part is squelched only if a failure in the TX part of the ODU
is detected.
In (1+1) HSB configuration, only one ODU RF–TX part is active. The default working mode is “Revertive
Mode”: the Main ODU is always selected in antenna. The “Not Revertive Mode” can be optionally selected:
the first transmitter to be efficient is the one selected in antenna (disregarding the attribute of Main or
Spare).
The control operations are Lockout, Force, Automatic, Manual squelch with the same priorities described
in Tab. 88. on page 243.
The guaranteed TX switching time in case of ODU failure is less than 700 ms.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 244 / 332
332
MAIN Unit
ext_miss_off
all tps ext

“Gaia” PLD all tps main EC/RC

Card Fail Main

K_TPS
IDU–ODU Main
Cable Loss SPI
ALM Tx Main Logic

SPIDER
SPRI SPI
All_tx_ext
PEGASO ODU
ext_miss_off
Main
ALM Tx Main
TPS function
+V loc +V par EXTENSION

main _miss
Unit
SPI
Card Fail Ext not
IDU –ODU Ext (echo) SPIDER

Cable Loss
OR
ALL Tx Ext
ALM Tx Ext
SPRI SPI
K_TPS ( loc)
Extension ODU
Logic ALM Tx Ext PEGASO Ext
Fig. 107. Hot Stand By configuration: TPS alarms and commands overview
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 245 / 332
332
4–2.4.11 RPS–RX logic management
The devices implementing RPS alignment/logic are powered by the parallel power supply, in order to avoid
synch losses when switching on/off the extension subrack.

The alarm switching criteria are the following (refer to Tab. 89. on page 247 for priorities):
– all_rps1_pr1 (all_rps0_pr1) summarizing priority–1alarm based on:
• HBER alarm indicating an high BER condition based on RS_KO thresholded counting;
• IDU–ODU cable loss
• Fail_RX_ODU: an alarm available from the ODU by means of the IDU–ODU uPs channel
• LOF_RPS: an alarm coming from Pegaso related to a loss from the RX frame recovery block
(from the cable)
– LBER based on corr_RS (=ERR_BIT) signal from the RS–decoder part of Pegaso indicating one
corrected bit by RS. Based on these performance monitoring primitives, the HSW FPGA in Unit
elaborates a Low BER alarm.
– EW_ODU: an alarm coming from the ODU through ‘HW command’ from ODU (Perseo2 ⇒ ODU–IDU
channel ⇒ Pegaso⇒ RPS logic). It is generated by Perseo from MSE information;
When in (1+1) configuration with Extension Unit present (ext_miss not alarmed) and with Hitless Switch
circuitry not in failure (card_fail_rps not active), RX switch positions in Pegaso ch#1 (sw4 in Fig. 99. on
page 235 and Fig. 108. on page 247) and Pegaso ch#0 (sw5 in Fig. 99. on page 235 and Fig. 108. on
page 247) are in the crossed position to receive signals chosen by Hitless Switch logic; if card_fail_rps
alarm is on, the switches position move to receive the direct signals.
If the Extension Unit is missing (ext_miss), Pegaso working mode is (1+0) and the switches position is the
direct one.
If the Main Unit is switched–on and the Extension Unit is switched–off (ext_miss_off), then the Hitless
Switch circuitry is kept supplied in parallel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 246 / 332
332
MAIN extmiss
EC/RC config_SW_rpsKO
Fail ODU Main
“Gaia” PLD
IDU–ODU Main
all_rps1_pr1
Cable Loss
OR
HBER Main
Working mode (1+0)/(1+1) SPIDER
LOF RPS Main
configSWrpsKO (echo)
card_fail_rps OR Rps fail logic sw4 position in Pegaso
PEGASO
ew_odu1
ext_miss
+Vp corr_RS1
ext miss
RPS logic
card_fail_rps
EXTENSION
Fail ODU Ext

from local Spider Working mode
Rev/No Rev and OCrps
IDU–ODU Ext
via SPI
Cable Loss all_rps1_pr1
OR all_rps0_pr1 SPIDER
HBER Ext Rev/NoRev_RPS
RPS
LOGIC
(echo)
LOF RPS Ext Working mode (1+0)/(1+1)
Corr_RS0
(echo)
ew_odu0
K_RPS = sw5 position in Pegaso
ew_odu0
PEGASO
Extension Logic
Corr_RS0
Fig. 108. RPS alarms and commands overview
Among automatic switch criteria the following priorities apply:
Tab. 89. RPS–RX – Automatic switch criteria priorities

Description Priority Comment
HW Failure + HBER 1 all_rps_pr1
LBER 2 based on corr_RS
EW 3 ew_odu
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The alignment condition between two channels is a preliminary condition in case of switching criteria 2
and 3 only.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 247 / 332
332
A channel with priority 1 alarm will be protected by the other channel even if the second has alarms at
priority greater than 1 and so on. If both channels have alarms at the same priority the switch doesn’t apply
if the working mode is ‘not revertive’, otherwise (‘revertive mode’) the main channel keeps/becomes in
service.

If both channels have a failure of the same priority, the protection doesn’t happen and the switch hitless
will stay in the last position if the switch works in not revertive mode, if the switch works in revertive mode
it puts in service channel 1 (Main).
The operator can:
– Force the main channel in service (‘Lockout’ command). The abnormal condition is signalled;
– Force the spare channel in service (‘Force Switch’ command); the abnormal condition is signalled;
– Let the switch normally work according to the switching command produced the internal logic
(‘Automatic Switch command’)
– Perform a manual switch only if the switching criteria are not alarmed and if the alignment condition
is ok (abnormal condition is not signalled in this case). An incoming alarm will abort this working
mode. At CT level there are two ”Manual Switch” : channel 1 and channel 0. Manual Switch command
includes Manual Switch ON and manual Switch OFF commands (impulsive type commands.
The following priority table applies:
Tab. 90. RPS–RX priority table
Description Priority Action / Comment
Lockout RPS RX 1 When activated: the main channel is used
Force Switch RPS RX 2 When activated: the spare channel is used
Automatic Switch RPS RX 3 Normal operating condition
Manual Switch RPS RX 4 It is activated by CT, but executed only if alignment is present
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 248 / 332
332
4–2.4.12 Hitless Switch
Hitless switching is always present in (1+1) configuration. The Hitless switching functionality is
permanently integrated in the Extension Unit (embedded in the Extension mono–board MONOE).
The Hitless Switch main components embedded in Extension mono–board are:
– HSW FPGA: it implements the Hitless switch logic, alignment and switch functions;
– the VCXO loop (working at 39.168MHz for the ETSI market and at 57.12MHz for the ANSI one. The
HSW FPGA receives from Pegaso and provides to Pegaso a 39.168 / 57.12MHz clock
– auxiliary devices for the HSW FPGA:

• n PROM to program locally the FPGA (FPGA down–load is to be supported by JTAG
architecture);
The functional Hitless Switch platform includes:
– the ‘Hitless Aligner and Switch’ block in HSW FPGA in which the two input gross bit flows are aligned
to be switched when the ‘Hitless Logic’ sends the switching command K_RPS.
– the ‘Hitless Logic’ in HSW FPGA collects the alarm switching criteria and monitors the signal that
declares if the two gross bit flows are aligned, the switch is applied by means of the K_RPS command.
– the external VCXO circuit provides the elastic memories read clock to the FPGA.
– the external circuit must be driven to smooth the VCXO control voltage switch; the input voltage to
the VCXO, while switching, must not receive sudden variations that could generate impulsive output
jitter.
– Performance Monitoring after the Hitless Switch Function is requested
[1] Hitless Switch Logic
Refer to para.4–2.4.11 on page 246 for switching alarms criteria.

When a switching event in priority 2 or 3 arrives to the Hitless Switch Logic, the switching command
K_RPS is propagated if and only if the two gross bit flows are aligned (the ok_compa signal is the
alignment state monitored by the Hitless Switch Logic). The alignment condition is not a preliminary
condition to switching in case of alarm priority 1.
[2] Hitless aligner and switch
The ‘Hitless aligner and switch’ block diagram is implemented in HSW FPGA.
The alignment strategy is based on the alignment word detection after the elastic memories (where
the two flows are synchronous and where the bit–difference between the two alignment words is
one–bit multiple) and on a ‘one shot recovering action’ in the sense that the elastic memory is not
forced to move on a bit–by–bit base (this would increase the switching time) but the revealed
synchronisms delay/advance can be directly applied.
The two alignment word detectors, one for each of the gross bit flows, send a synchronism signal
to the aligner block that acts differently depending on its working mode:
• the static alignment procedure consists in forcing to zero the static delays of both ways and
both elastic memories are forced to work at the half value of their dynamics. The objective of
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
this calibration is to align the two input flows with respect to the static path differences due to
different cables lengths. The product request is to recover a maximum cable difference of 50m
(considering both TX and RX side).
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 249 / 332
332
The aligner evaluates the bit difference between the two synchronisms coming from each
alignment word detector and forces this value in the static delays of the anticipated flow. From
then on, that is during the dynamic alignment phase, the static delays keep unchanged. It is
requested to keep the static delay values memorized in the PQ/ECRC flash card (the uP at the

end of each static alignment phase memorizes the value which becomes a default value to be

written in the proper FPGA register at each of the following configuration) so that after any
extension board replacement or at any re–start, the automatic static alignment procedure can
be avoided; only after a new CT request, the static alignment procedure re–applies and the new
delay value is memorized by the uP till the next user’s request. For test purposes, it is requested
the possibility to set the static delay values about both main and spare channel by SPI.
Note that it should be possible to avoid the static alignment procedure if the mux/demux
configuration changes inside the same market (2E1, 4E1, 8E1, 16E1/E3 for the ETSI market,
4DS1, 8DS1, 16DS1, DS3 for the ANSI market) : the EC should be able to transform the last
memorized static delay (linked to the last mux/demux configuration) in the newer static delay
values linked to the newer mux/demux configuration.
The operator can know the alignment/not alignment condition by CT (the EC controls this
condition by polling) and insert for each channel independently, by manual operation, an
arbitrary static delay value in the selectable range.
• during the dynamic alignment phase, the aligner continues detecting the bit difference
between the two synchronisms coming from each alignment word detector and forcing the not
active elastic memory to recover the detected difference in one shot action to reduce the
alignment time. The ok_compa signal provided by the aligner represents the two flows
alignment state necessary to the ‘Hitless logic’ to apply the switching command K_RPS when
necessary.
The purpose of the dynamic alignment is to recover the paths differences due to fading
distortions from which the elastic memory dimensions are derived (± half symbol time referring
to the working symbol frequency).
The K_RPS command implies the switch of the output gross bit flow and the switch of the elastic
memory on which the command to align the active synchronism applies.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 250 / 332
332
4–2.5 ODU functional description
The Outdoor unit is made up of the following sections:

– Modem and IF section

– Local Oscillator
– Tx IF section
– Rx IF section
– RF section
– Diplexer
– DC/DC converter
Modem and IF section Tx IF section RF section

AGC
0 to –30 dB
D
A
To antenna
Synthesizer
RF LO
C IF Rx1 AGC
0 to –30 dB
Perseo LO XN
A Synthesizer
ASIC IF Tx
Loopback
B
RF
L D
A
E
from/to IDU
Diplexer
Rx IF section
I
N
FPGA
T AWY–UX
E Synthesizer
IF Rx2
R
F
A MicroP DC/DC
C Platform
Converter
E
Fig. 109. ODU block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 251 / 332
332
Modem and IF Section
Cable interface

The cable interface between IDU and ODU allows to carry over the coaxial cable:

• the transmit and receive data streams (and interface these streams to the modem on ODU
side),
• the control signals and service channel.
• the DC power supply from the IDU to the ODU
Modem section
The modem section performs the 4 QAM or 16 QAM modulation and demodulation functions, with
embedded digital filtering and equalization. It also incorporates the analog to digital and digital to
analog conversions.
IF section
The IF section incorporates the quadrature modulator (respectively the quadrature demodulator) for
the up–conversion (respectively down–conversion) to a transmit IF (respectively from a receive IF). It
performs base–band filtering and AGC.
IF frequencies are variable in order to cope with all frequency spacing .
Local Oscillator
There is one single Local Oscillator both for transmit and receive RF units.
It is electronically tuned, by software, to the requested frequency, providing frequency agility over a
quarter of the frequency plan.
RF Section (Front End)
• RF transmitter (Tx)
This module up–converts and amplifies the RF signal and sends it to the Diplexer.
The output power is regulated with a feedback loop.
The module incorporates a mute function in case of transmitter failure.
• RF Receiver (Rx)
The receiver performs low noise amplification of the received RF signal and down–converts it
by mixing with the LO in a mixer. It feeds the IF resulting signal to the IF module.
Diplexer
The Diplexer separates the transmit and receive signals at the RF antenna port.
DC/DC Converter
The DC/DC Converter provides the DC/DC conversion to generate the secondary voltages from the
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
remote supply voltage. It interfaces with all active modules of the transceiver.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 252 / 332
332
4–2.6 Loopbacks
Five loopbacks can be performed at different levels.

– 2 near end and 1 far end loopbacks are embedded in the IDU
– 2 near end loopbacks are embedded in the ODU.
Some loopbacks are declared local only; this means that, when the NE receives a loopback request, the
NE executes the request only if it is arriving from the local ECT. This restriction has been introduced to
avoid the risk of a permanent disconnection from the NMS of a remote NE.
4–2.6.1 IDU loopbacks
[1] Near end IDU cable loopback – internal – local only
Near end Near end Far end Far end

IDU ODU ODU IDU
RF
16E1/E3 LIU FRAME MODEM IF –RF IF –RF MODEM FRAME LIU 16E1/E3
Fig. 110. Near end IDU cable loopback
[2] Far end IDU tributary loopback – internal
This loop can be activated separately on each tributary (example: in 16 E1 mode the i–th trib. can
be looped independently from the others).
Assuming that an ECT is connected to the station A, the NE A uses the dedicated link connection
to activate/deactivate this loop on the remote station B. In this way, from station A, it is possible to
activate/deactivate this loop without accessing the NE B through a RECT.
It is not forbidden (even if not considered here) to use a RECT from station B to activate this loop.

IDU ODU ODU IDU
RF
Station A Station B
Fig. 111. Far end IDU tributary loopback

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 253 / 332
332
[3] Near end tributary loopback – line
It can be activated separately on each tributary (example: in 16 E1 mode the i–th trib. can be looped
independently from the others).

It is not forbidden (even if not considered here) to use a RECT from station B to activate this loop.
Nearend Nearend Far end Far end

IDU ODU ODU IDU
RF
Station A Station B
Fig. 112. Near end tributary loopback
4–2.6.2 ODU loopbacks
[1] Near end ODU cable loopback – internal – local only

IDU ODU ODU IDU
RF
Fig. 113. Near end ODU cable loopback
It is executed by the NE only if it sent by the local ECT.
[2] Near end RF loopback – internal – local only
Taking into account the HW implementation of the RF loopback, it is not necessary to switch off the
remote transmitter during a local RF loopback.
Nearend Nearend Far end Far end

IDU ODU ODU IDU
RF
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 114. Near end RF loopback
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 254 / 332
332
The RF loopback is executed by the NE only by the local ECT.
The main principle is described below:

Tx IF section RF section
15dBcoupling
PA
RF LO
IF Rx1
Variable Voff / Von
LO XN attenuator
LNA
15dBcoupling
Rx IF section
675MHz =IF Tx
Fig. 115. RF loopback scheme
– At the output of the RF section, a part of the Tx signal is taken and applied to the Rx chain through
a variable attenuator and couplers. After Rx down conversion, the frequency of the recovered IF
signal is equal to the frequency of IF Tx signal. The IF Rx1 synthesizer (on the LO section) is then
converted to the right frequency to recover 675 MHz signal after the second down conversion.
– The RF loopback is activated when “Von” is applied to the variable attenuator. Otherwise, “Voff”
setting guarantees a good Tx/Rx isolation.
– The RF loopback feature is guaranteed from nominal output power down to 10 dB under the nominal
output power.
The signal that is sent after the loopbacks is the same signal that had been received (loop and continue).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 255 / 332
332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
332
3DB 06687 BA AA
256 / 332
4–3 IDU DATA INTERFACE PLUG–IN
Ethernet user data transport is possible with an optional dedicated plug–in which supports 2 Ethernet
Accesses (they can be 10BASE–T or 100BASE–T).
This chapter describes in detail the implementation and working environment of the Ethernet accesses.
4–3.1 Data plug–in block diagram
In Fig. 116. below it is sketched a block diagram of the Data Plug–in. On board there are:
– Medusa FPGA: it implements a multiplexing of the two Ethernet accesses into a serial bit stream,
suitable for the communication with the Pegaso ASIC (and viceversa);
– auxiliary devices for Medusa:
• n PROM to program Medusa at power up;
• a suitable external RAM;
– a connector for the lab. downloading of the PROMs;
– in order to download the PROMs from the PQ–ECRC: a suitable circuit for the conversion
(SPI<=>JTAG);
– a remote inventory;
– a double 10/100 Ethernet interface full–duplex working.
Data plug–in
RAM–TX
512Kx18
Connector Programming
@ power on
TX towards Pegaso
SW upgrade D
MUX n x PROM Medusa
CK
FPGA
RX from Pegaso
MII protocol
SPI => JTAG Rem.Inv.
Spider
Backplane
SPI bus
XO
25 MHz
2x
2 x 10/100 Eth. 10/100 Ethernet
Interface
LEDs
Fig. 116. Data plug–in block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 257 / 332
332
4–3.2 Ethernet overview
The “Ethernet data interface” plug–in is conceived to transport Ethernet frames (10BASE–T and
100BASE–T) compliant to the IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD specification inside 9400AWY proprietary PDH

frame.

The following Tab. 91. summarizes the main 10BASE–T and 100BASE–T parameters:
Tab. 91. 10BASE–T and 100BASE–T main parameters
Parameter Description 10BASE–T 100BASE–T
Transmission speed 10 Mb/s 100 Mb/s
Bit time 100 ns 10 ns
Waiting time before a

Slot time 512 bit (51.2 μs) 512 bit (5.12 μs)
re– transmission
Min. distance between

Inter packet gap (IPG) 9.6 μs 0.96 μs
two packets
Max frame size 1522 bytes 1522 bytes
Min frame size 64 bytes 64 bytes
The IEEE 802.3 Ethernet frame format (from 64 to 1518 bytes plus Preamble and Start Frame Delimiter)
is shown in Fig. 117. on page 259, and it is composed by the :
– Preamble: it is a 7–bytes sequence (alternatively 1 and 0) used for clock synchronization with the
received frame;
– Start Frame Delimiter: it is the 10101011 sequence which defines the beginning of the frame;
– Source Address: it identifies the MAC address of the station from which the frame was initiated;
– Destination Address Field: it identifies the station(s) for which the frame is intended. It may be an
individual or multicast address, depending on the LSB value.
– Length/Type Field: these 2–bytes may indicate the number of MAC client data bytes contained in the
Data Field (Length interpretation) or (if the value is equal or greater than 1500) the nature of the
higher–level protocols requesting Ethernet services (Type interpretation).
– MAC Client Data and Pad Field: they contain a sequence of octets going from 46 to 1500 (46 is the
minimum size required for correct CSMA/CD protocol operation). If necessary, the data field is
extended by appending extra–bytes (that is a pad) to reach the minimum packet size (64 bytes).
– Frame Check Sequence: a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) is used by the transmit and receive
algorithm to generate this 4–bytes–CRC field; it is computed as a function of all the frame except the
preamble and SFD fields (and FCS obviously).
Note that the end frame delimiter doesn’t exist because this function is done by the Inter Frame Gap (IFG),
the minimum distance between two packets transmission.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 258 / 332
332
Octets Ethernet MAC Frame
7 Preamble
1 Start of Frame Delimiter

6 Destination Address (DA)

6 Source Address (SA)
2 Lenght/Type
46 MAC client data

Π Pad
1500
Frame Check Sequence (FCS)
4
Bit # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 117. Ethernet MAC frame fields
4–3.3 Applications
The typical application for the “Ethernet user data” is the connection of two user LANs by means of two
external routers and a PDH radio link (see figures in para.A.3.2 on page 290).
The following has to be considered:
– Ethernet transport over PDH is considered only for the access part of the network => the only
implemented connection is point–to–point;
– flexibility of Ethernet throughput;
– mixed mode: data traffic (Ethernet) can be mixed with voice traffic (nxE1, E3, nxDS1, DS3);
– 10BaseT – 100 BaseTX with autonegotiation is the interface type;
– no MAC address filtering: all what is received from the line is transmitted. Local traffic can be rerouted
only by an external switch/router;
– bandwidth compression: a mechanism of bandwidth compression is implemented, because the

bandwidth of a PDH link is in general less than the max bandwidth of the Ethernet interfaces.
– flow control towards the Ethernet source.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 259 / 332
332
4–3.4 Integration with the PDH mux/demux
Two functions play an essential role in the Ethernet data transport: the standard PDH mux/demux (carried
out by Pegaso ASIC in IDU Main unit) and the data encapsulation/buffering (carried out by Medusa FPGA

in Ethernet plug–in).

The two functions have been decoupled as much as possible:
– the standard PDH mux/demux offers a transport capability to the data traffic, but doesn’t know how
many data interfaces are present (and what type);
– the data encapsulation/buffering uses the transport capability offered by the mux, but doesn’t know
what is the current mux type/frame.
In Fig. 118. below this mechanism is described, using the 8E1 mux as an example.
The 8E1 Framing block is implemented into the Pegaso ASIC, the Ethernet Data Encapsulation block is
implemented into the Medusa FPGA of the Data plug–in. The connection between the two functions is
simply realized with three wires:
– Data valid: Pegaso tells to Medusa when it is possible to insert Ethernet data into the PDH frame
– Frame bit CLK: the clock for the transmission of Ethernet bits;
– Data: Ethernet bits to be inserted into the PDH frame.
In this way it is easily possible to implement any combination of voice (E1, DS1) and data, as depicted in
Tab. 92. on page 261.
#1
E1 Stuffing
#2
E1 Stuffing
8E1–MUX Example ooo ooo ooo
E1 #8
Stuffing
8E1
19.4 Mbit/s
Framing
Data
10/100 BaseT Ethernet Data
(19.4 MHz) Frame bit CLK
10/100 BaseT Encapsulation Data valid
8E1Frame
Bit rate ≈19.4 Mb/s
u 8E1 Data Valid
u 4E1 + “Data@8Mb/s” Data Valid
u “Data @16Mb/s” Data Valid
Fig. 118. Ethernet data – 8E1 example

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 260 / 332
332
Tab. 92. Data/voice mix (ETSI)
NE CONFIGURATION VOICE DATA
1 E1 1 E1
2 E1 – 2 E1
2 E1 –
1 E1 3 E1
2 E1 2 E1
4 E1 3 E1 1 E1
4 E1 –
– 4 E1
1 E1 7 E1
2 E1 6 E1
3 E1 5 E1
4 E1 4 E1
8 E1 5 E1 3 E1
6 E1 2 E1
7 E1 1 E1
8 E1 –
– 8 E1
1E1 15E1
2E1 14E1
3E1 13E1
4E1 12E1
16E1 5E1 11E1
6E1 10E1
7E1 9E1
8E1 8E1
– 16E1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 261 / 332
332
4–3.5 Bandwidth compression
A compression mechanism is necessary, because (with a Fast Ethernet interface) the PDH transport
capability is always less than the maximum input bit rate (see Fig. 119. below).

100 Mb/s 1 Fast
32 Mb/s
Ethernet PDH
28 MHz RF channel
100 Mb/s
1 Fast
Ethernet
8 Mb/s
PDH 7 MHz RF channel
Fig. 119. Bandwidth compression examples for the 100BASE–T case
Note also that with a 10BaseT input interface the PDH transport capability can be sometimes larger and
sometimes smaller than the maximum input bit rate (see Fig. 120. below) .
32 Mb/s
PDH
20 Mb/s
2 Ethernet 28 MHz RF channel

20 Mb/s
8 Mb/s
2 Ethernet
PDH 7 MHz RF channel
16 Mb/s
10 Mb/s
PDH
1 Ethernet 14 MHz RF channel
Fig. 120. Bandwidth compression examples in the 10BASE–T case
Given a gross bit rate at the output of the Mux, any possible combination of voice and data can be realized.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 262 / 332
332
4–3.6 Ethernet Data management supported by ULS
This paragraph summarizes the features supported by ULS in terms of Ethernet Physical/Port interface
and GFP management.
[1] Ethernet Physical Interface Layer
The Ethernet interfaces can be configured according to two different modes:
• manual (or default type) mode (auto–negotiation is disabled)
• or automatic mode (auto–negotiation is enabled). In automatic mode a mechanism of

auto–sensing (the auto–negotiation) of the parameters involved is activated, these parameters
are negotiated with the remote Ethernet interface.
The following items resume the features supported by ULS in terms of Ethernet Physical interface
management:
• the rate (10 or 100 Mb/s) is always configurable independently from the modality (manual or
automatic)
• the directionality is always full–duplex (no carrier control mechanism is implemented to use the
half–duplex mode)
• when the auto–negotiation process fails or when the auto–negotiation parameters are
changed, the auto–negotiation restart command has to be performed in order to have new
configured parameters effective.
• Jabber function (10Base–T only) is managed.
[2] Ethernet Port Layer
The following items resume the features supported by ULS in terms of Ethernet Port layer
management:
• in case of incoming Ethernet traffic leading to exhaustion of buffers on input queues, PAUSE
frames are transmitted in order to slow down remote peer MAC layer. The Ethernet Flow
Control (EFC) is always active, both when the auto–negotiation is enabled and when it is
disabled. Length of time (number of Quanta) for which EFC asks to inhibit data frame
transmission is not managed at SNMP interface (fixed value not defined yet).
• in case of remote peer MAC layer without EFC feature, the overflow of the input queues is
required to lead to discard any further received MAC frames: a correct frame received and
discarded because of an input queues overflow, is not counted as a received frame.
• total transparency towards the 802.1Q
• Ethernet corrupted frames (TX and RX side independently) can be discarded or forwarded to
the addressed destination, according to the related SNMP manager request.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 263 / 332
332
[3] GFP Layer
The following items resume the features supported (or not supported) by ULS in terms of GFP
management:

• GFP payload extension header is fixed (linear extension header): two independent FE signals
are transported onto a single PDH path.
• GFP frame validity checks is not supported (optional FCS is not used)
• GFP defect handling and reporting procedures are not supported
Defects supported are:
• Loss Of Frame (LOF)
• Client Signal Fail (CSF). The CSF is reported when CSF GFP frames are detected in rx side
(these frames are inserted as consequence of a remote link down defect (LOS)).
[4] Loop–back
No loopbacks are available for Ethernet tributaries.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 264 / 332
332
4–3.7 Performance Monitoring
In Medusa FPGA TX and RX side it is to be possible to monitor the Ethernet frames traffic by means of
counters.
Customer Box: either LAN Router or Switch
9400AWY PDH Radio (IDU+ODU)
ETHERNET QoS
10/100 Ethernet COUNTERS 10/100 Ethernet
Fig. 121. Ethernet Quality of Service counters location
Supported physical Interface counters are:
– symbol error
– media available
– jabber state
– false carrier
Medusa FPGA TX–side (from the Ethernet interface to the radio) has to provide the following Ethernet
Quality of Service parameters for each access point:
– Total Received Correct Octets (TRCO);

– Total Received Correct Frames (TRCF);
– Total Received Errored Frames (TRSEF)
– Total Discarded Frames (TDF)
Medusa FPGA RX–side (from the de–encapsulation to the Ethernet interface) has to provide the following
Ethernet Quality of Service parameters for each destination point:
– Total Received Correct Ethernet frames Octets (TRCO);

– Total Received Correct Ethernet Frames (TRCF);
– Total Transmitted Ethernet Octets (TTO);
– Total Transmitted Ethernet Frames (TTF);
– Total Received Service Errored Frames (TRSEF);
– Total Discarded Frames (TDF)
The cited counters are periodically checked and reset by the uP which is in charge of memorizing the QoS
statistics on a more expanded temporal window till the next uP counters reset requested by the user.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 265 / 332
332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
332
3DB 06687 BA AA
266 / 332
4–4 NETWORK MANAGEMENT AND INTERWORKING
The Alcatel 9400 Terminal features very advanced supervisory functions, which are optimized for
operation and maintenance, offering solutions from very small to very large networks in an evolutionary
path:
– for local management of a single link (local and remote equipment), an F interface to a craft terminal
(ECT) is provided, allowing diagnostic and configuration of the network elements through a user
friendly man–machine interface (Windows_ environment),
– for small to medium sized networks, from isolated hops up to networks composed of a maximum
128 equipment, based on RECT
– for more complex networks composed of numerous links integrated in a transport network a global
solution is proposed, operating with one or more Operation Systems on workstations, with network
management capabilities in fault locations, performance measurements, configuration and security
management.
The network management protocol used is SNMP(Simple Network Management Protocol):
ALCATEL proposes a concept of NMS to manage the 9400AWY Indoor–Outdoor equipment, using a
hierarchical management structure (Management Information Base MIB) based on the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP).
The ALCATEL 9400AWY –series SNMP Terminals produce the following main advantages:
– Open protocol:
It provides a standardized open protocol; its management interface allowing management by other
OS vendors or integration in Alcatel TMN through a TCP–IP data communication network.
– Re–routing capability :
It benefits of the TCP–IP re–routing capability even in the stand–alone management solution.
This means that the Supervision Bus can be looped or meshed (and it is recommended to do so when
possible) via NMS interfaces, using a dedicated Service Channel of the Transmission Equipment or
external leased lines (synchronous RS485/V11 at 64 Kbit/s) or using a time slot of E1 tributary.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 267 / 332
332
4–4.1 Local monitoring: ECT
The local craft terminal (ECT) allows to access different domains, i.e.:

– Configuration

– Diagnosis
– Equipment
– External points
– Line interface
– Performance
– Radio
– Protection Schemes
– Loopback
– Software Download
4–4.1.1 Security management
The security management allows to define the profile operator in order to access to all the Craft Terminal
functionality according to four different profiles:
– Administrator
– Constructor
– Operator
– Viewer: no modification are allowed
To facilitate the system configuration to the operator, a Wizard tool is used; this tool can be activated from
the menu bar.
Refer to the specific CT Operator’s Handbook for further information.
4–4.2 Small/medium sized networks: RECT
For networks up to 128 Network Elements (called cluster), a stand–alone solution based on RECT
functionality is available. It allows to access the remote NE, display the global synthesis view as well as
the NE view of each equipment of the cluster.
All applications available in the local management chapter are available for each Network Element of the
Cluster
The view indicates:
– the possibility of having a map composed of up to 128 NE
– that this view is available for each NE , each sub–map and each map
– that for each selected NE (on the left) there is the indication on the right of how many alarm are active
(2 Major, 2 Minor, 1 Warning); the status of the single NE (Major alarm) is propagated to the superior
Sub–map up to map.
– the possibility of executing the ”Log in” command to further zoom inside the NE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 268 / 332
332
4–4.3 Large mixed network: TMN
For large/mixed networks composed of 9400AWY SNMP terminals, associated with other types of
equipment, 2 types of application are proposed:
– The first application is the one allowing the Customer, who wants to have a multi–vendor environment
at the Network Element level, to homogenize the NE interface, whoever the equipment provider
might be.
– The second application is the one where the NMS is fully provided by ALCATEL. The 9400AWY
SNMP terminals will be managed by the ALCATEL Operation System 1353NM together with other
type of NE’s (SDH radios, ADM ) even if they are using different protocols as Q3 .
The 1353NM provides real time monitoring and controls of all Network Elements entering in the
configuration of the managed network.
The following picture illustrates the two applications proposed for the management of the ALCATEL
9400AWY/SNMP equipment.
Multi–vendor Multi–vendor
environment environment
OS/OS
SNMP
OS Alcatel
1353NM
SNMP
9400 Indoor–Outdoor 9400 Indoor–Outdoor
Application 1 Application 2
Fig. 122. TMN with SNMP

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 269 / 332
332
4–4.4 1353NM operation system
The 1353NM Operation System provides the Network Element Management Functions according to
ITU–T M3010 functional areas, as the :

– Configuration management.
– Alarm and Control management.
– Performance management.
– Security management.
and the System Functions, as the :
– Database management.
– System Backup and Restore.
– Process and software management.
– Start–up and stop.
– Filter on research.
– Graphical User Interface.
The Alcatel 9400AWY system features a leading concept of network management, using either an SNMP
agent over TCP/IP.
With SNMP, the NE can be placed in a multi–vendor environment and managed by both Alcatel 1300
equipment or other NMS providers.
Whatever the size of the network, appropriate solutions can be carried out on an evolution path.
Stand–alone solutions may rely solely on the integrated management platform in the 9400AWY. This
allows reporting alarms, initiating controls and gathering performance information via a craft terminal. This
user–friendly management system requires only a PC in a Windows(TM) environment. Each 9400AWY
terminal is able to support remote craft functionality independently or in cooperation with a master NMS.
Interoperability with other Alcatel urban radios at the user interface level and at the network management
level is guaranteed, as well as with other Alcatel transmission products.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 270 / 332
332
4–4.5 Use of NMS channels
The NMS channels are three 64 kbit/s channels, used for supervisory purposes. These channels use the
IP/PPP protocol.
Two NMS channels (NMS–V11 and NMS–G703) are used to connect other equipment in the same station.
Another NMS channel (NMS–RF) is used to connect another equipment in the radio remote station.
4–4.5.1 NMS–V11 and NMS–G703 channels
Through these two channels the NE can exchange NMS management messages towards:
– other 9400AWY NEs;
– a router towards the OS;
– Melodie NEs. In this case only TCP/IP transport is offered to the Melodie NEs.
The NMS_V11 channel is a 64 kbit/s; its working mode can be selected between:
– DTE: ”data in” and ”data out” must be synchronous, data out being the slave,
– Asynchronous: Tx and Rx are totally asynchronous (this mode includes DCE behavior).
The NMS_G703 channel is a 64 kbit/s; its working mode can be selected between:
– DTE: G703 data in and G703 data out have to be synchronous, G703 data out being the slave,
– asynchronous: G703 data in and G703 data out are totally asynchronous (this mode includes DCE
behavior),
– ”In–frame”: this configuration both disables the NMS_G703 interface and enables the
insertion/extraction into/from the first E1 of the 64Kbit/s channel coming–from/towards the uP. The
insertion/extraction is relative to the first slot of the first tributary even if there is the possibility in the
IDU ASIC to configure the desired slot. This setting is not applicable with unframed E1.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 271 / 332
332
64Kb/s RS422 co –dir
or
64Kb/s G703
9400AWY 9400AWY
nms nms
(only TCP/IP transport)

Melodie 9400AWY
nms nms
(only TCP/IP transport)

64Kb/s G703 64Kb/s RS422 co –dir
OS 9400AWY 9400AWY Melodie
Eth Eth nms nms nms nms
OS
Eth
Ethernet 9400AWY
transport Eth
CT
Eth
64Kb/s 64Kb/s
G703 G703
OS Router (USY) (USY) 9400AWY
Eth Eth nms

or
64Kb/s G703
OS Router 9400AWY
Eth Eth nms
Fig. 123. Possible NMS connections

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. Another possibility, not shown in the above figure, is the NMS channel transported in a timeslot
of a 2 Mbit/s tributary signal, while the NMS–G703 interface is disabled.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 272 / 332
332
4–4.5.2 NMS–RF channel
The NMS–RF channel is a communication channel inserted in a 64 kbit/s channel of the radio aggregate
frame. The channel uses the IP/ PPP protocol.
Through the NMS–RF channel the NE can exchange management messages with a remote OS (or
Remote Craft Terminal).
Refer to the following figure, describing two adjacent RF NE (a and b) directly connected with one NMS–RF
channel: there is a dedicated link connection between NE a and NE b. ”Dedicated link connection” means
that each NE knows the IP address of the adjacent RF NE (i.e.: NE a knows the IP address of NE b and
viceversa).
NMS RF NMS RF NMS RF
NMS_V11
NE … NE a NE b NE …
NMS_V11
NMS_G703 NMS RF
NE …
Station 1 Station 2
ECT
Fig. 124. Station connected by the NMS–RF channel

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 273 / 332
332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
332
3DB 06687 BA AA
274 / 332
4–5 ALARMS
This chapter describes the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 alarms managed in the SWP versions this handbook issue
refers to.
N.B. As far as the alarm roots causing IDU Main Unit’s leds RDI and LDI turning on are concerned,
please refer to para.2–4.4.13 on page 121.
4–5.1 Alarms Provided by Item HW
Legend:
• SA = always Service Affecting
• SAac = Service Affecting when the alarm is present on the active channel, Not Service Affecting
when it is present on the stand–by channel
• NSA = always Not Service Affecting

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 275 / 332
332
4–5.1.1 IDU Alarms
Service
Equipment Affecting

Equipment Type Alarm Description

Evaluation

Expected
1+0 1+1
Main Unit ±24 V Supply M24S SAac
Cable Loss IDU SA
(note 3)
Main Unit ±48/±60
48/ 60 V SAac
Range Supply Card Fail SA
(note 2)
M4860S
SAac
Equipment Mismatch SA
(note 2)
E1 RDI egressing (Rx side) (note 1) NSA NSA
E1 RDI ingressing (Tx side) (note 1) NSA NSA
SAac
High BER SA
(note 3)
Housekeeping Alarm NSA NSA
Lan Failure NSA NSA
Link Identifier Mismatch SA SA
Loss of Frame of PDH tributary
SA SA
ingressing (Tx side) (note 1)
SA SA
egressing (Rx side) (note 1)
SAac
Loss of Frame of PDH signal Radio side SA
(note 3)
Loss of Signal of PDH tributary SA SA
Loss of 64kbit/s G.703 Auxiliary Signal NSA NSA
Loss of 64kbit/s G.703 NMS Signal
NSA NSA
(DTE and Asynchronous mode only)
Low BER NSA NSA
PDH–AIS egressing (Rx side) SA SA
PDH–AIS ingressing (Tx side) SA SA
PPP IP Fail NSA NSA
SAac
TCA on Hop Section SA
(note 3)
TCA on Link Section (note 3) – SA
SAac
UAT on Hop Section SA
(note 3)
UAT on Link Section (note 3) – SA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 276 / 332
332
Service
Equipment Affecting
Equipment Type Alarm Description Evaluation
Expected
1+0 1+1
Extension Unit ±24 V E24S SAac

Cable Loss IDU –
Supply (note 3)
SAac
Extension Unit ±48/±60 E4860S Card Fail –
(note 2)
V Range Supply
SAac
Card Missing –
(note 2)
SAac
Equipment Mismatch –
(note 2)
E1 RDI egressing (Rx side) (note 1) – NSA
E1 RDI ingressing (Tx side) (note 1) – NSA
SAac
High BER –
(note 3)
Link Identifier Mismatch – SA
Loss of Alignment – NSA
– SA
ingressing (Tx side) (note 1)
– SA
egressing (Rx side) (note 1)
SAac
Loss of Frame of PDH signal Radio side –
(note 3)
Loss of Signal of PDH tributary – SA
Loss of 64kbit/s G.703 Auxiliary Signal – NSA
Loss of 64kbit/s G.703 NMS Signal
– NSA
(DTE and Asynchronous mode only)
Low BER – NSA
PDH–AIS egressing (Rx side) – SA
PDH–AIS ingressing (Tx side) – SA
SAac
TCA on Hop Section –
(note 3)
TCA on Link Section – SA
SAac
UAT on Hop Section –
(note 3)
UAT on Link Section – SA
Unconfigured Equipment – NSA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 277 / 332
332
Service
Equipment Affecting
Equipment Type Alarm Description Evaluation
Expected

1+0 1+1

Ethernet unit P2DATAS Card Fail SA SA
Card Missing SA SA
Client Signal Fail egressing (Rx side) NSA NSA
Loss of Signal on Ethernet port (link
SA SA
down)
Loss of GFP on Ethernet port egressing
SA SA
(Rx side)
Unconfigured Equipment NSA NSA
9–16xE1/DS1 plug–in P8E1DS1 SAac
Card Fail SA
unit (note 2)
SAac
1xE3/DS3 plug–in unit P1E3DS3 Card Missing SA
(note 2)
SAac
Equipment Mismatch SA
(note 2)
Loss of Signal of PDH tributary SA SA
Unconfigured Equipment NSA NSA
(note 1) Only in case of framed tributaries.
(note 2) The active channel must be referred to the EPS protection.
(note 3) The active channel must be referred to the RPS protection.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 278 / 332
332
4–5.1.2 ODU Alarms
Service Affecting
Equipment Evaluation
Equipment Type Alarm Description

Expected 1+1 1+1

1+0
FD HST
ODU ETSI ODU–E ATPC Loop NSA NSA NSA
Card Fail SA SAac SAac
ODU ANSI ODU–A
Demodulation Function Failure (note 4) SA SAac SAac
Early Warning (note 8) – NSA NSA
Equipment Mismatch SA SAac SAac
Loss of Signal for the Modulation Function
SA NSA SAac
(note 2)
Modulation Function Failure (note 7) SA NSA SAac
ODU not responding (note 1) SA SAac SAac
Provisioned Frequency incompatible with
SA SAac SAac
actual HW
Provisioned Tx Power incompatible with
NSA NSA NSA
actual HW
Receiving Function Failure (note 3) SA SAac SAac
Software Version Mismatch NSA NSA NSA
Stand–by Software Version Mismatch NSA NSA NSA
Transmission Function Failure (note 5) SA NSA SAac
Unconfigured Equipment (note 6) NSA NSA NSA
Firmware Download in progress NSA NSA NSA
N.B. The active channel must be referred to the RPS, except for the transmission alarms in 1+1 HST
configurations (for these alarms the active channel must be referred to TPS).
(note 1) This alarm represents a communication problem with the ODU (i.e. IDU–ODU cable failure,
ODU missing, ODU power problem).
(note 2) Loss of Signal for the Modulation Function represents the “missing of data at the cable input of
the ODU”.
(note 3) Receiving Function Failure represents the “received power alarm”.
(note 4) Demodulation Function Failure represents the “synchronization missing at receive side alarm”.
(note 5) Transmission Function Failure represents the “transmitted power alarm”.
(note 6) Only for ODU Ch#0 in 1+1 configurations.
(note 7) Modulation Function Failure represents the “synchronization missing at transmission side
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
alarm”.
(note 8) Only in the 1+1 configurations with Hitless Switch.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 279 / 332
332
4–5.2 Alarm severity
The following tables provide the content of the four predefined ASAPs (Alarm Severity Assignment
Profiles). As the notification types (probable causes) included in the predefined ASAPs are configuration

dependent, the “Config.” column defines the configurations in which the probable cause are included.

If no indication is provided means that the probable cause must be included in all the configurations.
The severity defined in the following tables concerns the 1+1 configurations (when needed, the severity
for SA and NSA is different).
As general rule the severity for 1+0 configurations is obtained using the SA severity also for the NSA one
(if they are different). The only exception is the LossOfSignal probable cause, in fact in this case different
severity must be used for LOS of the PDH tributaries (SA) and of the auxiliary and NMS signals (NSA).
ASAP#1 (No Alarm) is not reported in these tables: the severity of all the notification types (probable
causes) is always NAL independently from the service dependency (SA and NSA).
Legend:
• ETH: only in Ethernet configurations (1+0, 1+1)
• 1+1:only in 1+1 configurations
• NAL: Non ALarm
• MAJ: MAJor
• MIN: MINor
• WAR: WARning
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 280 / 332
332
4–5.2.1 Equipment Alarms
Primary Alarms No Remote Alarms All Alarms

Notification Type ASAP#2 ASAP#3 ASAP#4

SA NSA SA NSA SA NSA
HousekeepingAlarm WAR WAR MIN MIN MAJ MAJ
InternalCommunicationProblem MAJ MIN MAJ MIN MAJ MIN
LanFailure MIN MIN WAR WAR MIN MIN
RemoteNEFailure NAL NAL NAL NAL WAR WAR
ReplaceableUnitMissing MAJ MIN MAJ MIN MAJ MIN
ReplaceableUnitProblem MAJ MIN MAJ MIN MAJ MIN
ReplaceableUnitTypeMismatch MAJ MIN MAJ MIN MAJ MIN
StandByVersionMismatch WAR WAR WAR WAR WAR WAR
UnconfiguredEquipmentPresent WAR WAR WAR WAR WAR WAR
VersionMismatch MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 281 / 332
332
4–5.2.2 Communication Alarms
Primary Alarms No Remote All Alarms

Notification Type Config. ASAP#2 Alarms ASAP#3 ASAP#4

SA NSA SA NSA SA NSA
Ais NAL NAL NAL NAL MAJ MIN
AtpcLoopProblem MIN MIN WAR WAR MIN MIN
CableLOS MAJ MIN MAJ MIN MAJ MIN
DemFail MAJ MIN MAJ MIN MAJ MIN
EarlyWarning NAL NAL WAR WAR WAR WAR
HighBER MIN WAR MIN WAR MIN WAR
IncompatibleFrequency MAJ MIN MAJ MIN MAJ MIN
IncompatiblePTX WAR WAR WAR WAR WAR WAR
LinkIdentifierMismatch MAJ MIN MAJ MIN MAJ MIN
LossOfAlignment 1+1 MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN
LossOfFrame MAJ MIN MAJ MIN MAJ MIN
LossOfSignal MAJ MIN MAJ MIN MAJ MIN
ModLOS MAJ MIN MAJ MIN MAJ MIN
PPPFail MIN WAR MIN WAR MIN WAR
RemoteDefectIndication NAL NAL NAL NAL WAR WAR
RxFail MAJ MIN MAJ MIN MAJ MIN
ThresholdCross MAJ MIN MAJ MIN MAJ MIN
TxFail MAJ MIN MAJ MIN MAJ MIN
UnavailableTime MAJ MIN MAJ MIN MAJ MIN
ModFail MAJ MIN MAJ MIN MAJ MIN

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 282 / 332
332
SECTION 5: APPENDICES

Appendix A – Introduction to the 9400AWY radio system family

285
It explains briefly the characteristics of the 9400AWY equipment family.
Appendix B – Safety–EMC–ESD norms and equipment labelling

It describes the equipment labelling and the norms mandatory or suggested that must
297
be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment.
Moreover the labels affixed to the IDU and ODU equipment are described.
Appendix C – Documentation guide

It contains all information regarding this handbook (purpose, applicability, history) and
309
the Customer Documentation set it belongs to, in particular the list of the handbooks
the Operators should have in order to carry out the required operations.
Appendix D – List of symbols and abbreviations 321
In all appendices, possible references to DS1 and DS3 interfaces (that are not supported by the
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 283 / 332
332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
332
3DB 06687 BA AA
284 / 332
APPENDIX A : INTRODUCTION TO THE 9400AWY RADIO SYSTEM FAMILY
This Appendix explains briefly the characteristics of the 9400 AWY equipment family; it includes the
following main sub–paragraphs:

– para.A.1 – General description, below

– para.A.2 – Products of the 9400AWY family, on page 286
– para.A.3 – 9400AWY system usage in MW links and networks, on page 286
– para.A.4 – 9400AWY versions, on page 293
– para.A.5 – Equipment structure, on page 294
– para.A.6 – Capacities and modulations, on page 295
– para.A.7 – Radio compatibility versus 9400UX, on page 296
A.1 : General description
The Alcatel 9400AWY is a family of digital Point–to–Point microwave radio systems designed to satisfy
the various digital transmission needs of public and private networks, for a large range of applications.
Designed with mobile networks in mind, its scalability and flexibility will satisfy the numerous digital
transmission needs of cellular mobile networks and microcellular networks backhauling (2G, 2.5G and
3G).
Also suitable for public and private networks for multiple applications, such as, private data networks
(WAN, LAN), utility networks, and others.
The PDH radio represents an attractive solution for the above needs due to radio intrinsic characteristics
as:
• easy and fast deployment
• effective solution in difficult geographical area
• very low cost of the complete network
• security against physical damages
• reuse of existing frequency plan
• progressive capital investment according to traffic needs
The design of Alcatel 9400AWY radios is driven by a few fundamental objectives as:
• network flexibility
• easiness of management
• interoperability, integration and co–operation with other different types of network elements
(radio or fibre based)
The Alcatel 9400AWY is a complete homogeneous family of PDH Point–to–Point low and medium
capacity microwave link, fully integrated in the last SDH 9600LSY and 9600USY families for world wide
applications in all frequency bands starting at 7/8 GHz up to 38GHz
The family supports radio transmission of NxE1/DS1 and E3/DS3 signals in various configurations and
with a full set of plesiochronous user interfaces while a dedicated plug–in allows for the “Ethernet user
data” transport of 10/100BT data flows (available starting from R2.0).
The 9400 AWY family is fully compliant to the relevant ITU–T/ITU–R/ETSI/ANSI standards including EMC
and safety. A special attention was also put to those standards concerning the network management and
its integration into PDH based network.
The compatibility between the new urban link generation and the previous one (9400UX) is guaranteed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
at user interface and frequency arrangement level while no channels extension of already installed
9400UX systems are possible with new generation equipment. For more details regarding backward
compatibility see para.A.7 on page 296.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 285 / 332
332
A.2 : Products of the 9400AWY family
The 9400AWY family comprises the following products, specialized for frequency bands:

PRODUCT BAND (GHz)
9470AWY 7&8
9411AWY 11
9413AWY 13
9415AWY 15
9418AWY 18
9423AWY 23
9425AWY 25
9428AWY 28
9432AWY 32
9438AWY 38
A.3 : 9400AWY system usage in MW links and networks
In this paragraph, with the aid of a few figures, are illustrated the main application in MW links and networks
for the equipment belonging to the 9400AWY family.
A.3.1 : Radio Hop length
Typically, the distances achieved are:
– from 5 to 30 km for the microwave frequencies (13 to 18 GHz)

– from a few hundred meters up to 10 km for the millimeter wave frequencies (23 to 38 GHz)
Thanks to the flexible split mount structure and considering the possible usage of very high frequency
bands from 13 GHz up to 38 GHz, the 9400AWY family is suitable for urban and short haul applications;
nevertheless 9400AWY family has been extended also to lower frequency bands in the range from 7/8
GHz up to 11 GHz allowing to apply the flexible structure of 9400AWY also for long hops in regional area.
In the frequency band from 7 GHz up to 13 GHz flat and selective fading have to be considered and hop
computations common to long distance radios have to be applied eventually considering frequency
diversity 1+1 with hitless switch improvement.
In the bands from 15 GHz up to 38 GHz instead, unavailability aspects due to rainfall are dominant. To
give a general idea of the distance coverage that can be achieved, the figures inserted in the following
provide a summary of possible hop lengths as function of different ITU–R zones, of different availability
percentages (99.999%, 99.99% and 99.9%), of different frequencies. If precise dimensioning of the link
is requested, it is necessary to perform hop computation through DMHC software.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 286 / 332
332
Modulation 4 QAM Capacity 8 E1 Configuration 1+0 Polarization V Length in Km
8E1/T1 4QAM
F 13 13 13 15 15 18
15 18 18
antenna 34,7 34,7 34,7 36,3 36,3 36,3 38,4 38,4 38,4
sys. Gain 109 109 109 106 106 106 103 103 103
avail. 99,999% 99,995% 99,99% 99,999% 99,995% 99,99% 99,999% 99,995% 99,99%
8 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
12 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
15 30 30 30 30 30 30 28,1 30 30
19 30 30 30 30 30 30 21,7 30 30
22 30 30 30 29,6 30 30 18,5 30 30
28 30 30 30 22,2 30 30 14,3 26 30
Rain rat e
30 30 30 30 20,5 30 30 13,3 24,2 30

32 28,7 30 30 19,1 30 30 12,5 22,7 30
35 25,7 30 30 17,2 30 30 11,4 20,7 28,1
42 20,7 30 30 14,1 27,7 30 9,5 17,3 23,6
60 14,1 30 30 9,9 19,6 28,4 6,8 12,5 17,3
63 13,5 29,1 30 9,5 18,8 27,4 6,5 12 16,7
93 9,8 22,8 30 6,9 14,5 22,1 4,8 9,2 13,2
145 5,1 10,5 15,9 3,9 7,4 10,7 2,9 5,2 7,1
115 7,4 16,6 26,5 5,3 10,9 16,5 3,8 7,2 10,2
F 23 23 23 25 25 25 28 28 28
antenna 39,9 39,9 39,9 40,8 40,8 40,8 41,5 41,5 41,5
sys. Gain 102 102 102 99 99 99 95 95 95
avail. 99,999% 99,995% 99,99% 99,999% 99,995% 99,99% 99,999% 99,995% 99,99%
8 25,7 30 30 22,7 30 30 17,5 27,9 30
12 18,4 28,1 30 15,8 25,2 30 12,1 19,7 24,9
15 15,1 23,8 29 12,8 20,9 26,1 9,9 16,2 20,6
19 12,2 19,6 24,4 10,3 17 21,5 8 13,1 16,7
22 10,6 17,3 21,8 9 14,9 19 7 11,5 14,7
28 8,5 14,1 17,9 7,2 12 15,4 5,7 9,3 11,9
Rain rate
30 8 13,3 17 6,8 11,3 14,6 5,3 8,7 11,2

32 7,6 12,6 16,1 6,4 10,7 13,8 5 8,3 10,6
35 7 11,6 14,9 5,9 9,9 12,8 4,7 7,7 9,8
42 5,9 10 12,9 5 8,4 10,9 4 6,6 8,4
60 4,4 7,4 9,7 3,7 6,3 8,2 3 4,9 6,3
63 4,2 7,1 9,4 3,6 6 7,9 2,8 4,7 6,1
93 3,1 5,4 7,3 2,6 4,6 6,1 2,1 3,5 4,7
145 2 3,3 4,4 1,7 2,9 3,7 1,4 2,3 3
115 2,5 4,4 5,9 2,1 3,7 4,9 1,7 2,9 3,8
F38 38 38 38 Rain rate exceeded at 0.01% of the time with integration

antenna 44,3 44,3 44,3 time of 1 minute (mm/h)y
sys. Gain 93 93 93
avail. 99,999% 99,995% 99,99% TYPICAL REGIONS
811 1 7 ,7 22 ,3 Sahara, West Siberia
12 7,8 12,6 16 Labrador
15 6,5 10,5 13,3 Canada,Central Siberia, Russia, Chile
19 5,3 8,6 10,9 SW China, Hawaii
22 4,7 7,6 9,7 Argentina,California,North Africa,Moscow,N. Europe
28 3,8 6,2 7,9 UK,Ireland,North China
Rain r a te
30 3,6 5,9 7,5 Norway,I celand

32 3,5 5,6 7,1 Central Europe
35 3,2 5,2 6,6 SE Africa
42 2,8 4,5 5,7 Italy,E.Europa,NE USA,Uruguay,Turkey,Korea,India
60 2,1 3,4 4,4 Greece,NW Italy
63 2 3,3 4,2 South Japan,North Mexico,SE USA
93 1,5 2,5 3,2 S.Mexico,Caribbean Sea,E.Brasil,Venezuela,Perù,Taiwan
145 1 1,7 2,2 Central America,Central Brazil,Madagascar,Indonesia
115 1,3 2,1 2,7 Cameron
Fig. 125. Hop length VS availability due to rain (4QAM – 8xE1)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 287 / 332
332
8E1/T1 16QAM
F 13 13 13 15 15 15 18 18 18
antenna 34,7 34,7 34,7 36,3 36,3 36,3 38,4 38,4 38,4

sys. Gain 102 102 102 99 99 99 96 96 96

avail. 99,999% 99,995% 99,99% 99,999% 99,995% 99,99% 99,999% 99,995% 99,99%
8 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
12 30 30 30 30 30 30 27 30 30
15 30 30 30 30 30 30 21,6 30 30
19 30 30 30 26,2 30 30 17 28,8 30
22 30 30 30 22,3 30 30 14,7 25 30
28 25,1 30 30 17,2 30 30 11,6 19,8 25,9
Rain rate
30 23,2 30 30 16 28,9 30 10,8 18,6 24,3

32 21,5 30 30 14,9 27 30 10,2 17,5 22,9
35 19,5 30 30 13,6 24,6 30 9,3 16 21,1
42 16 30 30 11,3 20,5 28 7,9 13,6 17,9
60 11,1 21,7 30 8 14,8 20,4 5,7 9,9 13,3
63 10,6 20,8 29,8 7,7 14,2 19,7 5,5 9,6 12,8
93 7,7 16,1 24 5,6 10,9 15,6 4 7,3 10
145 4,3 8,2 11,7 3,3 6 8,3 2,5 4,3 5,8
115 6 12,1 18 4,4 8,4 12 3,2 5,8 7,9
F 23 23 23 25 25 25 28 28 28
antenna 39,9 39,9 39,9 40,8 40,8 40,8 41,5 41,5 41,5
sys. Gain 95 95 95 92 92 92 88 88 88
avail. 99,999% 99,995% 99,99% 99,999% 99,995% 99,99% 99,999% 99,995% 99,99%
8 9.36 28,7 30 17,9 26,4 30 13,8 21,1 25,5
12 14,8 22,2 26,3 12,7 19,7 23,9 9,8 15,3 18,9
15 12,3 18,9 22,8 10,5 16,5 20,3 8,1 12,8 15,9
19 10 15,7 19,3 8,6 13,6 16,9 6,6 10,5 13,1
22 8,8 14 17,3 7,5 12 15 5,9 9,3 11,6
28 7,2 11,5 14,4 6,1 9,8 12,4 4,8 7,6 9,6
Rain rate
30 6,8 10,8 13,6 5,7 9,2 11,7 4,5 7,2 9

32 6,4 10,3 12,9 5,4 8,8 11,1 4,3 6,8 8,6
35 5,9 9,5 12,1 5 8,1 10,3 4 6,3 8
42 5,1 8,2 10,4 4,3 7 8,9 3,4 5,4 6,9
60 3,7 6,2 8 3,2 5,2 6,7 2,5 4,1 5,2
63 3,6 6 7,7 3,1 5 6,5 2,4 4 5
93 2,7 4,5 6 2,3 3,8 5 1,8 ,33 3,9
145 1,7 2,9 3,7 1,5 2,5 3,2 1,2 2 2,5
115 2,2 3,7 4,9 1,9 3,1 4,1 1,5 12.00 3,2
F 38 38 38 Rain rate exceeded at 0.01% of the time with integration

sys. Gain 86 86 86
8 9 14 17,3 Sahara, West Siberia
12 6,5 10,2 12,7 Labrador
15 5,4 8,6 10,7 Canada,Central Siberia, Russia, Chile
22 4 6,3 7,9 Argentina,California,North Africa,Moscow,N. Europe
Rain r a te
30 3,1 5 6,2 Norway,I celand

32 3 4,7 5,9 Central Europe
35 2,8 4,4 5,5 SE Africa
63 1,8 2,8 3,6 South Japan,North Mexico,SE USA
93 1,3 2,2 2,8 S.Mexico,Caribbean Sea,E.Brasil,Venezuela,Perù,Taiwan
115 1,1 1,8 2,3 Cameron

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 288 / 332
332
16E1/T1 4QAM
F 13 13 13 15 15 15 18 18 18
antenna 34,7 34,7 34,7 36,3 36,3 36,3 38,4 38,4 38,4
sys. Gain 106 106 106 103 103 103 100 100 100
avail. 99,999% 99,995% 99,99% 99,999% 99,995% 99,99% 99,999% 99,995% 99,99%
8 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
12 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
15 30 30 30 30 30 30 25,1 30 30
19 30 30 30 30 30 30 19,6 30 30
22 30 30 30 26,2 30 30 16,8 29,5 30
28 29,9 30 30 19,9 30 30 13,1 23,2 30
Rain rat e
30 27,5 30 30 18,4 30 30 12,2 21,6 28,8

32 25,4 30 30 17,2 30 30 11,4 20,3 27,1
35 22,8 30 30 15,6 29,5 30 10,5 18,6 24,9
42 18,5 30 30 12,9 24,4 30 8,8 15,6 21
60 12,8 26,3 30 9,1 17,4 24,7 6,3 11,3 15,5
63 12,2 25,2 30 8,7 16,6 23,7 6,1 10,9 14,9
93 8,8 19,6 30 6,3 12,8 19 4,4 8,3 11,7
145 4,8 9,4 13,9 3,6 6,8 9,6 2,7 4,8 6,5
115 6,7 14,5 22,4 4,9 9,8 14,4 3,5 6,5 9,2
F 23 23 23 25 25 25 28 28 28
antenna 39,9 39,9 39,9 40,8 40,8 40,8 41,5 41,5 41,5
sys. Gain 99 99 99 96 96 96 92 92 92
avail. 99,999% 99,995% 99,99% 99,999% 99,995% 99,99% 99,999% 99,995% 99,99%
8 23,3 30 30 20,5 30 30 15,9 24,8 30
12 16,8 25,5 30 14,4 22,7 27,8 11,1 17,7 22,2
15 13,8 21,6 26,2 11,8 18,9 23,5 9,1 14,7 18,4
19 11,2 17,9 22,1 9,5 15,4 19,4 7,4 11,9 15,1
22 9,8 15,8 19,8 8,4 13,6 17,2 6,5 10,5 13,3
28 7,9 12,9 16,3 6,7 11 14,1 5,3 8,5 10,9
Rain rate
30 7,5 12,2 15,5 6,3 10,4 13,3 5 8,1 10,2

32 7 11,5 14,7 6 9,8 12,6 4,7 7,6 9,7
35 6,5 10,7 13,7 5,5 9,1 11,7 4,4 7,1 9
42 5,5 9,2 11,8 4,7 7,8 10 3,7 6,1 7,7
60 4,1 6,9 8,9 3,5 5,8 7,5 2,8 4,5 5,8
63 3,9 6,6 8,6 3,4 5,6 7,3 2,7 4,4 5,6
93 2,9 5 6,7 2,5 4,2 5,6 2 3,3 4,3
145 1,9 3,1 4,1 1,6 2,7 3,5 1,3 2,1 2,8
115 2,4 4,1 5,4 2 3,4 4,6 1,6 2,7 3,5

sys. Gain 90 90 90
8 10,1 16,1 20,1 Sahara, West Siberia
12 7,2 11,6 14,5 Labrador
15 6 9,6 12,1 Canada,Central Siberia, Russia, Chile
19 5 7,9 10 SW China, Hawaii
22 4,4 7 8,9 Argentina,California,North Africa,Moscow,N. Europe
Rain r a te

35 3 4,8 6,1 SE Africa
60 2 3,2 4,1 Greece,NW Italy
93 1,4 2,4 3 S.Mexico,Caribbean Sea,E.Brasil,Venezuela,Perù,Taiwan
145 1 1,6 2 Central America,Central Brazil,Madagascar,Indonesia
115 1,2 2 2,5 Cameron

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 289 / 332
332
16E1/T1 16QAM
F 13 13 13 15 15 15 18 18 18

antenna 34,7 34,7 34,7 36,3 36,3 36,3 38,4 38,4 38,4

sys. Gain 99 99 99 96 96 96 93 93 93
avail. 99,999% 99,995% 99,99% 99,999% 99,995% 99,99% 99,999% 99,995% 99,99%
8 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
12 30 30 30 30 30 30 23,8 30 30
15 30 30 30 29,6 30 30 19,2 30 30
19 30 30 30 23 30 30 15,3 25,2 30
22 28,9 30 30 19,7 30 30 13,2 22 28,1
28 22 30 30 15,4 26,8 30 10,5 17,6 22,7
Rain rate
30 20,4 30 30 14,3 25 30 9,9 16,5 21,4

32 19 30 30 13,4 23,5 30 9,3 15,6 20,2
35 17,3 30 30 12,3 21,5 28,6 8,5 14,4 18,6
42 14,3 26,3 30 10,2 18,1 24,1 7,2 12,2 15,9
60 10 18,8 26,2 7,3 13,1 17,8 5,3 9 11,9
63 9,6 18,1 25,2 7 12,6 17,1 5 8,7 11,4
93 7 13,9 20,2 5,1 9,6 13,5 3,7 6,6 8,9
145 4 7,3 10,3 3,1 5,4 7,4 2,3 4 5,3
115 5,4 10,6 15,4 4,1 7,5 10,5 3 5,3 7,1
F 23 23 23 25 25 25 28 28 28
antenna 39,9 39,9 39,9 40,8 40,8 40,8 41,5 41,5 41,5
sys. Gain 92 92 92 89 89 89 85 85 85
avail. 99,999% 99,995% 99,99% 99,999% 99,995% 99,99% 99,999% 99,995% 99,99%
8 18,4 25,6 29,3 16,1 23,4 27,5 12,4 18,6 22,3
12 13,5 19,9 23,5 11,6 17,6 21,2 8,9 13,7 16,7
15 11,2 17 20,4 9,6 14,8 18,1 7,4 11,5 14,1
19 9,2 14,2 17,3 7,8 12,3 15,2 6,1 9,5 11,8
22 8,1 12,7 15,6 6,9 10,9 13,5 5,4 8,4 10,5
28 6,6 10,5 13 5,6 8,9 11,2 4,4 6,9 8,7
Rain rate
30 6,3 9,9 12,3 5,3 8,4 10,6 4,2 6,6 8,2

32 5,9 9,4 11,7 5 8 10,1 4 6,2 7,8
35 5,5 8,7 11 4,7 7,4 9,4 3,7 5,8 7,3
42 4,7 7,5 9,5 4 6,4 8,1 3,2 5 6,3
60 3,5 5,7 7,3 3 4,8 6,2 2,4 3,8 4,8
63 3,4 5,5 7 2,9 4,7 5,9 2,3 3,7 4,6
93 2,5 4,2 5,5 2,1 3,5 4,6 1,7 2,8 3,5
145 1,6 2,7 3,5 1,4 2,3 2,9 1,1 1,8 2,3
115 2 3,4 4,5 1,8 2,9 3,8 1,4 2,3 2,9

sys. Gain 83 83 83
8 8,2 12,6 15,5 Sahara, West Siberia
12 6 9,3 11,5 Labrador
15 5 7,8 9,7 Canada,Central Siberia, Russia, Chile
22 3,7 5,8 7,3 Argentina,California,North Africa,Moscow,N. Europe
28 3,1 4,8 6 UK,Ireland,North China
Rain r ate

35 2,6 4,1 5,1 SE Africa
93 1,3 2 2,6 S.Mexico,Caribbean Sea,E.Brasil,Venezuela,Perù,Taiwan
115 1,1 1,7 2,2 Cameron
A.3.2 : Most common applications of 9400AWY family
In the following drawings the most common applications of 9400AWY family within different types of
network exploiting radio technology are shown, together with example of possible configurations and
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
station types that can be used in the network nodes.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 290 / 332
332
Mobile Switching Centre
Base Station
Controller
Base Station
Fig. 129. Cellular GSM applications
Node B
RNC
Aggregation
node
UTRAN UTRAN
capillary backbone
network
Aggregation
node
RNC
Fig. 130. Cellular UMTS applications
Corporate
PBX
STM1 A9600 (SDH)
Voice STM0
Datas
16x2 Mbit/s
: ON4W
I/O 4W
I/ORST
ACO
NMS
1 FEXT
/ OFF
ESC
NMS
EXT
1ODU
ESC
URG EXT
2 ATT
NURG
2 DEBUG
EXT IDU
ODU
A
T
C
L
E
BTS/Cellular 2x2 A9400 (PDH)
4x2
::
2x2 t
SME
POTS
ISDN
LAN
A7390 (LMDS) A9400 (PDH)
SoHo/Residential+
POTS
A7385 (WIP)
Internet
High data
rate
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 131. Alcatel 9400 AWY integration in Wireless IP and LMDS network
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 291 / 332
332
Customer Box: either LAN router or Switch

10/100 Ethernet 10/100 Ethernet
Fig. 132. Lan–to–Lan Single Hop
OMSN with LAN–to–LAN board

Site–to–Site Traffic
is mapped on a
Ethernet frame dedicated SDH VC
mapped in SDH
VC12, VC3, VC4
SDH
Ring/Network
10/100 Ethernet
10/100 Ethernet 10/100 Ethernet
The OMSN LAN–to–LAN

board is present only at
each terminating node
Fig. 133. Lan–to–Lan Single Hop with SDH Transport (2 sites)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 292 / 332
332

OMSN with LAN–to–LAN board
Ethernet frame Site–to–Site Traffic

mapped in SDH is mapped on a
VC12, VC3, VC4 dedicated SDH VC
SDH Ethernet frame

Ring/Network demapped from SDH
VC12, VC3, VC4
(N–1) Eth. I/Fs

(N–1) Eth. I/Fs between PDH
between and OMSN
customer box
and PDH
The OMSN LAN–to–LAN
board is present only at
(N–1) Eth. I/Fs between
each terminating node
customer box and OMSN
Fig. 134. Lan–to–Lan Single Hop with SDH Transport (N=3 sites)
A.4 : 9400AWY versions
Presently, two 9400AWY versions are available, which differ mainly for the IDU architecture:
– 9400AWY Rel.1 , that is not described in this handbook.
N.B. For information regarding 9400AWY Rel.1 , please refer to:

• 9400AWY Rel.1 Technical Handbook P/N 3DB 05653 BAAA
• or 9400AWY Rel.1 Documentation CD–ROM P/N 3DB 05653 AAAA
– 9400AWY Rel.2 , that is described in this handbook.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 293 / 332
332
A.5 : Equipment structure
Alcatel 9400AWY family has been conceived using split mount approach with an ODU (Out Door Unit) for
transceivers extended from the very high frequencies (38 GHz) down to low frequencies (11 GHz) and an

IDU (In Door Unit) for base–band, pushing equipment flexibility, easy deployment and quick

commissioning.
Between the two main units above, the system uses a single standard coaxial cable carrying the main
traffic, the remote supply voltage and auxiliary information over long runs.
The ODU is independent from the configuration and it can be used with integrated or separated antenna.
Two different Hardware implementations of IDU are available and both can be adapted to a wide
configuration range :
– IDU supporting 1+0 unprotected configuration
– IDU supporting 1+1 protected configurations with HSB or Space diversity or Frequency diversity
A plug–in data card (available as option), provides the capability for full data transport or for mixed
data/voice traffic.
The embedded Hitless Switch capability (in IDU platform) provides the automatic errorless switching from
main to spare channel in 1+1 configurations.
As far as user interfaces are concerned the following plesiochronous signals can be available
– 2E1 to 16E1 or 1xE3 for ETSI market
– 4DS1 to 16DS1 or 1xDS3 for ANSI market
The choice is made by Craft Terminal provide that an appropriate software key (flash card) is inserted in
the IDU, and that the proper hardware is present.
If present, the data card provides the user 2x10/100BT Ethernet interface. This data can be transmitted
mixed or not with voice traffic.
Table, rack or wall mounting are available for all the IDU assemblies.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 294 / 332
332
A.6 : Capacities and modulations
The following main tributaries and modulation formats are implemented:

Tab. 93. Channel spacing [MHz]
4QAM 16QAM 4QAM 16QAM
2E1 3,5 x 4DS1 5 x

4E1 7 3,5 8DS1 10 5
8E1 14 7 16DS1 20 10
16E1/E3 28 14 DS3 40 20
ETSI market ANSI market
The minimum channel spacing is:

– 3.5MHz for the ETSI market;
– 5MHz for the North American market.
The minimum gross bit rate is:

– 4.896Mb/s for the ETSI market (2E1/4QAM);
– 7.14 Mb/s for the North American market (4DS1/4QAM).
For each working mode there is the possibility to mix user “voice” (E1, DS1, …) with user “data” (Ethernet
10/100BaseT).
Capacity upgrade scenario both for capacity and modulation is accomplished via software keys
management implementing on the same IDU/ODU capacity and modulation agility concept.
For the IDU platform a hardware upgrade could be also needed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 295 / 332
332
A.7 : Radio compatibility versus 9400UX
The design of ODU AWY allows the backward compatibility versus the previous Low–Medium Capacity
PDH MW 9400UX product line at radio level.

The ODU AWY can be connected to the IDU UX (equipment called 9400UX FLAT) so that:

• Radio links with mixed 9400UX / 9400UX FLAT are possible
• Mixed configuration are also possible being the ODUs mechanically compatible
• It is possible to extend the UX 1+0 configuration in 1+1 with ODU AWY
• ODU AWY can be used as a spare of ODU UX
• 9400UX and 9400UX FLAT have a common set of installation materials
• 9400UX and 9400UX FLAT have a common supervision protocol (RQ2, SNMP)
Provided that the two equipment have the same configuration, the following Tab. 94. summarizes the
compatibility rules at link level
Tab. 94. Compatibility vs 9400UX at link level

SITE A SITE B
compatibility
IDU ODU ODU IDU
OK UX
UX
OK AWY
UX Classic UX Classic
OK UX
AWY
OK AWY
OK UX
UX
OK AWY
UX Light UX Light
OK UX
AWY
OK AWY
NOK UX
UX
NOK AWY
AWY AWY
NOK UX
AWY
OK AWY
With respect 9400UX the 9400UX FLAT:

• extends the band coverage from 11 to 38GHz (including 11, 28 and 32 GHz)
• makes available 16 QAM modulation for all the frequency bands (including 15 and 18GHz)
• provides RTPC feature for all the frequency bands (including 15 and 18GHz)
• make possible to change the modulation by changing the SW Key only (the ODU does not
change)
• provides the RF Loop–back feature as standard
• has the same or better performance
• is lighter and more compact
With respect 9400AWY the 9400UX FLAT:

• does not allow ANSI Frequency Plans and ANSI Traffic Interfaces
• does not provide Ethernet Interface
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• does not allow 4E1 data rate for 16QAM modulation

• allows the RQ2 Network Management
As far as the IDU–ODU cable is concerned, the three solutions (UX/ UX FLAT/ AWY) share the same cable.
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 296 / 332
332
APPENDIX B : SAFETY–EMC–EMF–ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING
B.1 : Introduction
This appendix describes the equipment labelling and the norms mandatory or suggested (see also point
d ) on page 13) that must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment.
The stated norms apply both to the operations described in this manual and to those described in the
related manuals listed in para.C.2.1 on page 313.
This chapter is organized as follows:
– Compliance with International Standards herebelow
– Safety Rules on page 298 including:
• General Rules on page 298

• Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command on page 299
• Dangerous Electrical Voltages on page 300
• Risks of Explosions on page 301
• Moving Mechanical Parts on page 301
• Equipment connection to earth on page 302
• Heat–radiating Mechanical Parts on page 302
• Microwave radiations (EMF norms) on page 303
• Specific safety rules in this handbook on page 303
– Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) on page 304 including:
• EMC General Norms – Installation on page 304

• EMC General Norms – Turn–on, Tests & Operation on page 304
• EMC General Norms – Maintenance on page 304
– Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges on page 305
– Suggestions, notes and cautions on page 305
– Labels affixed to the 9400AWY equipment on page 306
B.2 : Compliance with International Standards
Refer to chapter 1–2 on page 47.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 297 / 332
332
B.3 : Safety Rules
B.3.1 : General Rules

• Before carrying out any installation, turn–on, tests & operation and maintenance operations
carefully read the related Handbooks, in particular:
– Installation
– Line–Up or Commissioning
– Maintenance chapter of the Technical Handbook
• Observe safety rules
– When equipment is operating nobody is allowed to have access inside on the equipment
parts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools
– In case of absolute need to have access inside, on the equipment parts when it is operating
this is allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or Technical
assistance is meant :
”personnel which has adequate Technical Knowledge and experience necessary to be

aware of the danger that he might find in carrying out an operation and of the necessary
measurements to reduce danger to minimum for him and for others”.
The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts.
The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the parts no specified
is not permitted.
The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which give
access to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belong
exclusively to the service personnel.
– For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any
inflammable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings,
inscriptions ect.
– It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth.
• The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe
to safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety,
i.e., not exposing persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged.
• Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER.
To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station
upstream (rack or station distribution frame).
• The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and
statement:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
SAFETY RULES
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 298 / 332
332
B.3.2 : Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command
It is of utmost importance to follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.
The labels are fully compliant with International Norms ISO 3846–1984. The symbols or statements are
enclosed in geometric shapes: ISO 3864–1984.
CONTAINS A SYMBOL STATEMENT

INDICATES FORBIDDANCE (WHITE BACKGROUND
WHIT RED RIM–BLACK SYMBOL OR STATEMENT)
IT IS A COMMAND (BLUE BACKGROUND–WHITE
SYMBOL OR STATEMENT).
CONTAINS A SYMBOL
INDICATES WARNING OR DANGER (YELLOW
BACKGROUND–BLACK SYMBOL AND RIM)
CONTAINS A STATEMENT PROVIDING INFORMATION

OR INSTRUCTION.
(YELLOW BACKGROUND–BLACK STATEMENT AND RIM)
The labels have been affixed to indicate a dangerous condition. They may contain any standard–known
symbol or any statement necessary to safeguard users and service personnel against the most common
ones, specifically:
• dangerous electrical voltages
• harmful optical signals
• risk of explosion
• moving mechanical parts
• heat–radiating Mechanical Parts
• microwave radiations
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed
The symbols presented in para.B.3.3 through B.3.8 are all the possible symbols that
could be present on Alcatel equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the
equipment this handbook refers to.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 299 / 332
332
B.3.3 : Dangerous Electrical Voltages
B.3.3.1: Electrical safety: Labelling

The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc).

If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label associated to it will state that the equipment
will have to be grounded before connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:
WARNING !
Ground protect the equipment before
connecting it to the mains
Make sure that power has been cut off
before disconnecting ground protection.
B.3.3.2: Electrical safety: general rules
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury: carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where d.c.
power is present, described in the relevant installation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenance
documents and the following general rules:
a) Personal injury can be caused by –48 V dc. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part
of your body.
b) Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in
burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with
primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 300 / 332
332
B.3.4 : Risks of Explosions
B.3.4.1: Labelling and safety instructions

This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signalled by the following label:
Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gasses to down flow
(battery–emitted hydrogen). A 417–IEC–5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed next to it indicating that the
openings must not be covered up.
B.3.5 : Moving Mechanical Parts
The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:
Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been
stopped.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 301 / 332
332
B.3.6 : Equipment connection to earth
Terminals for equipment connection to earth , to be done according to international safety standards, are
pointed out by the suitable symbol:

terminal
symbol
The position of earth connection terminals is specified in the equipment Installation Handbook.
B.3.7 : Heat–radiating Mechanical Parts
The presence of heat–radiating mechanical parts is indicated by the following warning label in compliancy
with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury: carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where
heat–radiating mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turn–up and
commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule:
a) Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of
your body.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 302 / 332
332
B.3.8 : Microwave radiations (EMF norms)
Equipment emitting RF power (Reminder from site preparation procedure):

– The site must be compliant with ICNIRP guidelines or local regulation if more restrictive.
– The following rules should be strictly applied by Customer:
• Non authorized persons should not enter the compliance boundaries, if any, for the general
public.
• Compliance RF boundaries, if any, related to Electro Magnetic Field exposure must be marked.
• Workers should be allowed to switch–off the power if they have to operate inside compliance
boundaries.
• Assure good cable connection.
• Install the antenna as high as possible from floor or area with public access ( if possible the
cylinder delimitating the compliance boundaries, if any, or the cylinder corresponding to the
transmission area directly in front of antenna with the same diameter as the antenna, more than
2 meters high).
• Install the antenna as far as possible from other existing equipment emitting RF power.
– Anyway remind that someone standing in front of the 9400AWY antenna may cause traffic
shutdown.
Place the relevant stickers:
On the site when applicable (when people can cross the compliance
boundaries and/or the transmission area of the antenna, i.e. roof top
installation)
– Warning label “Do not stand on the antenna axis”
On the mast (front side)

– EMF emission warning sign (Yellow and black) to be placed at bottom of
antenna, visible by someone moving in front of the antenna (roof top
EMF emission
installation)
warning sign
On the antenna (rear side)

– EMF emission warning sign, placed on the antenna.
B.3.9 : Specific safety rules in this handbook
Specific safety rules are specified in the following parts:

– chapter 3–5 :
• para.3–5.2.2 on page 186
• para.3–5.3.1 on page 187
• para.3–5.5.5.1 on page 197
• para.3–5.5.5.2 on page 200
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 303 / 332
332
B.4 : Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)
The equipment’s EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination,
grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic

units, presence of dummy covers, etc.).

• Before starting any installation, turn–on, tests & operation and maintenance work refer to the
Technical Handbook, specifically to Handbooks:
– Installation,
– Line–Up or Commissioning
– Maintenance chapter in this Handbook
• The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this handbook
by the symbol and term:
ATTENTION EMC NORMS
B.4.1 : EMC General Norms – Installation
• All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use
only cables and connectors suggested in this technical handbook or in the relevant Plant
Documentation, or those specified in the Customer’s”Installation Norms.” (or similar
documents)
• Shielded cables must be suitably terminated
• Install filters outside the equipment as required
• Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper dia. and impedance
• Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before
having cleaned and decrease it.
• Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and decrease all peripheral surfaces
(contact springs and connection points, etc.)
• Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
• To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.
B.4.2 : EMC General Norms – Turn–on, Tests & Operation
• Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility

• Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers,
ESD connector protections, etc.)
• To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information given
B.4.3 : EMC General Norms – Maintenance
• Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean
and decrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.)
• Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well.
• Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 304 / 332
332
B.5 : Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges
Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionary
measures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after having terminated
the maintenance and monitoring operations.

Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges, to this concern the following warning
labels have been affixed:
Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the
installation/maintenance phases.
Workers are supplied with antistatic protection devices consisting of:
• an elasticized band worn around the wrist
• a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack.
ELASTICIZED BAND
COILED CORD
Fig. 135. Antistatic protection device kit
B.6 : Suggestions, notes and cautions
Suggestions and special notes in this handbook are marked by the following symbol:
Suggestion or note....
Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol:
TITLE...

statement....
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 305 / 332
332
B.7 : Labels affixed to the 9400AWY equipment
This paragraph indicates the positions and the information contained on the identification labels affixed
to the equipment, with the exception of those already mentioned in para.B.3.2 (page 299) thru’ B.5 (page

305).

B.7.1 : Labels affixed on the IDU
This label is affixed on the back side of:
– the IDU MAIN unit [position (C) in Fig. 39. on page 103]
– the IDU EXTENSION unit [position (C) in Fig. 40. on page 105]
A C
B
A C
B
Alcatel Logo
ALCATEL
9400AWY Equipment Acronym

12345 (example) Notified body
N.B. this symbol is present only on equipment
supplied by Alcatel from August 13th, 2005
Electrostatic Device Logo
Logistical item 3DB 05620 AAXX (example) ANV P/N Customer
A ANV P/N Customer bar code 128
P/N ICS 3DB 05620 AAAA 01 (example) ANV P/N + ICS
B ANV P/N + ICS bar code 128
SERIAL N CW052402145 (example)
Factory serial number
SERIAL N CW052402141 (example)
C Factory serial number bar code 128
24 V ± 20%, 4.2 A max (example) Power Supply Version 24 V
48–60 V ± 20%, 2.2–1.1 A (example) Power Supply Version 48/60 V
Feeding to Continuous Current
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 136. Label affixed on the IDU
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 306 / 332
332
B.7.2 : Labels affixed on the ODU
a) the following label is affixed externally to all types of ODU and ODU’s TRANSCEIVER boxes (see
Fig. 73. on page 160 and Fig. 74. on page 161):
A9400 Equipment Acronym & Alcatel Logo

ALCATEL

N.B. this symbol is present only on equipment
supplied by Alcatel from August 13th, 2005
55 1.5A Power supply (Feeding to Continuous Current)
Logistical Item 3CC13007AAXX (example) ANV P/N Customer
A ANV P/N Customer bar code 128
Serial no LM0348T05EJ (example) Factory Serial number
B Factory Serial number bar code 128
TX Frequency MHz 38319,75–38876,25
Working frequency range
(example)
Shifter 1260 MHz (example) Shifter
TX Sub–band 2 – 2P (example) TX Sub–band
Initial SW/ICS 3CC13007AAAA 02 (example) ANV P/N and ICS of the software loaded in factory
PN/ICS 3CC12988AAAA 01 (example) ANV P/N + ICS
C ANV P/N + ICS bar code 128
Fig. 137. Label affixed on the ODU and ODU’s TRANSCEIVER box
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
b) only for 7–8 GHz ODUs, an additional label is placed on the branching assembly (for details refer to
Fig. 76. and Fig. 77. on pages 163–164).
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 307 / 332
332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
332
3DB 06687 BA AA
308 / 332
APPENDIX C : DOCUMENTATION GUIDE
This appendix contains all information regarding:

– this handbook, herebelow
– the Customer Documentation set this handbook belongs to, on page 313
– general on Alcatel Customer Documentation, on page 316
C.1 : Handbook guide
This paragraph contains all information regarding this handbook and is structured as follows:
– Handbook applicability herebelow

– Purpose of the handbook on page 310
– Handbook history on page 310
C.1.1 : Handbook applicability
a) Product–release applicability
This handbook applies to the following product-releases:
PRODUCT RELEASE ANV P/N FREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)

9470AWY 2.00.00 3DB 05470 AAAA 7&8
9411AWY 2.00.00 3DB 06539 AAAA 11
9413AWY 2.00.00 3DB 06541 AAAA 13
9415AWY 2.00.00 3DB 06543 AAAA 15
9418AWY 2.00.00 3DB 06545 AAAA 18
9423AWY 2.00.00 3DB 06547 AAAA 23
9425AWY 2.00.00 3DB 06551 AAAA 25
9428AWY 2.00.00 3DB 06553 AAAA 28
9432AWY 2.00.00 3DB 06555 AAAA 32
9438AWY 2.00.00 3DB 06557 AAAA 38
b) SWP and Version applicability

The current edition of this handbook applies to the set of system’s equipment, configurations and
features associated to the following SWP versions:
SWP P/N
SWP DENOMINATION Version
(REF. in Tab. 22. on page 82)
Validated for:
SWP 9400AWY R.2.0 CD–ROM REF.[55] V2.0.0 to V2.0.1
Preliminary information not validated for:
SWP 9400AWY R.2.0.2 CD–ROM V2.0.2 to V.2.0.3
REF.[56]
to be confirmed N.B.
N.B. In case subsequent SWP versions, if any, would have no impacts on matters described
in this handbook, this handbook will apply also to them.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 309 / 332
332
C.1.2 : Purpose of the handbook
This handbook belongs to the Customer Documentation set envisaged for the equipment specified in
para.C.1.1 on page 309.

Refer to para.C.2 on page 313 in order to have the list and description of the Customer Documentation set.
With reference to equipment configuration stated in para. C.1.1 on page 309, and taking into account that
the system consists of an InDoor Unit (IDU) and of an OutDoor Unit (ODU), this handbook provides the
following information:
– system description at different detail levels, with regard to system, hardware and software
– system technical specifications
– IDU and ODU item Part Numbers and equipping rules (provisioning)
– unit operative hardware description: access point description (usage of LED, pushbuttons, switches
and connectors for Customer use), connection rules, hardware setting options
– spare parts provisioning
– routine maintenance procedures
– corrective maintenance and unit replacement procedures (N.B.)
N.B. The C.T. Operator’s Handbook must be always available to the Operator in charge of
equipment troubleshooting and repair, as it contains the information necessary to carry out
troubleshooting through the Craft Terminal.
C.1.3 : Handbook history
C.1.3.1: List of the editions and modified parts
The following Tab. 95. indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 310 / 332
332
Legend: n = new part m = modified part blank= part unchanged
Tab. 95. Handbook history

01 02 03 04 05
HANDBOOK EDITION ⇒
FRONT MATTER n
Preliminary information n
Handbook applicability, purpose and history n m
Handbook structure n m
Safety–EMC–ESD norms and equipment labelling n m
Quick Guide n m
SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL
n m
SPECIFICATIONS
1–1 System description n m
1–2 Technical specifications n m
SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATIONS n
2–1 Station layouts n m
2–2 IDU part lists n m
2–3 IDU provisioning n m
2–4 IDU operative information n m
2–5 Distributor subracks n
2–6 ODU and antenna configurations, part lists and provisioning n m
2–7 ODU and related optional tools operative information n m
SECTION 3: MAINTENANCE n
3–1 Maintenance Policy n
3–2 Set and use of EOW functions n
3–3 Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts n m
3–4 First Level Maintenance n
3–5 Second Level Maintenance n m
SECTION 4: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION n
4–1 Radio transmission features n m
4–2 System description n m
4–3 IDU Data Interface plug–in n
4–4 Network management and interworking n m
4–5 Alarms n m
SECTION 5: APPENDICES n
A Introduction to the 9400AWY radio system family n m
B Safety–EMC–EMF–ESD norms and equipment labelling n m
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
C Documentation guide n m
ÉÉÉ
D List of symbols and abbreviations n
ÉÉÉ
SECTION 6: ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS n
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 311 / 332
332
C.1.3.2: Notes on ED.01
– Draft editions neither validated nor officially released issue, for internal validation purposes:
• Ed.01A–DRAFT created on April 4th, 2005
• Ed.01B–DRAFT created on April 19th, 2005

– Ed.01 created on May 2nd, 2005 is the first released and validated version of the handbook,

associated to SWP version V2.0.0.
C.1.3.3: Notes on Ed.02

– Draft editions neither validated nor officially released issue, for internal validation purposes:
• Ed.02A–DRAFT created on October 19th, 2005
– Ed.02 created on October 27th, 2005 is the second released and validated version of the handbook
(N.B.), and has been done for the following major changes:
– whole handbook updated for the additional system features of new SWP version
V2.0.1 and new SWP package V2.0.2–2.0.3:
• new ETSI IDU Main and Extension units, with different ’3DB xxxxx AB––’ P/N
• management of DS3/E3 ANSI interfaces and relevant HW items
• management of ANSI–type ODUs and relevant HW items
• management of 7–8 GHz ODUs (new product 9470AWY) and relevant HW items
• frequency shifter management (para.4–1.2 on page 210)
• security management (para.4–4.1.1 on page 268)
according to the additional feature and SWP–version relationship, summed–up in
Tab. 1. on page 14
N.B. Nevertheless, handbook can be used also in association with SWP former
version V2.0.0.
– dismantling & recycling reference documentation, according to 2002/96/EC WEEE,
described in chapter Technical specifications
– in chapter IDU operative information description of alarm roots for RCI and LCI leds
corrected
– in chapter ODU and antenna configurations, part lists and provisioning new 3FT and
4FT integrated antennas added
– in chapter Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts description of Maintenance,
Installation and Station Kit Tools improved
– new IDU and ODU labelling, according to 2002/96/EC WEEE, described in Appendix
Safety–EMC–ESD norms and equipment labelling
– ’scalable’ name for 9400AWY Rel.2.0 has been removed.
Errors found in previous edition have been corrected.
Revision bars point out major (listed above) and minor (not listed above) modifications with
respect to ED.01.
Revision bars in correspondence of empty lines or empty table rows, point out parts eliminated
or shifted in other places of the handbook.
N.B. This edition is validated in conjunction with SWP versions V2.0.0 to V2.0.1 only
Following Information, still missing or to be confirmed/changed, will be updated in future
edition(s) of this handbook :
– Additional feature and SWP–version relationship for versions > V2.0.1, on page 14
– 9411AWY tunability, on page 51
– P/N of ’100 wire SCSI cable for 1+1’, on page 84 (other pages affected in chapter 2–3)
– N.B.’j’ on page 86 to be confirmed
– ’SWP REG. 9400AWY R2.0.2 CDROM’, on pages 85 and 309, new name and new P/N
to be confirmed & defined.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 312 / 332
332
C.2 : Documentation set description
This paragraph contains all information regarding the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Customer Documentation and
is organized as follows:
– 9400AWY Rel.2.0 product–release–version handbooks herebelow

– Additional documentation for 1320CT platform on page 315
C.2.1 : 9400AWY Rel.2.0 product–release–version handbooks
This paragraph lists and briefly describes the handbooks making up the documentation set envisaged for
9400AWY Rel.2.0 product release.
Please refer to following para.C.3 on page 316 for a general description of Alcatel Customer
Documentation system.
The list of handbooks given here below is valid as at the issue date of this Handbook and
can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook.
Some of the handbooks listed here below may not be available as at the issue date of this
Handbook.
The standard Customer Documentation is in the English language and is composed by different
handbooks.
Tab. 96. herebelow lists the handbooks.
The [REF] indication in Tab. 96. is relevant to the handbook brief description given in tables Tab. 97. thru’
Tab. 101. in the following.
Tab. 96. 9400AWY Rel.2.0 product release handbooks

TECHNICAL HANDBOOK REF
9400AWY Rel.2.0 Technical Handbook [A]
INSTALLATION AND LINE–UP HANDBOOKS
9400AWY Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook [B]
9400AWY Rel.2.0 Line–up Guide [C]
Interference investigation procedure [E]
OPERATOR’S HANDBOOKS
9400AWY CT Operator’s Handbook SWP 2.0 [D]
DOCUMENTATION CD–ROM
DCP 9400AWY R.2.0 CD_ROM [F]
1320 CT OPERATOR’S HANDBOOKS
– 1320CT Basic Operator’s Handbook
– AS Operator’s Handbook
– ELB Operator’s Handbook
see Tab. 102. on page 315
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 313 / 332
332
Tab. 97. 9400AWY Rel. 2.0 Technical Handbooks
REF HANDBOOK ANV P/N NOTES

9400 AWY Rel. 2.0 Technical Handbook 3DB 06687 BAAA this handbook

[A] Provides information regarding AWY equipment description and composition, station
layouts, hardware setting documentation and maintenance.
Tab. 98. 9400AWY Rel. 2.0 Installation and Line–Up Handbooks

• The Installation Handbook provides information regarding Equipment installation, according
to Alcatel WTD LAB. rules.
• The Line–up Guide provides information regarding equipment line up and commissioning,
according to Alcatel WTD LAB. rules.
[B] 9400 AWY Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook 3DB 06687 DAAA
[C] 9400 AWY Rel.2.0 Line–up Guide 3DB 06687 EAAA
Tab. 99. Operator’s Handbooks related to the specific Software Package SWP
9400 AWY Rel.2.0

[D] 3DB 06687 CAAA nb1
CT Operator’s Handbook SWP 2.0
Provides AWY SWP screens and operational procedures for Equipment SW management and
maintenance.
nb1 SWP identification: point b ) on page 309
Tab. 100. Handbooks common to all Alcatel Radio Transmission products
Interference investigation procedure 3DB 04165 EAAA

[E] Describes the measurement procedure for the interference searching in the various RF bands
used by Alcatel Radio Transmission products.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 314 / 332
332
Tab. 101. 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Documentation on CD–ROM
REF CD–ROM TITLE ANV P/N NOTES

DCP 9400AWY 2.0 CD_ROM 3DB 06687 AAAA

[F] Contains, in electronic format (ACROBAT pdf files), all handbooks listed in Tab. 96. on
page 313 (when all envisaged handbooks are released), with exception of 1320 CT
Operator’s Handbooks for which the CD–ROM REF.[J] (herebelow) is envisaged
C.2.2 : Additional documentation for 1320CT platform
Tab. 102. Documentation common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform
CT–K
REF Version HANDBOOK ANV P/N NOTES
(N.B.)
1320CT Rel.3.x
3.0.1 3AL 79551 AAAA
Basic Operator’s Handbook
[G]
Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT (Craft
terminal) of Alcatel InfoModel Network Elements.
AS Rel.6.5
3.0.1 3AL 88876 AAAA
Operator’s Handbook
[H]
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm Surveillance
software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
ELB Rel.2.x
3.0.1 3AL 88877 AAAA
Operator’s Handbook
[I]
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log Browser
software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
DCP 1320 CT 3.x

3.0.1 3AL 79552 AAAA
CD_ROM EN
[J]
Contains, in electronic format, the 1320 CT Operator’s Handbook REF.[G] to [I]
N.B. The CT Version is displayed when, on the PC, you select the 1320CT application for its
launch.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 315 / 332
332
C.3 : General on Alcatel Customer Documentation
This paragraph describes in general the Alcatel Customer Documentation system, details the association
between the product levels and the associated documentation, and explains Customer Documentation

characteristics as well as the policies for its delivery and updating.

This paragraph is fully applicable to the 2nd generation Radio Product families of Alcatel WTD (Wireless
Transmission Division) only.
C.3.1 : Customer–Independent Standard Customer Documentation
a) Definition
Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as

plant–independent and is always independent of any Customization.
Plant–dependent and/or Customized documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to

commercial criteria as far as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned
N.B. Plant–dependent and Customized documentation is not described here.
b) Aims of standard Customer Documentation
Standard system, hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel
the possibility and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating, and
maintaining the equipment according to Alcatel Laboratory design and Installation Dept. choices. In
particular:
• the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the explanation
of the man–machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it;
• maintenance is described down to faulty PCB location and replacement.
N.B. No supply to Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and
production documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is
envisaged.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 316 / 332
332
C.3.2 : Product levels and associated Customer Documentation
See Fig. 139. on page 318.

a) Products
A ”product” is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of
performances and services that it is meant for.
E.g. 9400 AWY is a product.
b) Product-releases
A ”product” evolves through successive ”product–releases”, which are the real products marketed
for their delivery at a certain ”product–release” availability date. A certain ”product–release” performs
more functionalities than the previous one.
E.g. Rel.1.0 and Rel.2.0 are two successive ”product–releases” of the same ”product”.
A ”product–release” comprehends a set of hardware components and at least one “Software
Package” (SWP); as a whole, they identify the possible network applications and the equipment
performances that the specific ”product–release” has been designed, engineered, and marketed for.
c) Configurations and Network Elements

In some cases, a ”product–release” includes different possible “configurations” which are
distinguished from one another by different “Network Element” (NE) types and, from the
management point of view, by different SWPs.
d) SWP Releases and Versions
See Fig. 138. herebelow.

A SWP is identified by the “configuration” name and by the “version” number (tree digits).
The version’s first digit corresponds to the “product–release” number first digit; the second digit
identifies, together with the first, the SWP “release”.
The third digit of the SWP version identifies the Patch Level of the SWP Release.
SWP version
SWP Release
Product Patch Level

Release’s
first digit
SWP evolution for bug fixing purposes 1. 0. 7

and/or minor additional features
(same SWP Release within same Product–Release) 1. 0. 9
SWP evolution for main additional features 1. 0. 7

(new SWP Release within same Product–Release)
(N.B. see next page) 1. 1. 2
1. 0. 7
SWP evolution for additional features
(new SWP Release of a new Product–Release) 2. 0. 2
Fig. 138. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 317 / 332
332
N.B. Sometimes, different SWP Releases (within the same Product–Release) are commercially
distinguished by different names, e.g. :
SWP version SWP–Release commercial name

1.0.x 1.0
1.1.x 1.0B
1.2.x 1.0C
e) Customer Documentation
A ”product–release–(configuration)” has its own set of standard Customer Documentation, usually

formed of several handbooks, i.e., in general:
• System and Hardware documentation:

– one (or more) Technical Handbook(s)
– an Installation Handbook
– a Commissioning Handbook or Line–Up Guide
• Software documentation:
– a Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbook, associated to the specific SWP–Release
– other Operator’s Handbooks (typically those associated to the SW platform embedded
in the SWP)
PRODUCT
evolution
PRODUCT–RELEASE 1.0 PRODUCT–RELEASE 2.0
ALTERNATIVE CONFIGURATIONS
CONFIG.A CONFIG.B
evolution
PRODUCT SWP REL.1.0 SWP REL.1.1
LEVELS
DOCUMENTATION
CONFIG.A SWP REL.1.0 SWP REL.1.1

System & HW SW SW
Documentation Documentation Documentation
Fig. 139. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 318 / 332
332
C.3.3 : Handbook and CD–ROM supply to Customers
a) Standard supply
Handbooks and CD–ROMs are standard commercial items and are ordered and delivered as any
other Alcatel commercial item.

Handbooks and CD–ROMs are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer
to.
The number of handbooks or CD–ROMs per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.
b) Product–documentation consistency
Equipment description and lay–out are always general, i.e. they never describe the actual
composition of the equipment supplied to Customer (this task is entrusted to plant–dependent
documentation).
Detailed hardware documentation concerns actually supplied units and is coherent with the
production issue of such units.
Software–associated handbooks are coherent with the supplied SWP release.
Copies of the handbooks regarding a specific product–release previously delivered can be required
specifying P/N and edition.
c) In–advance supply
Whenever handbooks or CD–ROMs are delivered before the relevant equipment delivery, there is
the risk that their contents might not agree with the characteristics of the equipment which will be
delivered: the more they are in advance the less are they likely to agree.
d) Supplying updated handbooks and CD–ROMs to Customers
Supplying updated handbooks or CD–ROMs to Customers who have already received previous
issues is subject to commercial criteria.
By updated handbook delivery, we mean the supply of a complete copy of a new issue of the
handbook (supplying errata–corrige sheets is not envisaged).
e) Copyright notification
The technical information of the handbooks and CD–ROMs supplied to Customers is the property
of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
f) Supply to Customers of Customer Documentation source files
Presently not envisaged.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 319 / 332
332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
332
3DB 06687 BA AA
320 / 332
APPENDIX D : LIST OF SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS
Tab. 103. List of symbols

N.B. This table lists some symbols whose interpretation could be doubtful.
SYMBOL MEANING AND COMMENTS

In this handbook it is not the division symbol. It means ’from .. to ..’.
E.g.:
<value1> <value2>
means:
from <value1> (included) to <value2> (included)
A polarization symbol like this:
H V
POLARIZATION can be assumed as either horizontal or vertical
SYMBOLS H
Once you have decided a polarization (e.g. )
the opposite direction symbol will be opposite polarization (e.g. )
V
Tab. 104. List of abbreviations

ABBREVIATION MEANING
STARTING WITH NUMBERS
9400AWY Short–haul low/medium capacity digital microwave radio links
9400FSO PDH Low/Medium Capacity Free Space Optic System
9600FSO SDH/SONET High Capacity Free Space Optics System
9600LSY STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System
9600USY Urban Haul Synchronous split mount Radio System
A
ABIL Enabling
ABN Abnormal
AC Alternate Current
ACSE Association Control Service Element
ADC – A/D Analog to Digital Converter
AE Access Enable
AF Atomic Function
ADM Add and Drop Multiplexer
AGC Automatic Gain Control
AIS Alarm indication Signal
AMI Alternate Mark Inversion
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
AND Alarm on both station batteries

ANSI American National Standard Institute
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 321 / 332
332
AP Alternate Polarization

API Access Point Identifier
APS Automatic Protection Switching
ASAP Alarm Severity Assignment Profile
ASE Application Service Element
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
AT Attended Alarm
ATL Far Terminal Alarm
ATM Asynchronous transfer Mode
ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control
ATTD ATTendeD (alarm storing)
AUX AUXiliary
B
BATT Battery
BB Base Band
BBE Background Block Error
BCA Common Battery Dial Pulsing (Telephone Set)
BER Bit Error Rate
BNC Bayonet Not Coupling
BSC Base Station Controller
BTS Base Transceiver Station
C
CAND All power supply units are faulty
CCDP Co–Channel Dual Polarized (Frequency re–use)
CCITT International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee
CE European Conformity
C/I Carrier to Interference ratio
CK Clock
CLA Common Loss Alarm
CLEC Competitive Local Exchange Carrier
CMISE Common Management Information Service Element
CMISS Card Missing
CO Central Office
COAX Coaxial
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
CP Co–polar
CPE Customer premises equipment
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 322 / 332
332
CPI Incoming parallel contacts
CPO Outgoing parallel contacts

CPU Central Processor Unit
CRC–n Cyclic Redundancy Check – n
CS (Item) Change Status
CT Craft Terminal
CTP Connection Termination Point
D
DA Distant Alarm
DAV Distinguishing Attribute Value
D/A Digital to Analog (converter/conversion)
DC Direct Current
DCE Data Circuit Terminating Equipment
DCN Data Communication Network
DDF Digital Distribution Frame
DEFEC FEC Decoder
DEM Demodulator
DEMUX Demodulator
DF Dialog Failure
DIV Diversity
DM Degraded Minute
DRRS Digital Radio Relay System
DTE Data Terminal Equipment
DTI Department of Trade and Industry
DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency
E
EB Errored Block
EBC Errored Block Count
EBU European Broadcasting Union
EC Equipment Controller
ECC Embedded Communication Channel
ECS External Communication Service
ECT Equipment Craft Terminal
EE Equipment Engineering
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
EF Equipment Failure
EFD Event Forwarding Discriminator
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 323 / 332
332
EIA Electronic Industries Association

EIRP Equivalent Isotropically Radiated Power
EMC ElectroMagnetic Compatibility
EMI Electromagnetic interference
EOW Engineering Order Wire
EPS Equipment Protection Switching
ES Errored Second
ESD Electrostatic discharges
ETR European Telecommunication Report
ETS European Telecommunication Standard
ETSI European Telecommunication Standard Institute
EW Early Warning
EWH Early Warning High
EWL Early Warning Low
EXC–BER Excessive BER
F
F Interface F (for Craft Terminal) or Fuse
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FD Frequency Diversity
FE Front End
FEC Forward Error Correction (Code)
FIT Failure Unit
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
FR ’Failure Rate’ or ’Frequency Reuse’
FSO Free Space Optics
G
GA General Alarm or Gate Array
GND Ground
GNE Gateway Network Element
GSM Gateway Network Element
H
H Horizontal (polarization)
HBER High Bit Error Rate
HDBK Handbook
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
HDB3 High Density Binary 3

HDLC High level Data Link Control
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 324 / 332
332
HET HETerofrequency or Frequency Diversity
HEW High Early Warning

HK HouseKeeping
HSB or HST Hot Standby
HW Hardware
HWP Hardware Protection
I
ICS Item Change Status
ID IDentifier
IDU InDoor Unit
IEC International Electro technical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering
IF Intermediate Frequency
IN Input
IND Indicative alarm
INT Internal Local Alarms
I/O Input/Output
IP Internet Protocol
IRC International Radiotechnical Commission
ISO International Standards Organization
ITU–R (*) International Telecommunication Union – Radiocommunication
ITU–T (*) International Telecommunication Union – Telecommunication
L
LAN Local Area Network
LBER Low Bit Error Rate
LC Loss of Configuration
LDI Local Defect Indication
LED Light Emission Diode
LEW Low Early Warning
LMDS
LO Local Oscillator
LOF Loss Of Frame
LOM Loss Of Multiframe
LOS Loss Of Signal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
LS Low Speed
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 325 / 332
332
M

MAJ Major (alarm)
MCF Message Communication Function
MDT Mean Dawn Time
MEM Memorization
MIB Management Information Base
MIN Minor (alarm)
MOC Managed Object Class
MOD Modulator
MTBF Mean Time Between Failures
MTTR Mean Time To Repair
MUX Multiplexer
N
NBF Narrow Band Filter
NDS Near–end Defect Second
NA Not Applicable
NE Network Element
NEBC Near–end Errored Block Count
NF Noise Figure
NFD Net Filter Discrimination
NG Not Urgent
NMS Network Management System
NRZ Non Return to Zero
NSA Non Service Aff.
NTP Network Time Protocol
NURG Not urgent alarm
O
OCT Office Craft Terminal
ODF Optical Distribution Frame
ODU OutDoor Unit
ODUC ODU Controller
OFS Out of Frame Second
OH OverHead
O&M Operation and Maintenance
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
OIRT Russian Regulatory Body

OOF Out Of Frame
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 326 / 332
332
OOS Out Of Service
OR Logic sum/Loss of only one station battery

ORALIM OR’ing of station power supply alarm
OS Operation System
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OSPF Open Shortest Path First
OUT Output
OVF Overflow
OW Order Wire
P
PABX Private Automatic Branch Exchange
PBX Private Branch Exchange
PC Personal Computer
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PFAIL Power supply failure
PI Physical Interface
PLL Phase Locked Loop
PM Performance Monitoring
PPI Plesiochronous Physical interface
ppm parts per million
PPP Point to Point Protocol
PRx Received power
PRBS Pseudo Random Binary Signal
P/S Parallel/Serial converter
PSA Protection Switch Actual
PSA C Protection Switch Count
PSA D Protection Switch Actual Duration
PSK Portable Service Kit
PSR Protection Switch Request
PSU Power Supply Unit
PTx Transmitted power
Q
QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QOS Quality Of Service
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
R
RAI Remote Alarm Indication
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 327 / 332
332
RAM Random Access Memory

RAPS Radio Automatic Protection Switch
RC Radio Controller
RCK Received clock
RCIM Radio Channel Identifier Mismatch
RDI Remote Defect Indication
RECC Recommendation
RECT Remote Equipment Craft Terminal
REI Remote Error Indication
REF Reference
REL Release
RF Radio Frequency
RI Remote Inventory
RL Received Level
RLTS Received Level Threshold Second
RMS Root Mean Square
RNURG Not urgent Alarm command. Lights up the relative rack red LED
RPI Radio Physical Interface
RPS Radio Protection Switching
RSPI Radio Synchronous Physical Interface
RT Transceiver
RTF Remote Terminal Failure
RTPC Remote Transmit Power Control
RURG Urgent Alarm command. Lights up the relative rack red LED
Rx Receiver/Received
S
SA Service Affecting or Service Alarm
SC Service Channel or System Controller
SD Space Diversity
SES Severely Errored Second
SF Signal Fail
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SP Splitter
SQ Squelch
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
S/P Serial to Parallel

SSF Server Signal Fail
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 328 / 332
332
STBY Standby
SU Supervisory Unit
SW ”Switch” or ”Software”
SWP Software Package
T
TA Remote Alarm
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TD Layout drawing
TDM Time Division Multiplexer
TEM Transversal Electric Mode
TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch
TL Transmitted Level
TLTS Transmitted Level Threshold Second
TM Transmission and Multiplexing
TMN Telecommunication Management Network
TPH Telephone
TP Termination Point
TR TRansceiver
TRIB Tributary
TRU Top Rack Unit
Tx Transmitter/Transmitted
U
U Unavailability
UAS UnAvailable Second
UAT UnAvailable Time
UDR Unpressurized Rectangular Waveguide Type
UG Urgent Alarm
UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
URG Urgent
URU Underlying Resource Unavailable
USY Urban Haul Synchronous split mount Radio System
UT Unavailability Time
UTRAN Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network
V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
V Vertical (polarization)
VCO Voltage Controller Oscillator
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 329 / 332
332
VF Voice Frequency

VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
W
WAN Wide Access Network
WBF Wide Band Filter
WIP Wireless IP
WLT Wireless Line Terminal
WS Work Station
X
XPD Cross Polar Discrimination
XPIC Cross Polar Interference Canceller
XPI Cross Polar Interference
XPIF Cross Polar Improvement Factor
XPOL Cross Polar/Polarization
NOTES:
(*) Owing to change of name, all documents issued by the two ITU committees (CCIR ND
CCITT) in 1992 (and in some cases even before then) are classified as ITU–R and ITU–T,
respectively.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 330 / 332
332
SECTION 6: ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS
This section lists and contains the documents enclosed to this handbook.
The enclosed documents are listed in following Tab. 105. ; each of them has its own P/N, different from
that of this main handbook and different from one another.
Tab. 105. List of enclosed documents
REF [x] is used in other parts of this handbook to refer to the item.
N.B. The edition of the documents (listed in this table) that are physically enclosed in the handbook
is the highest available when this handbook is assembled. The edition of enclosed documents
is not specified in this table.
Documents listed and enclosed by P/N
REF DOCUMENT P/N DOCUMENT CONTENT
[A] 3DB 01397 AAAA MSZZQ Installation Kit Tool part lis
[B] 3DB 01398 AAAA MSZZQ Maintenance Kit Tool part list n.b.1
[C] 3DB 01399 AAAA MSZZQ Station Kit Tool part list
n.b.1 referenced to by para.3–3.2.2 on page 174.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 06687 BA AA 331 / 332
332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
END OF DOCUMENT
332
3DB 06687 BA AA
332 / 332
Technical Handbook
Alcatel 9400AWY
Rel.2.0
7–8–11–13–15–18–23–25–28–32–38 GHz
short–haul low/medium capacity digital microwave radio links
3DB 06687 BAAA Ed.02

Documentation set for 9400AWY Rel.2.0
Handbook ANV P/N
9400AWY Rel.2.0 Technical Handbook 3DB 06687 BAAA this handbook
9400AWY Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook 3DB 06687 DAAA
9400AWY Rel.2.0 Line–up Guide 3DB 06687 EAAA
Interference investigation procedure 3DB 04165 EAAA
9400AWY CT Operator’s Handbook SWP 2.0 3DB 06687 CAAA
1320CT Rel.3.x Basic Operator’s Handbook 3AL 79551 AAAA
1330AS Rel.6.5 Operator’s Handbook 3AL 88876 AAAA
ELB Rel.2.x Operator’s Handbook 3AL 88877 AAAA
When supplied on paper, this handbook is divided by registers, for an easier access to the information
herein contained:
CONTENTS REGISTER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY
HANDBOOK STRUCTURE
SAFETY–EMC–EMF–ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING
QUICK GUIDE
SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1

SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATIONS 2
SECTION 3: MAINTENANCE 3
SECTION 4: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 4
SECTION 5: APPENDICES 5
SECTION 6: ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS 6

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE
THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N: 3DB 06687 BAAA Ed.02

9400AWY Rel.2.0
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ORIGINALE INTERLEAF: FILE ARCHIVIAZIONE: cod ANV (source&pdf)
– No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 334 + 6 = 340
– DIMENSIONE BINDER SORGENTE (du –ks): 114.128 kbytes
INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

– COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE:
HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY:
SERVONO 6 SEPARATORI NUMERATI DA 1 A 6

6 REGISTERS NUMBERED FROM 1 TO 6 ARE NECESSARY
– STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING
No pagine numerate
fase
(facciate) numbered
step
No pages da from a to
1 TARGHETTE - LABELS
2 FRONTESPIZIO - FRONT 2
3 PARTE INIZIALE - FRONT MATTER ⇒ 1/332 18/332
4 INSERIRE SEPARATORE ’1’ - INSERT REGISTER ’1’
SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND

5 ⇒ 19/332 66/332
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND

7 ⇒ 67/332 166/332
CONFIGURATIONS
9 SECTION 3: MAINTENANCE ⇒ 167/332 206/332
11 SECTION 4: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ⇒ 207/332 282/332
CONTINUA – CONTINUES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02 RELEASED
3DB 06687 BAAA TQZZA Y 1/ 6
6

CONTINUA – CONTINUES
No pagine numerate
fase
(facciate) numbered
step
No pages da from a to
13 SECTION 5: APPENDICES ⇒ 283/332 330/332
15 SECTION 6: ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS ⇒ 331/332 332/332
TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES: 334
TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS: 167
– STAMPARE I SEGUENTI DOCUMENTI FRONTE/RETRO ED INSERIRLI DOPO LA PAG.332
– PRINT FOLLOWING DOCUMENTS RECTO-VERSO AND INSERT THEM AFTER PAGE 332
• I seguenti documenti sono archiviati individualmente in ePDM con gli stessi formati indicati qui
sotto; prendere l’edizione più alta disponibile.
• The following documents are individually archived in ePDM with the same formats stated below;
get the highest edition available.
16 INSERIRE DOCUMENTO – INSERT DOCUMENT 3DB 01397 AAAA MSZZQ

fine istruzioni assemblaggio – end of assembly instructions
PUBLISHING NOTES
• Labels are done according to A-Italy binder format.
• Source files and printable files of this handbook are archived in ePDM:
– Source file: ALICE 6.10 ARCHIVED BY GAPI 3.10.1
– Printable file: PDF file must be opened with ACROBAT Reader Version 5.0 at least.
(N.B. : it has been created with ACROBAT DISTILLER 7.0)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02 RELEASED
6
Site
VIMERCATE WTD
Originators 9400AWY REL.2.0

E.CORRADINI
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
Domain : 9400AWY Rel.2.0

Division : TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
Rubric :
Type : 9400AWY REL.2.0 TECHICAL HANDBOOK
Distribution Codes Internal : External :
Approvals
Name P.CREMONESI V.FOSSATI R.PELLIZZONI

App.
Name
App.
3DB 06687 BAAA

Ed.02
9400AWY Rel.2.0
7–8–11–13–15–18–23–25–28–32–38 GHz
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02 RELEASED
6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
RELEASED
6
3DB 06687 BAAA TQZZA
Y
4/ 6
9400AWY Rel.2.0
7–8–11–13–15–18–23–25–28–32–38 GHz
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
9400AWY Rel.2.0
7–8–11–13–15–18–23–25–28–32–38 GHz
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
9400AWY Rel.2.0
7–8–11–13–15–18–23–25–28–32–38 GHz short–haul low/medium capacity digital microwave radio links
3DB 06687 BAAA Ed.02 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK VOL.1/1
9400AWY Rel.2.0
7–8–11–13–15–18–23–25–28–32–38 GHz short–haul low/medium capacity digital microwave radio links
9400AWY Rel.2.0
7–8–11–13–15–18–23–25–28–32–38 GHz

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02 RELEASED
6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
RELEASED
6
3DB 06687 BAAA TQZZA
Y
FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO – END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT
6/ 6

Technica 9400 AWY PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technica 9400 AWY PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

9400AWY REL.2.

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

SAFETY–EMC–EMF–ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . 19

1–2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

02 051027 0000023750 P.CREMONESI ITAVE E.CORRADINI ITAVE

ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ORIGINATOR

3DB 06687 BA AA 1 / 332

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

2–2 IDU PART LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

2–3 IDU PROVISIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

2–4 IDU OPERATIVE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

2–4.4.10 NMS G.703 – Audio 2 (pin–out and description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

3DB 06687 BA AA 2 / 332

2–4.5.3 Flash Card upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

2–4.6 Installation of tributary plug–ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

2–5 DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

2–7 ODU AND RELATED OPTIONAL TOOLS OPERATIVE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

SECTION 3: MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

3–2 USE OF EOW FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

3–3 MAINTENANCE TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

3–3.2.2 Maintenance, Installation and Station Kit Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

3DB 06687 BA AA 3 / 332

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

3–5 SECOND LEVEL MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

SECTION 4: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

4–2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

4–2.3.2 IDU Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

3DB 06687 BA AA 4 / 332

4–2.4.5 TMN line: G.703 and “in–frame” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

4–2.4.6 User Service channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

4–3 IDU DATA INTERFACE PLUG–IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

4–4 NETWORK MANAGEMENT AND INTERWORKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

4–5 ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

SECTION 5: APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

A.3.2 : Most common applications of 9400AWY family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

3DB 06687 BA AA 5 / 332

APPENDIX B : SAFETY–EMC–EMF–ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . 297

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

APPENDIX C : DOCUMENTATION GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

APPENDIX D : LIST OF SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

SECTION 6: ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

3DB 06687 BA AA 6 / 332

Fig. 1. 9400AWY R.2.0 split–mount system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Fig. 2. IDU Main Unit: external interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

3DB 06687 BA AA 7 / 332

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

3DB 06687 BA AA 8 / 332

Fig. 109. ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Fig. 110. Near end IDU cable loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Tab. 15. ETSI System Characteristics 4E1 2E1 BER 10–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

3DB 06687 BA AA 9 / 332

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Tab. 67. 28 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

3DB 06687 BA AA 10 / 332

Tab. 75. Part list of available integrated antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155